text: rr) Slops' : Kaa>tp ► x^ f. Wahanga XX. Hnr.ut re 2" t C2(k Naiua I f t t * t ' Wtit\ ";.■':.-:..'. ■;■ ;'? ok ol Mormon" is giv n for tin lo anr j - B] .; blical Character. " for the mccel. This   Hahi o Ihu karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. Me tuku atu o kouiou reta ki te lu.tr, o te Karere, M. A. C, Hastiigs, H. B. Ko te ulu it.o TE KARERE i te Uu e nir* heicni, e (£s). Iko fe CiKanfla Ccnci: lf»e malua utu mo leu pepa ka vJhiv hi si. J. H. Timkini, Tumuaki MtJu.ua Maridna K. Ewutuna, Etila. Twfa Wttihna, hiita Boa AiihhuL Ko vga Kai-'l uhUMai (cpei ial U ; iters) Wiremu A. Koura Reihami H. Karala ncabiliuura ifcapati. PRELUDE Sloicln trith expression. S ft. Tracy Y. Cannon. f- ■* 1 I j 7 • \ ==:t F f ' | - — tr^~^ SACRAMENT GEM FOR FEBRUARY, 1926 [n memory of the broken flesh we eat the broken bread; And witness with a cup, afresh, Our faith in Christ, our Head. POSTLUDE Soft Hft. mrf-tm&SjE Mj' il m& kJ F ^d l l kAKi-Kh 1 lanii  tatou he me tatou ngoikorctanga .' I uiua atu te I mere tetahi tangata ki tana liaerc i niohio ia ko hra ia liaere ai. Me mohio la kei tc hiahia ia ki te liaerc ki aga maunga, ki nga taha moana, ki tc taone, ki te awa, ki lira ranei. I te wa ka mohio ia ko hea ia haore ai ka moliio Ia me pehea te timata. Ka mohio ano hoki i;i he alia nga mca c mini e ia. Ki tc mca he haere roa ka whakaritc i;i i nga mca mana i mua tana timatanga. Kngari «• korc ia  a hei ako i a tatou hei whakaatu hoki mehentea kei tc huarahi tika tatou, kahore rarici. Ko ni^'A tangata e noho ki a la ko nga niea e haere ana i 1c tika a tac noa te mutuhga o taua huarahi. Kei te hiahia tatou ki te haere kia noho tahi ki to tatou Ariki, no reira ka main tatou a taea noatia te mutunga nga huarahi te Ariki. Te tikanga tenei he taea e tatou te takahi tatou hara me tatou ngoikoretanga taea noatia kia tu hara-kore tatou ki mua i a la i to tatou Ariki. .Meite kore tatou niahi i tenei e kore o tatou wainia e taea te tupu. 1 o tatou takahi.katoa e wJiakatata ana tatou ki te vrafci e haere nei tatou. la wahi iti te hinu e tahuna ana i roto te liiiu.i e whr.katata ana i te tiima ki te wapu. Pera ano hoki nga t ' c te Hahi he mea e arahi i a tatou Ida tata ki te mulling!   nga reo ke. Vga Mahi 2: B-7. Ka vvhakapaea e haurangi ana nga Apotoro. Mahi 2: 13-15. 2. [Cauwhautanga tuatahi o t»- Rongo-pai i muri   te kakenga. (a Whakaaturanga mo te poropititanga a Qoere. Ho . Tirohia t iiL r  -p:ii. Whakanuinga ake   Akoranga 3 TE MAH] I HlRUHARAMA 1. Te whakaoranga te tangata kopa tuna whanauiiga mai, e to kaha te Tohungatanga. Nga Mahi 3: 1.10; Hoani 9: 1-3; Arami 15; 3-12; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 42 : 43, 44, 48. (a) Ka kauwhau a Pita ki nga Hurai mo runga i ta ratou i ripeka ai (te Karaiti). 1. I meatia e ratou i roto i te kuaretanga. Nga Mahi 3: 17; Hoani 16: 3; Ruka 23; 34; 1 Nnvhai 11 : 28-32. 2. Ivo te whakaatn ka murua ano ta ratou, engari "kia tae mai ra ano nga wa te whakahokinga nga mea katoa." Tirohia Nga .Main 3: 19-20. 2. Pita raua ko lioani i mua i nga Toliunga. (a) Nga Ilaruki me te Aranga mai. Matiu 22: 23. (h) Uiuinga te mana nga Apotoro. Mahi 4:7; Matin 21: 23. (c) Te whakahoki a Pita. Mahi 4: 10-12; Hoani 15: L6. (d) Ko te whakapono i roto i to kaha o te ingoa te Kai-Whakaora. 1. Iriiringa. Matin 29: L8-20 ; Moronai 7 : 34. 2. Whakauunga (Confirmation). Moronai 2: 2. 3. Whakaritenga (Ordination). Ako, me nga [\a\ve. 107: 40-52; Moronai 3; 2-:). 4. Whakaoranga. Ilcnii 5: 14; Ako, me nga Kawe, 42: 44. f>. Inoi. Hoani ir> : l(i ; Arami 14; 26; 3 Xiwhai 19:8. (i. Pci i nga Rewera. '■> Xiwhai 7: 1!>; Maka 1(>: 17. 7. \'g;i manaakitanga. Ako, me nga Kawe. L32: 46. N. Mo te riri iho (roblike) i a Ilatana. Ako, r.10 n •■.-. K&v e, rue to   I • Tiki-o-rangi a Eliona e hanga. Ako nga Ka w e. l (, -"> : 5. I. Niona ko te hunga ngakau ma. Ako, me nga Kawe. 97: 16-21. ■_'. I igakau ma ka kite i te Atua. Matiu 3. Kia whiwhi ki te rungatiratanga o te Tikitiki-o-rangi, me pupn ri tatou i te 1 ure   te Tiki; iki-o- Ako, me nga Kawe. ss : 22. (d) Te hokohokouga n nga rawa. Mahi ! : 34-37; 2: !' Ako, me nga Kawe, 42; 2! (a) To raua ngakau-rua-tanga. Mahi5: 1-2. h Ka ni ia  . Hanuerc 27, iy^6 TE KAKEKK 7 Henri 1 : 13. 2. "Ko ta to tangata hold i rui ai, ko tenei tana e kokoti ai." Karatia 6: 7-9; Arami 41 ; 4-5. PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS" First Sunday, February 7, 1926. Uniform Fast Day Lessou Subject: Why do J believe that if we are to become the kind of people the Lord has intended, we must aim at perfec- tion 9 No one would set out for a trip without an objective; in the mountains, to the resort, into the city, out into the country, for a fishing trip, etc. Once the objective is decided upon, the traveller pursues a course that will take him to it. if the trip is a long one, more preparations are necessary than when a nearby point is the goal. So it all depends on what and where our destination is, as to the kind of preparations we make, and the course we pursue. When a young man readies the age of IS or 20, he wishes to have rather clearly in mind what he is going to do in life; whether he will go into architecture, or whether he will go into business, or become a builder or a tradesman. When his mind is made up, he can then concentrate and direct all his energies to that end. [f a traveller was going through the country, and had no destination in mind, and would take any road thai his fancy suggested, his sanity would he questioned. What would we say of a boy in college who would switch from course to course, or from school to school, without pur- pose? Would he ever achieve success in any profession? The Lord has placed us here upon the earth, and b\ I ica ts of the Gospel, has point'"' oul to us the path or course we \\w to puisne it' we are to come back into His presence. And to coir. and live wit 1 Llim means thai we "must be perfed even as our Father in i 1 aven is perfect. " ft i the lord's plan thai we do come back to Flim; thai   waul to enjoy the great esl bl( within the gifl of the Lord, viz., to he privileged to find the path, and 1 > pursue il 1 1 its vcrj end. Therefore, we l» « l a 'c for thai long journey; we must equip ourselves For it ; we must in»' make de >i rs; we must not abandon the course; \ i« dare not lose our guide-book the Gospel plan. Only those who take this entire journey and reach the lation are pleasing unto the Lord. We desire to please the L > ■■ .•'! ; just as ea ;il perfection. Intrr duction to Second Year Ljssons. The work of the Second Year Theological class for the \ ear 1926 will be a study of characters from the   work mil 1 lie purposes of ( Jod. •'!. liden, his lirst abode. 4. The stale of Adam and Eve in Eden. II. Th. fall. 1. How accomplished 10 I E K H.uii! _. The purpose of i he fall. I Mven fi "in Kden. Questions for Teachers. 1. Did Adam know and realize the effects of the fall when lie partook of i he fruil offered by E\ «• ' •J. What w iis the change, physically and spiritually, m roughl upon Adam i s e resull of the fall .' Fourth Sunday, February 28, I02(i. Lesson 3. — Adam Begins Actual Earth Liu. Objective: show thai through Adam God began making kn )\\ n to man his ureal plan and purpose in tlm earth, I. The first iii-rat commandment. 1 . \n\. ti» be complied w it h. 2. Adam a father. .'5. ( liven dominion over t he earth. 1 1. The  \ God after Adam began his actual earth life. INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT IH1 BOOK OF MORMON" First Sunday, February 7. 1926 Uniform last Day lesson 'I he Uniform Fast Day 1 this class will be the same as those given tor the new I lav.. See page 7. Hanuere 27, iy^6 TE KARERti Introduction to the Year's Work The Book of Mormon is to be the text-book in the Second Year, Second Intermediate Department for the coming year. It is the aim of the year's work to stimulate a desire within every pupil in these classes throughout the Church to read the Rook itself, that in their youth they may feel its spirit, and that its teachings may bear fruit in their lives. With this in mind, the lessons for the year begin at once from the text-book. If possible, a Book of Mormon should be in the possession of every pupil, in which he can mark striking- passages that are to be discussed in the class. This will no doubt add to interest in reading the book. Ln order to teach the Book of Mormon with real results, the teacher must himself glow with interest in his subject. The characters who play their parts in the history should be in his mind as of those acting before him on that stage with its long- ago settings. If this be so, he can flash from his mental pictures striking headlines before his pupils in such a way that they will be anxious to read the book for themselves. We can truly say there is no other book like it in all the world. Not only is it a wonderful history ; not only is it full of stories of thrilling interest; not only does it teach the Gospel of Jesus Christ in its fulness, but it holds forth within itself a promise that those who read it with prayerful hearts shall feci the spirit of it and know that the things written in it are true. (Read Moroni 10: 2-4.) There is one thing of which we may be sure in awakening a love for the Book of Mormon, and thai is, Hint thai love shall grow and strengthen with years. The Book itself never fails to fascinate those who study it. President (irant read it in his youthful days and this is his testimony: "When 1 was a boy I read the Book of Mormon. 1 fell in love with Xephi, who. more than any man thai 1ms ever written i r preached whose wor Is and utterances I have read, bi iiirr  v s of his first reading of the Book of Mormon : 1 L K \ K •' • I i.4 u. •• For the first time uiy   e than pay nie for all the sorrows, sacrifices and toils of my life." There are many more such testimonies to be found and thai might be c ted to aw k n a de in within the boys and g rls of io-da\ to read and gel the sp : rh of this wonderful hook. The struggles thai Joseph Smith and those who helped him went through in the work of publishing the Book of Mormon should be briefly reviewed now and .-main during the course, with the thoughl in mind thai oul of these struggles and hard- ships came a hour, thai Latter-day Saints, young and old, should taki greal pride iti reading, with the prayerful desire to gain the promised testimony of its divinity. I Read the foot- note commencing on page 75, History of the Church, Vol. I.) Second Sunday, February I -l, 1926 Lesson 1. — Lehi and Kis Family Called to Leave Their Heme. .• : I. Nephi, Chapters 1 and 2. Objective: To teach thai (Jod is near to those w ho call on llim. Snpplenien arj Ri er iicch Books eontuinintr descriptions Hanticre 27, 1^0 TE MAKERS 13 of Jerusalem and its people long- ago; Canon Farrar's Life of Christ; Ben Hur; Bible Dictionaries: II. Chronicles. 36: 17-20; Jeremiah 39: 1-9. ►Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Make a general assignment for the class to read the whole text. 2. Special assignment for one pupil to tell the story of the lesson. '■). Striking passages should be memorized by the class members, such as I. Nephi 1-20; 2: 9-10. 4. The teacher should prepare supplementary ma- terial — description of Jerusalem — family life among the Jews. etc. Note: These lessons in the beginning of the Book of Mor- mon are more or less familiar to the pupils. The assignment of the story to tin 1 pupil should be in the understanding that it is to be told in the best possible manner, after real preparation by the pupil. Questions for Teachers. 1. What strong points in Lchi's character are brought out in this lesson : ; 2. How may a study of the experiences of Lehi be a means of strengthening our faith in C>>d.' Third Sunday, February 21. 1926 Lesson 2. — Obtaining- the Brass Platos. Text: I. Nophi, Chapters 3, 4. 5. Objective: To Heel thai the Lord opens the way for His children to keen His commandments. Suggi stions on Preparation and Presentation : 1. Ask all pupils to read the text. 2. Three special assignments might be made of the text. (a) The attempts to obtaiu the plates by their own efforts. I Chapter .'J. ) (b) Success through the guidance of the Lord. (Chapter 40 i  rds of NYphi 3: 7 by illustration, Questions for Teachers. 1. Name the important things gained by Lehi and his family in having the brass plat . Have tiie pupils mark in their books and memorize such passages as I. Nephi 7 : 12, 13. Mote: There may be pupils who could make a fair illustra tion of Lehi '-> dream  n a charl . Questions for Teachers. 1. Mention the qualities of character shown by Nephi on journey from Jerusalem with the family of Kin lael! 2. \ T ame som lps to keep a clean mind ; that our bodies I he kepi ; I . l: i the inside u ii h proper Pood and tho f> IL KARERH I lanm uglj thoughts make ugly features; liappy, good, kind thoughts make | > I « ; i s . il 1 1 r. Second Sunday, lebruarj 14, I92(i Luke 2: >unday Morning in the Kinder- garten," I . - on 35 Topic : The stop} tit' t lie shepherds. Objective: To teaeli thai l>\ giving gifts, we express our love for friends and family. Res1 Exercise : I Hi. why do hells for ( 'h natulan ring, Wli\ do little children sing, i hi i liis brighl ( 'hristmas Day .' The b  make Nied happy. A st ranger appeared I a Ladj This Lady could help. I te must  n to her home I lis parents lovo£ Idra very much. 1 8 L'K K.AKJ 14 .• m He Morehu no te Whare o lharaira \\. K .\ HIPERU I roto i aku tuhituhinga ki a koutou kua whakamarama, kua whakaatu aliau ki a koutou i te ahuatanga o oga ingoa Maori, ara he mea whai tikanga, vvhai take nga ingoa Maori katoa; otira, tera pea, lie moumou tuhituhi kia whakaatu ahau ki a koutou i te ahuatanga o nga kupu Ifaori, no te mea U « - i te mohio tonu koutou ki to koutou ake rco me te ahuatanga o   te ingoa o te tangata tuatahi ko Arama. \a. tera pea, kua patai ranei koutou ki a koutou ano he aha te take i whakai- ngoatia te tangata tuatahi ko Arama te ingoa. .M  Ke kahore v kite ai te kupu Arama, olira i v*>u> i te rarangi 19 ka kitea tuatahitia te ingoa Arama. Mi whakahua • • au ngj rarangi 18 me 10. "Xa ka mea a Ihowa. te Atua, K kore c pai kia n >ho U ; me hanga   Jeshua (Plehua). (Xehemia 3: 13.) Na ko enei kupu katoa c taea te wliakamaoritanga ki te reo Pakeha ko Saviour; ara ki te reo Maori ko Kai-Whakaora. Ko te riuinga o nga ingoa i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito i roto i te Paipera Pakeha, he Hiperu aua ingoa. I roto i te Kawenata Hon he Kariki te nuinga o nga ingoa. Xa ki te Paipera Maori, ko te nuinga o nga ingoa i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito he hawhe kaihe Hiperu .Maori; i roto i te Kawenata Hon he hawhe kaihe Kariki Maori. Ko tenei te ingoa Kai-Whakaora ki nga reo katoa e mohio- tia ana a ahail, Elipcru— Joshua. Jeshua Samoa — Faaola Kariki .Jesus Tahiti Faaora Pakeha Saviour Hawaii Mea e Ola 'i .Maori Kai-W liakaora Toga Fakamoui \'a. e hoa ma. kahoiv ahau e ki ana ko taua tangata a Hohua i roto i te Kawenata Tawhito me le Karaiti a Ihu i te Kawenata Hon i to tangata kotahi, engari ka rua aua tangata. ARERii L  t  te Alpha (Ajvpa reta tuatalii o te reo Kariki ; ara penei me te A te ret a tuatahi ki te reo Pakeha. Ko te Omega te rota whakamutunga ki te reo Kariki; ara rite ana ki te Z ki te reo Pakeha. Ara ko I whakamaoritanga o enei kupu Alpha and ft m (Arepa, ( urn ka ko te A me h Z. Ara te tuatahi me te \\ hakamutunga Ko te Ariki ko te tuatahi m  ana kupu. \'a, kia mohio koutou, kahore ahau i tito noa i r.ei kupu. ongari kua whiwhi ahau i toku mohiotanga ki ioi I liperu no roto i te " Bible Dictiona E ki ana te Hunga Tapu ko I iwj Maori he morelm whare o Eharaira. Na, ka kite taton ko nga ingoa Maori It- men what tikanga whai take; a rite tonu hoki ko nga ara ingoa Hiperu he mea whai tikanga, whai tak • hoki. K  Ilamiere 27, 1^6 TE KARLRE 21 tenei tetahi atu whakaaturanga ko te iwi Maori he Morehu no te Whare o Iharaira. NA WIREMU A. KOURA. Rupert, Idaho. Ko te Maaka Tuarua E torn nga maaka i roto i te Rongo-pai e kore nei e hapa, Ira — Tuatahi — I hanga i runga i te Toka o te Whakakitenga. Tuarua — I whakararotia ki te mana o te Tohungatanga. Tuatoru — I whakakakahatia ki nga Akoranga a te Karaiti. Hei te Tohungatanga e whakamarama. He aha te Tohungatanga? Ko te mana me te kaha o te Atua kua homai ki te tangata kia tnahia nga tikanga te Rongo-pai. Ki te kahore taua Tohungatanga ka pehea? E kore nga mahi te Rongo-pai e tirohia mai e te Atua, e kore hoki e mana. E rua nga patai nei me nga whakautu nei. Ko nga Karaipiture e tautoko ana i enei whakautu. Hei u patai tuarua e whaka- marama i te tuatahi. I te wa c kauwhau ana te Karaiti ka whakamarama la ki nga Akonga, i te mea kua kite ke la tera i muri mai i a la he maha nga tangata e mahi i nga tikanga te Rongo-pai mana- kore — "He tokomaha e mea mai ki a an a taua ra, E te Ariki, e te Ariki; kihai koia maton i poropiti i ton ingoa, i pei rewcra hoki i runga i ton ingoa? He tini hoki nga mahi uui i meatia e matou i runga i ton ingoa?" I pchea te whakautu a te Karaiti? I penei, "Ko reira ano ahau mea ai ki a ratou, Kahore rawa ahau i mohio ki a koutou; mawehe atu i a an, e nga kai-mah] te tutu." Matin 7: 22-23. Titiro ki te wa i a Molii te mana te Tohungatanga, tera tetahi ropu ko Koraha, ko Ratana, me Apirama tne 1a ratou whakaminenga i whakahihi i tr mana i a Mohi, puia mai ana te ?'iri a Ihowa ki a ratou mahi hara, whakangaromia ana ratou katoa ki rare te whenua nie a ratou taonga katoa. Tauan;ta 16. Tera tetahi mahi rucrekara i>«i rewera i mahia e Paora : i te kitenga nga tama tokowhitu me tetahi Hurai, ka hiahin hoki ratou Id te pei rewera i runga i te ingoa Ihu Karaiti i ' kino i ; ■ • A pa. . tapu i to A.tua, kin , n i en si u'etia, kia • i! v\ hakaiM . •-■ Mill) i .Kiiiiiu' ki a " lliperu ! '. la niana i inaroto mai i te Hohi, ►to mai i tana poropiti ki ;i A K 14; 16 27. piH'i ra ii | , i ti- urai i i ki a tatou ki tc llui ienga 1 '• tenei rapu nana. ; ' . : - ! i take ! io 1( : i a ; 1 1 ■ Ilanuere 27, i926 TK KAKERE 23 I tae mai hoki a Molii raua ko Iraria ki runga i te maunga ki te whakamana i a te Karaiti ki tc Tohungatanga. Maka 9: 2-1. Na te Karaiti Ana Aputjro i whakamana. "Kaliore kyutou i whiriwhiri i a au, engari naku k out 011 i whiriwliiri, a naku ano koutou i mea kia haere, kia whai hua." Hoani 15: 16. Na nga apotoro etahi atu i whiriwliiri. Nga Mahi ] : 23- 26; 6: 5-6; 8: 1-3 me etahi atu. Xo te \va i patupatua ai nga apotoro i tangohia atu tana Tohungatanga, no te tau 1829 i whakahokia mai taua Tohungatanga ki a Hohepa Mete. Xo reira enei rarangi karaipiture e- kitea ana ki te kaliore te ToJiungatanga e kore nga mahi tapu a te Atua e niana, a ma te Tohungatanga ka mana nga mahi o te Rongo-pai. Kua kitea lie pono nga vvhakautu ki nga patai e rna raka. E te Hunga Tapu, whakahonoretia te mana tapu kei wae- nganui i a tat on, kia kaha ki te rapu i 011a tikanga ; he taonga hohonu rawa tenei, kaliore oiia timatanga, kaliore ona mutunga. lleoi ano, na to koutou teina. MAEAEROA. IIORI MAPI. i Ko nga Tuhituhinga Cnamata IK PUKAPUKA A APP:RAHAMA , 1 He mea i t.ingohiirniaj i te "R'estoratyan of the Gospel," i tuhia e ( ). J. P. Widtsqe. Na Erii T. Cooper i whakamaori. I a Hurae, 1835, ka riro mai ki roto ki nga ringa 1c l > oroj)iti o Hohepa Mete etahi -tuhituhinga tino nui, 1 tuku iho no 1c \va ra nga tipuna. Tera i tc Ian PS2S, tctalii Wiwi, ko Anatonio Heporo tonp ingoa i whakaetia e Mehemeti Arai (Mehemet Ali) te kawana Ihipa, kia rapua e Icuci tangata nga tukunga ill > onamata i tc whenua Ihipa. K3 lorn nga Ian i niuri mai, ana i l ki aua pukapuka, ano te pai   « nei pukapuka kia kino noa. I a Hanara e mntekitaki ana i aua tupap. ;u ka ki ake tetahi tangata ki a ia kia kimihia e ia te poropiti nga aloro- Liona a Hohepa Mete. Il«' marama hoki taua poropiti ki te whakamaori i nga tuhi tuhi nga onamata. He tauhou rawa hoki a Hanara ki tenei tangata i korero atu nei ki a ia uio te poropiti. Otira i uhakakitckite haere a Hanr.ra i nga tupa- paku nei i nga taonc nui   Amerika. me te malia hoki   nga tangata i haere kia kite. 1 ki hoki una tangata matauranga he tino tuturu aua tupapaku, he tika hoki nga tokai pukapuka. I tuhia lioki etahi ratou he tiwhikete whakapumau i a ratou korero he tika aua tupapaku me n.^a tuhituhinga. No te toru n tiurae 1835 katalii ano ka tae .1 Hanaro ki Katarana me ona tupapaku, i rapua hoki c ia te Poropiti a Hohepa Mete. E wl.a nga tinana e ai la te Poropiti, me nga \liil.a vvhakairoiro, ara nga tuhituhinga tahito. "I te mea ok] a Hanara ka taea e au te whakamaori, lea lauria mai e ia kia kite au, kia whakamaori hoki i etahi aua tuhituhianga. Xaku hoki i hoatu 1 >- whakamaoritanga, te tu i 10 '> te tangata whakaaro rangatira homai ana   nga m  pupuri ana. Ko nga kai wh tkattko o te Kareti niton ko ti Tumuaki o te Kareti me tona hoa wahine mc ta raua pepi me Mi re. Ko te Tumuo i Mihmui ano hoki me tona kai- awhina me Harehana\ Hanuere 27, IQ26 TE KARERE 2% ilvi te i£tita Ko te Hui Puketapu I te Paraire ka lac mai te Tumuaki te Miliaria, me tona hda wahine, me la raua tamaiti, me nga kaumatua Akarana, me nga kaumatua Hauraki, me Hemi Whautere, me te Tumuaki te Peka Moawhango takiwa Taihape, he tino nui nga Hunga Tapu me nga hoa arolia, me te Kuini Maori ara te. wahine a te Kingi Maori. I tae mai nga Hunga Tapu pakelia Hamutana me nga pakeha Hanatere, me nga rangatira To Kuiti, he hunga waho katoa ratou. Ao ake i te ata te Rahoroi ka timata to matou Hui Pariha, 10 a.m. Xa te Tumuaki Takiwa i whakahaere to matou karakia kauwhau. Xa Erata Elarehana i whakahaere nga himene, te 7 me te 11. Na Erata Skinner te inci whakapuare. 1 muri tena ko nga kai-kauwhau. Tuatahi ko Karena Takoro, he mihi ki te Tumuaki Mihana hou me tona hoa wahine me ta raua tamaiti me nga kaumatua, tae atu ki nga Hunga Tapu i tae mai ki tenei Hui Pariha, I muri tena ko Poutu P. Kupa, he mihi ki nga pononga a te Atu a, mo be mihi ano ki nga hoa aroha, me te whakamarama i nga tikanga te Rongo-p.ai iliu Karaiti. I. muri tmia ko Tukino Hakopa, he Tumuaki in no te Peka Moawhango. E tino whakapono ana in koia tenei ko te hahi Iliu Karaiti. E whakapono ana in ki a Hohepa Mete ko te poropiti pono a 1" Al na. Kaati, i muri ko Hemi Whautere, "E te Hunga Tapu me nga hoa aroiia, kaore ah an e mohio ana me pewhea he korero mnku. Kaati, ka inoi ake ahau ki te Atua kin awhinatia mai ahau he men e whai kaha ai ahau ki te kauwhan i ota 1 i atu take. Kaati, me korero e ahau i toku taenga atu ki te Tense- para Hawaiki. Kaati, i rongo korero ahau i enei mea katoa. Kaati, no taku taenga atu ki Hawaiki ka kite kanohi ahau." Kaati, pau katoa i a in nga malii tc Temepara. K ki ana i tino tapu nga mahi te Temepara Hawaiki. Pau katoa i .- '••1 te whakamarama \\>j:;\ turc katoa tenei hahi. Kaati, he tino "iii nga take i whakamaramatia e in. Kore i mutu te hiahia nun tangata ki nun kauwhau a Hemi Whautere. I muri 1r| in ko Ki«) Tarawhiti, he tautoko i nun kupn katon l;nn ik K VR£R£ Hanuere 27, 1^26 ill, 1 1, oi ;iii , ■ lia Wuikatn. mi tirata Paapiti, \. i- Awe Ponga, Hekeretari n te llui. lie Kauwhau Haere Ki T i. 1 koe i roto i te .Merc Kirihii I iapi \ul 1 kiu • i. Ma te Al ua koe e t iaki i roto i tan malii uui. Kaati tena. \ T o i ka haere maua ki Poke - takiv n hi Pukekohe. Ka uui nga Maori u nei whenua. I nga mea e wliakarongo mai ana ki nun kauwha whanau tino pai. Kaliore e kai \vai])iro, tupeka f'ol.i. alma te kauwliau ki a raton penei. I haere mai a te Karaiti ki te ao nei ki tc vvli ! huarahi te Atua. Ka oti i a !;i te tinana maoi katia, kua tae la ki te hunga wairua, kua oti ki te wairua, kua ara mai fa, kua kake ki te Rangi. Ka to u enei mea tino nunui kua oti i a la. fleoi ano la 1 ari i Tana hokinga tuarua mai ki te ao 1110 ake ak Kn 1 ga liahi katoa nei kotahi ano te Atua. Ko ta a Atua nei ano, T'ona rereketanga tirohia nga hua te [fahi llui Ra M ui-i \Yi rieoi ano ka mutu riga kauw hau i run tono mai ratou kia lioki atu ki te tirotiro i a I I 'i ano ka mutu, ua ta koulou mok ii tiu! ine t( • to i t puna t rnariki a tenei tangata, tenei a H. I . K tirm kua in x» i te m >enga roa. He tangita mhiotia nuitia am i 1 •• rtira Maori inga ne>, tae atu ki ng 1 P.ikehn mnhi pan mil 1 1 ; t in ; ita n >hio k te win i n% \ nv»hi ihu- i 1 i, mi'ii hipi, mahi kiu. I! 1 1 n-rati whanui ona laro i ng 1 tunga mil 1 nui e Hanuere 27. 19-6 IE KAKEKK 31 pa ana ki ona iwi me ana tamariki, me nga tikanga whaka- ono hoki. Ko ona whakaaro whdnui e kore mwa e taea te miu. Mate atu ia me ona whakaaro rangatira katoa. Ka iui te taugi te arona ki a ia. Te ahua o tona matt nga. I te ata o te 24 o Tinema i ahua rereke tona ahua, haere ia ki te takuia, tirohia ana e te takuia, kei tona ateate tona mate, vm hok ki te kainga takoto ai, whakangaa ai. 1 tae mai ia ki te taone i Hastings haereere ai a ahiahi noa. Ka eke ,i ^anga ka, ka hoki ki Koparakore, tae atu ki te Paki- paki kua ah a taumaha tona tinana. Ka mea ia kia tu te k .. 1 ona hekenga atu ki r«ro o te kaa — hemo noa atu. . e w.iak 1 ponotanga o tenei tangata ki te Hani o L iu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. i lino rapu . e tenei tanga te pono o tenei hahi. Mo te. t, .1 va roa, n iku atu i te tekau tau ia e whinwhiri ana. Ka in.i k roio i te Hahi o Ihu Karaiti, e rima tonu nga wiki o to ia ir iritanga ka mate nei ia. Ko nga whakaaro o tenei tangata ki ana tamariki mokopuna kia urn ki roto i te Hahi o ihu K >rait . Ona whakaaro. Kua mohio noa atu ia ka mate ia. Tona whakaaro kia l ut ; 'uii o^ia tamariki mokopuna i le ra o te Kirihimete. He >u.a*e kortro ana i mua o tona matenga. Tona whakaaro . a hangiia toratau whare-kai kia nui ai to ratau marae mo ga karangaranga Hui Par. ha, Hui Tau ranei, me etahi atu hui. Rokohangi ka mate, otira kua mohio ke ona tamariki mokopuna ki ona wh.ikaaro. Ki.a tautokona hoki e ratou kia hang ina taua whare. Te tapuketanjja ki Te Haukc, Koparakore. Ko nga whakahaere katoa o te whiunara o tenei tangata 1 1 Timuaki o te Peka o Korongata, Rawiri Kamau me te Hunga Tapu kato,) i whakahaere. No te 27 o Tinema i ta- pu»etia. Nt r a kai-kauwhau o tenei karakia nui ko Wiremu Takana, ko Eld r Sells, Timuaki o te K;mti, ko Paraire Tomo na. Na Reupena Parahi i whakahaere nga hm.ene me te ko^ea. Na Wiremu fak ma i whak tapu te rua. Nuku atu i te lorn ttrkau ng 1 motokaa, motorc i\ i hacie ki te la_ puketanga o tenei langa. Tino nui te aroha me te tangi o te Hunga Tapu mo te matenga o trnei tangata, otira ko te Atua kei te mohio ki taua t ng.ia e man ai Ia. Heoi ano, kia ora ona whamiu- nga. Na Rawiri Kamau Kote MAUI KAMURA o te KARETI M.A.C. Kote kai-whak lako ko Erata R.L. Paraone. K»» nga Powliiri Hui Pat ilia NO WAIKATO Ki Te Karere: Mau e panui atu tenei powhiri ki nga Hunga Tapu o te motu nei ki rma iwi ki nga reo ki nua hui- huinga tangata e noho mai na ki nga pito e wha o te motu nei. He powhiri atu tenei ki a kontou ka lu to ma ton Hui Pari ha ki te Peka   Hoeotainui a te 20 me te 21 o nga r.i o Pepuere. No reira, haere mai ki te whakarongo, ki te whi- rl whin hoki 1 nga tikanga pai me n^ra tikanga tika me nga tikanga pono hoki ki te aroaru o to t a toil Mama nni i te Ra- ngi. Kia whangai hoki tatou tinana ki n^a mea whaka- te-wairua. Katahi ano hoki ka tu tetahi Hui Pariha ki taua takiwa Waikato, no reira haere mai. kei te tino moliio matou tera ka tae mai to tatou Tu- muaki Mihana ki te whenua e karangatia ana ko "Waikato Taniwharau, hei Piko hei Taniwfia hei Piko hei Taniwha." E hoa ma kia matara to ngakau kia hohoro kia rite ai ki tenei kupu, "Kai maata whiwhia maua riro ke." No reira, e te marama, Haere mai, Haere mai, ki to tatou huinga. Na Reberi D. Paapiti, Tumuaki Takiwa Hanuere 2j, 1920 n: KARERE $$ NO TE TAl RAWHITI He powhiri atu tcnei na matou ki nga Hunga Tapu me nga hoa c.roha o te motu nei kia haere mai ki to maiou Hui Pariha e tu nei ki Tamata-o-Tapuhi, Waiapu, a te 6 me te 7 o nga ra o Pepuere, 1926. Haere mai e nga kai-kauwhau katoa o te Mihana nei. Haria mai to koutou matauianga nui. (Ma ia tangata, ma ia tangata, ano hoki e man mai i tona ake kakahu moe.) E penei ana te whakaaro a te iwi nei o te Tai Rawhiti, "Kua kore te Hahi Momona te kake haere i runga i te motu nei." No reira, haere mai, e hoa ma, ki te awhina i a matou ki te whakaatu atu ki a ratou e kaha tonu ana tatou. Ki ta matou whakaaro ka tae mai te Tumuaki Mihana me tona hoa wahine ki to matou Hui Panha. No reira haere mai, haere mai. Na L. S. Tamihana, Tumuaki Takiwa NO NGAPUHI Ki Te Karere: Man tenei e panui atu ki nga m;rae katoa e tae ai koe. Tena ra koutou e nga iwi katoa e noho ana i te Waipou- namu me te Ao-tea-roa nei. Tenei maiou te powhiri atu nti ki a koutou me haere mai koutou ki ta matou Hui Pari ha o te takiwa o Whangarei me te takiwa o Pei Whairangi ka tu nei ki Kaikohe, Pei Whairangi, a te 2r, 27, me te 28 p nga ra o Pepuere nei. Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai. H; tie mai e tt upc ko o te ika a Maui Tikitiki o Taranga. Haere mai e te kopu o te ika. Haere mai koutou katoa e nga kai-wrakaako era atu o o tatou akoranga maha e tau nei i n.nga i cnei motu e rua. Ki konei tatou korerorero ai mo nga taha e rua, ara mo te taha whaka-te-tinana, me te taha whaka-te-wairua, "E kore te rakau pai e ahei te hua i te hua kino, e kore ano te rakau kino e hua i te hua ataahua." Haere mai ki te hiku o te ika. "E kore te pi ku e ahei le man i te tinana, engari ma te hiku e man te linana." Ua ^'» tail i muri 1 te puta- n^a mai lharaira e whitu tekau nei n^a wairua i Ihipa. I a ia e kotiro ana e waru nga tau, 1 in ia nei heteri tiaki i a Mohi i nga pareng 1 6 te awa te Naera (Nile). 1 marena ia ki letahi toa o lharaira, o te hapu o Hura ko Hum tona ingoa, na ra'ua n'ei koAronaj pupuri ake nga ringaringa o Mohi, a toa noa a Inaraira (Ekoruhe I / : I I - 1 ^ ). A he wh.it a hoki ia i roto 1 a Inaraira 1 te whakaatu i a Ekoruhe 31 : 2. Na ana 1 arahi nga wahine o lharaira i te nn a v waru tekau ma whitu ona tau, i roto i te waiata i te kanikani, mo te toa- nga he whakautu mo te waiata, na nga tane nei te tuatahi o te whakaaturanga. (Tirohia Ekoruhe 15:21). Kotahi ia te mea i he ai ia 1 te koratia. ! rirohia Tauanga 121. I mate ia i te wa whakamutunga   ta ratou haeienga i te koraha, ko- tahi ran e nn tekau ma rua nga tau. (1)). Ona ahuatanga. I roto i te ahua nga mahi me tona oranga ka kitea ko Miriama he wahine tino ren ke tona ahua. i whanau hoki ia i roto 1 te mataiifa>nga nei ka-i-arahi. Tirohia te mohio tana patai ki If wahine rangatira lhipia- na i te wahi kaukauranga. Te putake hoki tona kaha ki te tu atu ki a Mohi 1 rolo 1 tona (to Miriama) pohehetanga, 'he tohu ki te marama. te kaha tona hinengaro, koia nei tona ngoittoretanga. He tikanga kua takoto whakakapo i njja kanohi ki n^a whakawakanga whaka-te-wairua. I turi hoki Hanucre 27, 1926 TE KARERE 35 ia ki nga komuhumuhutanga a te wairua i ki ai, ata noho marie i te wa i kape ai te arero ki ta te Atua i whakawahi ai, tatari atu ki te matauranga o te Atua, koia nei kei te kite me te marama hoki o tana vvhakarite whakawa, i a era atu ta- ngata, a mana nui atu hoki i ta Iharaira katoa ki te whaka- haere mo ana i whiriwhiri ai. I roto i enei ahuatanga ko ta te tangata whakatikatika he whakahawea ki te Atua. I te taha whaka-te-wairua i riro i tenei wahine whakamiharo te karangatanga he wahine poropiti. (Tirohia Ekoruhe 15: 20.) Te mahi i whiwhi ai ia, i whakaaetia ai hoki e te Atua, i runga i tenei whakarite i a ia a tetahi o nga poropiti o Iha- raira ko Miriama tetahi o nga kai-whakaputa i a Iharaira. (Tirohia Mika b: 3, 4). 2. Ko Tepora. E rua tekau nga tau i hapai ai a Iharaira i te tukino- tanga a Iapini kingi o Kanana, he whakawhiu mo to ratou tahuritanga atu i te Atua. I karanga ake hoki ki te Atua i runga i te wairua maru kia whakaputaina ratou, otira kua taka ratou i nga ahuatanga i tu ai hei kai-arahi. Ko te aro- ha ki te whenua me te whakapono ki te Atua kua oti te rahui ki roto i te ahua me te oranga o Tepora. I whakawhirinaki te iwi ki a ia, i whakahaere hoki te Atua i a ia. He wahine poropiti ia, a na ana i whakahnere nga mahi i riro ai hei take whakaputanga mo Iharaira. (Tirohia Whakariterite 4). He whakamarama tenei i te pono o te take ki te mea ka turi, a ka kore ranei nga tane e pai ki te arahi, i te mea e hiahia- tia ana etahi kai-arahi, ka whakarite kai-arahi te Atua i roto o nga wahine. 3. Te tamahine a Iepeta. Nga korero o te putake nana i nui ai tenei wahine kei roto i tenei akoranga kaore te Atua e ahuareka ki nga oati ma roto i te whakahaere a te tangata. Te ahua i whakaae ai te tamahine ki te putake o te oati a tona papa e whakaatu ana i tona aroha, whakaiti, a ngohengohe hoki ki nga oati whaka-te-wairua. Tona inoi hoki kia tukua kia okioki mo tetahi wa kia tangi ai ia mo tona wahinatanga, ehara hoki tona pouri i te mea no te whakakahoretanga o tona oranga. E whakaatu ana tenei i te tino hiahia o nga tamahine ranga- tira o Ihanrra. (Tirohia Whakariterite 11:30-40). Mo tc whakatutuLitanga te oati. e kore e taea te tino mohio, e- ngari ko te walii maramatanga iti i roto i te rarangi 39 hei homai tumanakotanga i runga i tenei ture whakamamae a Ko te ropu tamariki kura (student body) o tc Maori Agricultural College, ratou ko nga kai-whakaako /tic te koka-whangai imatron). Hanuere 27 iv- h ^E KARERE 37 nga Ihipiana i whakahengia nei e te Atua, kihai i tutuki. 4. Ko Rutu. He tauira a Rutu mo te whakaatu 1 te mau o te piripono. x\ga tu ahuatanga takijua o te piripono, i roto i te whakaho- ki a Ruta ki a Naomi. ( 1 irohia Rutu 1 : L6-17); Te tuatoru ko te whakaritenga a Rutu i te whakaaro a Naomi. (Rutu 3)- 5. Ko Hurura. He poropiti vvahine i Hiruharama e nemo ana i te k-areti he vvahine kura i runga 1 nga tikanga whaka-te-atua, a nana i hoatu te kupu a te Atua ki te kingi o Hura. (Tifohia K Tuarua 22). 6. Ko Waliati. Ahakoa ehara ia i te Iharaira, i whakarite ia i eta hi tika- nga nunui i roto 1 nga whakahaere mo Iharaira. Tana wlia- kahaerenga i te tikanga whakahoki mai 1 te ngbhengohe kj te tane i roto i nga vvhakahaunga tika anake. Ko tana i whai ai kia riro ia he vvahine ktiini pai, karauna-kore, i te wahine kuim kino, whai karauna. (Tirohia Ehetere I). 7. Ko Ehetere. tie pam 1 te Limatanga ake tona oranga. I whakatupu- ri . akt i ro:o i te wa te whakaraunga ki Papurona e te ira_ mutu tane p tona papa. I whakaritea hei kujr.i i runga 1 tona ataahua i ngohengohe tona ki tona matua-whangai 1 whakaora hoki i te kingi i nga kai-tuku whakamate toko- rua, me te whakar U' i tetahi nohopuku mo tona jwi, Ka tata te whilkaft^aro 1 tona ake oranga 1 roto i tona mahi wha- k iora mo ton.' iwi. Te toanga ki runga ake i te tino hoariri o nga Hurai. He v\ ihin [haraira whakaaro. He wahine tu p kari, kauie e ngohe tona whakapono e whakawhirinaki noa a tu tetahi ki runga ki tona matauranga, e kore hoki e taka tona piripono. ( rifbhia Ehetere 2 : 8-9). Te kai-arahitanga o nga wahine o roto i te wa o Mohi, p ra mo i n/s 1 wa mua atu, ehara i te mm whaka-u ki t e t (hung ata n 1 1 1 manakohia iho e te Atua i tau ;l ga mai i a Miriama ki te awhina ki te whaka i a [haraira, me te w h 1 katutuk itanga i te ooropii taie a te poropiti wahine aroh.M pono ki tona wh  te waiata a nga tane i te Moan a Whero. 4. Whakamaramatia te ahua o Miriama ano e kite ani koe 1 te whakahaerenga i te Moand Whero. 5. Pehea te ahua te whakahua i te pohehetanga o Miriama inaianei i roto i te Hahi. (>. Korerotia a Mi ka 6 : 4 te whakaatu ko Miriama he mt a karanga na te Atua ki tona mihana. 7. Whakaatnr.a kei te karangatia kei te tonoa hoki nga wahine tenei wa pera ano me Miriama. 8. He aha nga tautoko ko Tepora he mea tohn e te ha te Atua hei kai-whakarite whakawa mo Iharaira. 9. Korerotia te whakaatu a Hurura (2 Kingi 22:15-20); whakaaturia hoki nga hua tana whakaatu (2 Kingi 2} : 1-T7). 10. L hea te wahi i whakatakoto ai a Ehetere i tona ora- nga ki rnnga ki te aata, kia whakaorangia ai tona iwi. 1 1. Ma Ehetere te whakaaro kia whakaritea he nohopuku e \c iwi. Pehea te k ircro a tana wh.ikaaro mo tona akonga 1 te kainga me nga ture nga Kurai i roto i te kainga. AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO HAERE MO PEPUERE. rlei korerorerotanga ma nga mema i roto i 9 hui mahi, a whakahaere hoki nga mahi. Xga pai nga mo te tamaiti a kotiro hoki; korero whaka- riterite mo nga take e what ake nei. lie pehea te awhina, te pupuri mai ranei a te k ura i te tamaiti, kotiro ranei i runga 1 nga tikanga o te ora. 1. Mo nga kanohi (eyes) kaha. me nga kanohi ngoikore. 2. Mo nga niho kino. $. Mo nga kai kaore i te tika (improper food). He mahi tenei ma tatOU ki te tirotiro mo em i aliuatanga, me te whak itikatika i ana ahna. Ko nga ropu taknta me nga ropn naahi kei te koa tonu ki te homai i nga tohutohu ki a tatou i runga 1 enei take, a he mahi tenei ma tatou kia ako i enei mea, kia kaua ai a tatou tamariki e puritia mai i roto i a ratou mahi o te kura. Xa Kora S. Tinikini Na Toke Watene i whakamaori. Hanucie 2J, 1926 TE KARERE KOTE TAU TE HAKI IHU KARAITI TE HUNGA TAPU NGA RA MURi NEI, MIHANA NIL IIRENI. Ka tu ki Nuhaka a te 2 me te 3 Aperira, 1926. \Khki-. KO NGA PUXAPUKA HEI HOXONCA . etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei I  . fea ki rtu.i mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko Nga mea e hiahia ana ki i jjiik.ipnk.i uu- tuku .tin ki 1 liu.\ J2, AiitkUimt STANDARD CHURCH WORKS Teachers B R ady Reference, Leather imeni & kctdy Reference, Leather n i> Hook ol Mormon, Cloth 2 1 , Ball Leather •• " •• , Leather 10-O ^150 Pearl of, Great Price, Cloth., j-u DoctrineS Covenants, Cloth =;-o . v\ Pearl ol Great Price, Lcuthel MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS Maori Read} Reference, ( loth 2 , Leather .> b Ko Pe Kaweruta Hon, Cloth 1-9 " Me Nga riin.cne, Leather 3 in 1 ji-m •• Pukapuka a Moromoua. Cloth 5-0 •' , Leather .. 15-0 Akoranga Me N^;i Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 3-J Leather 15 ( nib iuation of A, B, & C Tracts, L« aiher, Sp  the V oung, \\\,.i lesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage nt id Is in Church History, Smith o-u Bible Read 2-0 i- tltilln 1 el. Mai is b-0 KOJ. H. IIVU'IXI TEKAJTA ME TE KAI PANTI HOKI M ^ r KORONr,ATA. HASTINGS. H. JR.   *■ ^Sc  NAMA IV KOREROTANGA - 1 -i RIPOATA NO WHARE KAURI NA IRIPARETE POxMARE 1 Mil rE AKORANGA O TE MANAWA NA ERUT. KUPA I VVHAKAMAOR] TE ATUATANGA O TE KARA1I1 I I1C KAUWHAU NA TETAH1 NGA AFOTORO -l-l-l-l-l-l-i-l- - I - I ~ l-l-l -l-l-l-l-l-l- CS KflRSRS" WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO Wharangi. Kl TE ETITA Ik- Ripo.it. i mo te Kareti 1 3 * Ko te llui \'ui a Ngati Porou i-') Ripoata no te SVhare Kauri i-7 KO NCA RONCO KORERO Kti nga Hokinga atu ki Hiona i lo KO NCA TUHINCA MAI Te Akoranga oteManawa 137 Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti ij6 MAHI HUI ATAWHAI I»2 MAH! KURA HAPATI Concert Recitation 1 1 2 Intermediate I department 121 Korero .1 Ngakau 1 12 Maori Theological 1 15 Mother's 1 )ay Program 1 12 Pakeha Theologii al 118 Postlude in Prelude 111 Primary Department 1 23 Sacramenl Gem 1 1 1 ffixcpw WAHANGA 20 WENErfEl, APERIRA 21 fflaori agricultural College 1926. NAMA 4 Hastings. H. B- E tukua atu ana ia rnarama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Mini Nei. Me tuku atu o koutou reta ki te Etita o te Karere, M. A. C, Hastings, II. B. Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni, e (5s). Iko te Sikanga Senei: flle matua utu mo tcu pepa fcu vtfhiwhi ai. J. H. Timkini, Titmnaki Mihana Mariana K. Ezvatana, Etita. Tuita Witch ir a, Etita Hoa Awhina. Ko te Kai-Rtpoata Te Tuati Meha Ko nga Kai-1'uhi-Mai (Special Writers) Wlremu A. Kotira tru T. Kupa fiDabi ikura ibapau. Prelude. A IfegrHln. Arr. from S.::iurert • by T. Y. C. p 8ft. # * SACRAMENT GEM FOR MAY, 1926 I come to Thee nil penitent, I feel Thy love for me; Dear Saviour, in this Sacramenl I   remember Thee. Postlude. p soft 8 ft. [mm i m m i ■ i ; \ i i l E KAfcERE Ap .• born of water and of the spirit he cannol enter into I lie kingdom of  .•".() a.m. :!. Notices. -!. Opening song: X . 93, "O My Pal her," or No. 46, "Love al Home." :,. Prayer: By member of the Theological Class expressing appreciation for God's gifl :  man a Mother. 6. Sacramental song: No. 129, "Behold the Grcal Redeemer Die." 7. Administration of Sacrament: Prelude, Gem, Postlude. Concert Recitation: ••Hearken unto thy father that begal thee and despise n i tio dim wok To plan. i4 1 1. k \k, Apt rira il t [926 Third I hi!.! To all mother* in nil 1 lii- .! ;i \ will r'.i |>e g We want tn give th. in honor bcre, \ v > o\\ they 're |.i:i- .1 in la aven. r'ourtli Child I lome n other, And we wil And love the nam*' of motlior On tins and Fifth I Kadi one here has And each will wish to >ay That we are glad they're with us On this liri 8 l>ay. Sixth Child K 1 1 :. 11 ■ ! . -i ever, mol hi i s Thi t t hougli \\ \ in- greet ing to you bear, And may the fragrant flower* Glad welc all 011 M thei '> Oay." 17. One minute of silence in honor of the Mothers who have passed beyond. 1 duet, or chorus) by Theological Class pupils. Select Prom : " Mother Maehree, " "Silver Thcads amonp. the Gold," "That's Whal God Made Mothers For," "Mot In p Divine," " Dear  f the besl s])eakers I U> minutes ki The Place of Mothers in the World." 20. Response b> ■■• Mother. '_ I. Remarks by the Superintendent. 22.   Uoani); N'ga Mahi \-l: '2. Whakaritea ki le wliakaatu i a Moltia, l T poko 17. Whakaritenga kia maka a Pitn ki roto i te whare- herehere. Nga Mahi Vl. -\-\. 3. Te wha kaput un pa a merekara u I'itn i t  te ture i nga Roma, n'  to tukuuga kia puta nga herehere. N'ga Mahi L2: l!>. me t  Flerora. Nga Mahi L2: 20-24. Ratapu luawha, ,Mci 23, 1926 AKORANGA 12. Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARKRE 117 "Te whakatahuritanga o Faora, me tana niihana tuatahi." 1. Tc whakatahuritanga 6 J Faora. (a) Tona whakaaro pono ki tc whakahinga i nga akonga. Nga JMalii 9: 1-2, me Nga Malii 2*2: 3-5. (b) Te haerenga ki Ramahiku me nga ahuatanga i tupono kia Arami tamaiti. Mohia, Upoko 27. (c) Te tutakitanga o Anania kia Haora i Ramahiku. Nga Main 9: 10-]!). 2. A Pa ova kei Ramahiku me Arapia. (a) Nga mea i tupono i Ramahiku. Nga Main 9: 19-25. (b) Ka whai i a ia nga whakatoiuga. Nga Mahi 9: 23- 24, whakavitea tcnei ki te niihana tuatahi a Arami tamaiti. Arami, Upoko 14. (c) Kei Arapia. Karatia I : 15-JS. 3. Ka hoki ia ki Ramahiku, a ka oma ki Iliruharama. (a) Ka whakatakoto whakaaro nga Hurai ki te whaka- mate i a Paora. Nga Main 9; 23-24. Ratapu tuarima, Mei 30, 1926 AKOkaJn&A 13. ' 'Whakatahuritanga Paora, a tuatahi hoki tana mahi mihana haere." Te roanga atu. 1. Tona haerenga ki Fiiruharama. N T ga Mahi !) : 2(> 27. (a) Ka whakamohiotia a Paora c F*anapa ki nga Apotoro: Nga .Main 9; 27. (I)) Ka whakamaharatia a Paora i roto i tetahi kitenga kia haere atu. Nga Mahi 22: 17-21. (e) Tc Apotoro ki nga Tauiwi. N T ga Main 9: 1."); 22: 21. Whakarifcea hoki tc whakaakoranga i te L*uka- puka a Moromona ia I Niwhai 10: 11-14. 2. Tc haerenga Paora ki Tarahu. Nga Mahi !> : 30. (a) Tc vvahi i whanan ;ii ia. Tirohia Nga Mahi 21: 39. (b) A Tarahu he pa no nga Roma i tc wa i yvhakahu.i ai a Paora i a i;i ano he Roma. Nga Mahi F(>: 37-38; -2-2: 2o-2s. (c) 1 noho ia ki tenei wahi t ;i  ! ew Questions. I. N'ame an attribute of character that you admire in Adam, Enoch, Koah and Abraham, and tell «rhj you admire the p I,; icular al 1 ribut !• doctrine made prominent in TE KARERE Aperira 21, 19-0 tii- llw . . i each of the prophets listed in the foregoing question and  a£e 1 18 General Subjccl : The example of Jesus: whal i1 bids us d . special Topic: The Baptism of Jesus. Le1 the class members relate the incidents connected with the baptism of the Saviour. See what they are actually think- ing and believing (1) as to its reality, (2) as to its necei Why do they think that baptism is an ordinance to which all 111 a iik i n  i   Lesson 11, A Wicked King A Prophet's Warning. Tc -1 : Mosiah, 1 Itli to 17th chapters. Aperira 21, 1926 TK KARKRE I2J Objective: To make impressive the fact thai the Lord shows His niercy towards His children by inspiring His serVants to  7 BO; 3 .John 1 : 6-36. References : "J Tain ag p. 121-127 ; " Life of Christ " I Karrar), pp. 93 102; "Litv of  proval of Christ's baptism. Lead the children to see that us not only taught others what was necessary for salvation. Iso set the example. [11 the lesson of Jesus ami Nicodemus lie told others what to do, but to-day's lesson shows us how it must be performed. Jesus was greater than John, but Jesus recognized John's calling. Stimulate the children to look forward to the time when they will be old enough to he baptized by some one in our Church having the righl to baptize. Have the children tell how the members in their homes were baptized and by whom they were baptized. Memory (Jem : Use same suggested for story of Jesus and Xecodeiiius. Song: "Baptism" page '21 — Francis K. Thomasson's Primary and Kindergarten Sonus. licst Exercise: The hi*r thought is obedience to law. Let the children suggest ways and means by which Heavenly Father sends us helpers to prepare the "round for planting; the warm wind to melt the snow and to earry off the dead leaves from the garden bed; the sun and the rain. After the discussion on each topic let the children represent the wind blowing, the sun shining and the rain falling. Second Sunday, May 9, 1926. Mothers' Day Program. See page 1 I 2 Third Sunday, May 19, 192(> Topic: ( liris Feeding the Five Thousand. Aperira 21 192b TE KARERE 1 25 Texts: Matt. 14: 13-21; Mark 61 30-44; Luke 9: 10-18; John 6: 1-13. References: " Jesus the Christ" (Talmage, pp. 332-335; "Life of Christ" (Weed), pp. 172-177; "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, " Lesson 44. Time: The Feast of the Passover. Place: On a mouiit near Sea of Cralilec. Objective: Seek ye first the kingdom of Cod and all else will be added unto you. Suggestions: Show picture of Christ feeding the five thousand. Lead the children to see thai these people had heard of the good works of Jesus and wanted to know more about Him. Help them to realize that Jesus was tired, and when He found oul that the people wanted more spiritual food, and were willing to forget their physical selves to gel it lie U'i\ them physically as well as spiritually. Memory  . " Hniilj II. Mill.-. Songsi 'Little Purple Pansy" D. S. S. Book, p. 127. "Jesus (Mice Was a Little Child*' Primary So Rcsl Exercise: Carrying over the thoughl From last Sun- day, lead Ihc children to see thai the ground is ready For 118 to ,| () our part, l, i the children suggcsl what we do firsl the soil, rake, pick ou1 the Btones). After they have suggested le1 them sing and dramatize the Following words to the tune of "Here We Go Round the Mulherrj Bush": "This is the way we dig our ground, dig our ground dig our ground. So early Monda; morning. M Then change the wrordfi to raking, planting and spri melody. I,,. i || M . rhildren ftuggest the kind of seeds ih.\ want to I 26 TE KARERE A pel ijru 21, L926 plant. Fourth Sunday, May 23, 1926; Topic : Tlie Raising of the Daughter of Jairus. Time: While preaching to Publicans and Sinners. Place : Nazareth. Texts: Matt. !) : 18, lit. 23-26; Mark 5: 22-24. 35-43; Luke 8: 41, 42, 49-56. References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Les- son 45; "Jesus, the Christ," pp. 313-315; Weed's "Life of ( Ihrist," chapter 31. Objective: To teach that we must have faith and trust in the power of God and His servants if we want to be healed. Suggestions: Show the picture to the children, let them tell what they can see in it. Then let them tell of the members of their family, or themselves; of how they have been adminis- tered to by elders. Lead them to see even if JesUS was taken from the earth, lie left Tlis power to heal with our Elders. Show the children how necessary it is to have faith and to trust in this wonderful power. And that when we ask to be healed we must feel that Heavenly Father will heal us if it is best, but sometimes we pray and feel badly when our prayers are not answered. We must trust our Heavenly Father an 1 know that He will give us what is best for us. Memory (Jem: Same as last Sunday. Songs: "The Heart Garden" — Francis Iv. [Thomasson's Kindergarten and Primary Sony Book. Rest Exercise: Have children name the kind deeds they may do for each other; for brothers and sisters; polish shoes, wipe dishes for sister, amuse the baby, etc. Let the children dramatize these suggestions. Firth Sunday, May MO, 1926 Topic : Jesus and the Children. Time: .Just after .Jesus had delivered His sermon on shores of Galilee. Place : Borders of Judea. s: M itt. !9: 13-15; Mark 10: L3-16 ; Luke IS: 15-17. Aperira 21, 1926 TE KARERE 127 References: " Jesus the Christ" (Talmajre). pp. 47"). 476; Weed's "Life of Christ," chapter 52. Objective: To teach that by being pure in heart we shall return to the presence of our Heavenly Father. Suggestions: Show pictures of Jesus when twelve and then as a man. Let children look at them, then tell what they see. Then tell the story leading them to see how much Jesus loved little children, because they were pure and innocent, and that they should always remain pure and free from evil if they want to return to Heaven and live with Heavenly Father. Lead them to see how they will be blessed if they have pure, clean thoughts. If they don't think naughty things they won't be naughty; good thoughts make good boys and girls. Stimulate them to want to be like our great men and women. All of our great men and women, when little children, had good thoughts and a great desire to be something worth while. Lead them to see that our thoughts make us. The people in penitentiaries to-day are there for no other reason than they had the wrong kind of thoughts when small. Jesus was great, good and kind when a boy, so He couldn't help being the kind of man lie grew to be. Memory Gem: Same as last Sunday. Songs: "Jesus Once Was a Little Child," Primary Soul: Book; "Dearest Jesus, May 1 !>>  maua ko Elder E. II. Anderson i tae ki W-hare Kauri ara Chatham Islands ki te kauwhau i te Rongo-pai o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Xci, i rite ai te kupu a te Karaiti ki ng.\ Hurai, "He hipi atu ano akn, ehara nci i tenei koiiiga., me arahi mai ratou ki konei kia urhakakotahitia te kahui, kotahi ano hepara." Kei a [loan! te whakamarama 10: 10. No reira, e nga Hunga Tapu, e ki ana ahau he Itonore mii tenei ki ta U Atua titiro, ki a tatou ano hold ki nga Hunga Tapu. Kua iriiria e maua e ono nga mema hou, e toru kua manaakitia ki roto ki te Hahi, a kua whakatungia lioki he peka mo ratou. Ko Te Han Mataira te Timuaki o taua peka, ara e kiia ana te iugoa o taua peka ko Taupeka. Ko etahi o nga Hunga Tapu o te WJiare Kauri E hoa ma, i tiuo manaakitia maua e nga tangata tend whenua. He hunga tenei kaore i te mohio ki te whakapono. E ai ki te titiro te alma ko te atua kei te whakapono ratou ko nga whare waipiro. Tino nui atu to ratau hiahia ki tera mahi i to ratou ki te whakapono ki te Atua. Ko tenei to atua nui kei a ratau ko te waipiro me era atu mahi kino. Otira i te mca kua tae maua ki waenganui i a ratau c tino manaakitia am maua e rrtau, e vhakarorgo ana etahi o ratou ki a maua !: ur.vhnn. Kati : '-i;i nno tetahi mea nui i wliakaritra ki i«- Aperira 21, 1926 IE KAKHRE I 29 peka, ara i te whakatunga i to peka ka whakaritca he Kura Hapati mo ratou. Kia mohio ai,   LVpuere, i te 3 nga [mora te ahiahi ka kawangia te Whare-karakia Men e te Pihope Waiapu. Dr. Sedgwick. Kati, i te hui ki Tikitiki ki roto i te Whare-karakia, he Diea ata wliiriwhiri te hun ;.\ nic;» i hinga ki te pae   tc Kawana-Tianara, ko tc Pirimia, ko Pomare, ko te Pihopa o Waiapu, ko te Timuaki (Tiata .Jones) Kai-whakawa te Kooti Whenua Maori o Nin Tireni, ko te Wiremu, mema i te Paremata, n«;a tino manuliiri a nga hoia i ta ratou tina. Te alma nuku atu i te 300 nga hoia — Pakeha, Maori. Ko nga" apiha whakahaere ko Capt. Tutepuaki Pitt, raua ko Major Te Rangihiroa Buck. Tino papai nga kupu i pnta i roto i tenei hakari. lie inaha an > nga "toast" i whakahonorctia. Ka imitu tc kai, ka hoki tc Kawana mc tona ope ki te Matahiia, tc kainga te Wiremu. Ko te Pirimia raua ko tona wahine i nolio ih . No tc po ka tu he kanikani wluikanui i tc Pirimia raua ko tona v.ahinc. Ka kitea i ko*.ui te tokomahn tc tamariki Aperira 21, 1926 TE KAkERE 131 Ngati Porou. E koa ana ta':u ngakau, nioku i kite kei 1«- tipu taton te Maori. Tera ano tetahi ahua i mini ai ahau ki nga taniariki tend iwi, ara poto ratou katoa lie tamariki kura anake. I tupono an ki etahi tamariki kei nga tin  whare wananga to matauranga e kura ana. Kaore ter.ei mea te kuaretanga i a Ngati Porou. Tino pai te kanikani. Kaore lie ahau hianga i kin;). Te 1 nu lioki o te Piriniia raua ko tona wahine ki te "-I;!//.." I karan«;atia ano nga kotiro te Arawa kia vrhakamatakitakia nga "Jazz" hou. Ka matakitaki ra tenei tauhou ki nga kani- kani o cnei ra. 10 kore rawa e man i te tangata, lieoi ano   Waikato i in nei ki Te [Ioe-o-Tainui i te 20, 21   Pepuere 1926. No te 4 o nga haora te ata ka paheno niai niaua i Tikitiki, i te hawhe te 11 1" po ka tae mai tnaua ki Nepia. A.0 ake te i'a, te IS, ka haere maua ki Waikato. Kaore i moea te kainga. I te ata te Paraire i  ka tae ki Huntley, abialii rawa atu ka tae ki te marae to hni. I to ata   te Hatarei ka 1 imata te I liii Pariha   Waikato. \.\ TE 11 A II MEHA He kipoata mo te Karttl lie ripoata mo te almatanga te ora,   if mate te kura .. te M.A.C. R 7') nga tamariki kua tae mai kei 1.' kura i tenei tau. i\o te iiiii ma te tamaitj kotahi te '.'Hi i i  ion Atua; c kore hoki ;i rhowa »• mea, lie hara- korc tc tangata   tc hara te whakanoa i 1c ingoa   tc kohukohu, he whakahua rorirori ;i liauraic. i. Te Ture Tuawlia: "Km mahara ki te ra hapati kia whakatapua." K rua nga tikanga «» tenei wliakahaunga, ko ciici "kaua c mahi," ko tc main me te whakaritc mo nga ra e one i main ai, 1 kotahi pa mahi mo te taha whaka-te- wairua »• w haka-u ana i te take v. hakamul nnga nei. Te Ture Tuanma : "Whakahonoretia tou 1 » .• 1 1 > • 1 me tou vvhaea." Ko te tuturitanga i roto i tenei vvahi   nga Ture Kotahi Tekau he tono me te kupu whakaari. K rite ana t«- whai tikanga   t u hoa." ko te whakiiaiii a tenei whakahaunga c arai ana kia kaua e takalii oati, u korero whakakinokino, a korero ranei e mama'/ ai tetahi. (Co tc korero teka mo era atu tangata kaore c tan kia karangatia tona ahuatanga he kai-tangata. Xa konei ano i arai ai te A1 ua i tenei m . Era atu ahuatanga. (a) Te hoatu i te pai mo te kino. "Ki te tutaki koe ki te kin a tou hoa riri, ki tana kaihe ranei e atiti noa atu ana, me at a v. hakahoki e koe ki a ia." Ekoruhe 23: 4. (b) Te hoatu i tc awiiina mo 1«' kino. "Ki tc kite koe i te kaihe o tou hoa riri e takoto ana i raro i tana pikaunga, a. 1.. ngakau-kore koe ki to whakaara, me ata xrliakaara tahi e , n.a. " Ekoruhe 23 : f>. ( c ) Kia aroha ki tou hoa tata. "Arohaina ton hoa tata ;• ko koe" Rewitikuha 19: IS. C. Mo te korero pukp"_ka. (a) \'i;i wli-i korero a Mohi e mohiotia ana kei tc rite tonu ki ii" ■. wliai korero a nga tangata matauranga Roma me Karilu, ara ki nga whai korero a Teniotini me Hihero. Nga tauira Tiuteronomi !) me tc 28 >. (I)) Nga Waiata a Rawiri, ko tc 23 mo tc 24 nga mea e tino paingia ana. Apcrira 21 1 926 TK KARERE 1 J5 (c) Nga waiata me nga whakatauki a lloromona e tino kiia ana he pukapuka whai matauranga. (d) Te pukapuka a Hopa, kiia ana. "kaorc lie pukapuka whiriwhiri pai atn i roto i tc ao nga pukapuka." (e) Nga korero mo Hutu raua ko Ehetere, kci te riterite ki nga korero nga pukapuka c kitea ana. D. Mo nga korero o nehe. (a) Ko te pukapuka nui atu nga pukapuka tr.pu o nehe e mohiotis ana a c whakamihi ana lioki tc ao 1110 te nui e era korero, a pukapuka hoki he putake hoki no nga whakamara* matanga me nga whakaaturanga ko te Paipera Tawliito, e tut um ana ko tetahi o nga hua o te Wa Molii. E. Nga painga ki te tangata. (a) He whakaaturanga whakahe i to oranga te iwi mea ana ko te pono ki te Atua te huarahi e piki ai, a ko tc tuku ilio ki te hara lie taki mai i te whakaraunga. (h) Ko tc whakakahanga i ikm iwi whaka-te-nota i ma roto i tc huin.ua nga toto Hiperu. (c) Te whakaputanga mai nga wahine tokorua i ora, c lino paingia una. 1. Te whaen nana te poropiti nui atn i whanau mai. •J. Te what ;i a tc Tama :i i  te ngakau ki te korokipo ki te Atua, tc whakaatu i roto tc Turc Tuatahi. •J. Homai he tino whakaaturanga i riro nga tamariki a lharaira i nga karakia whakapakoko nga Ihipiana. :;. lie aha ic mea kua pti tc whakaatu ki te ao i runga i tc tikanga tc whakahua poke .' 4. Ko a wai in.ihi «• malii   Arnna. ia' \ T ga Uikona. ( b) \ T ga Kai-\Vhakaako. (c) Nga Piriti. id) I lc nialii vvhakaritc ma tcnci ma tcnci, 2. Tc Tohungatanga o Merckihercke. i a ) Nga Apoiora! (I>) Nga IVtcrjaka, ara Kai-lvai'w ljau. (c) Nga Tohunga Xui illai L'iriti). i«lj Nga Wliim Tckaiu c ) Nga K;ium;itua. F) lie malti \v;bakariic ma tcnci ma tciKii. B. Na te mana o te Tohungatanga i whakaturia ai ano te Ilahi o Ihu Karaiti. 1. Xotialica i whakaturia, | I. 2. I whakaturia ki lica. 3. Xa wai i whakatu. C. Nga tino mana whakahaere o te Hahi. J,. Ko tc Tumuakitanga Tuatahi. 2. Ko t«' Runanga o nga Ap.otoro. •'). Ko tc Petcriaka Whakahaere. (Kai-manaaki.) -I. Ko uga Tumuaki Tuatahi e Whitu o nga Whitu Tckau. Aperira 21, 1926 te karere 137 5. Ko tc Pihopa AVhakahaere (Tino Pihqpa.) (». Ko nga mahi whakarite ma tenei ma tenoi. D. Nga Kai Whakalrtere te Takiwa. 1. Ko to Takiwa. (a) Ko tc Tumuaki Takiwa. (10 Ko to Ruminga Xui. (c) Ko nga Peteriaka Takiwa. (d) Nga malii ma tenei ma tend. 2. Ko te Peka. (a) Ko te Pihvpatanga. {)>) Nga Piriti. (e) Xga Kai Whakaako. (d) Nga Rikona. (0) Nga mahi ma tenei ma tenei. D. Nga tikanga awhina whakahaere. 1. Ko t :ira v 1:1:1 1 j i ana tc manawa ki tc mapu i mnga i nga almatangn c pa una ki a ia. Tatou ka titiro i nga tikanga •• u tonu ;:i tana mahi. Me tana hoki e tango ana hei whakantu 1. 10 tana mahi. Tuatahi, ko it" a nei O h.iahia ana tc manawa mo tana mahi; kia whiwlii mil tonu ia i tc toto lici mapunga. Tuarun kia kore lie nawe, kia kore hoki pangia e te mate; 1 ko tc inatoru, ko te tikanga tino nni hoki; mo whiwhi tonu ta manawa, hei oranga mo 011a wahi akc lv i to wahi whakat n n",i toto katon i puta mai i roto i ;i in i; v S TE KARERE Aperira 21, 1920 I te putanga atu te toto i te manawa, kia korereiia ki nga wahi katoa te tinana kia whangaia ana wahi ki te kai v hua mai ana i roto i te toto, ki te okiliana lioki (oxygen), tera nga kcrere e rua e hopu mai ana i te walii whakatckau n if toio. ka korcretia atu ano ki nga pareparc te manawa whangai ai. 1 etahi wa ka pangia tcnei tnapu maihara e to male ka kuiti liaere nga ara toto. Ka hold iho hoki i te wahi whaka- tckau nga toto e koreretia ana he whangai i nga niaihara te manawa. K at a hi ka ngoikorc liaere to manawa, ki te liiahia te tinana kia omaoma. Kia piki ranei i te ara what a ki te porou runga, heoi kua kore e kaha, kua ngoikore kc tenei niihini ki te mapu i nga toto whakakaha ki te tinana. I tino rite tatou ki te manawa, e malii ana i ia ra, i ia ra, i ia marama, i ia niarama ki te v> hakapukai oranga mo tatou ko a tatou tamariki. Ko te Kai llomai i nga mea katoa, kci te liiahia kia lioatu e tatou te wahi whakatekau nga hua a tatou main. Ki te kore tatou e pangia c te mate hopo. Ki te kore hoki e rite atu ki nga huarahi toto kua kuiti; kua pangia ranei e te mate. K tika ana tatou kia titiro whakainua, ki nga manaakitanga hohonu c ahu mai ana i te "Manawa Nui Rawa," te putaki mai nga mea pai katoa e tika nci kia whiwhi tatou. Te Atuatanga o te Karaiti HE KAUWHAU NA TETAH1 O NGA APOTORO Improvement Era January I9?6 Na Robert Turnbull i whakam: ori. Ki te Etita, tena koe. I korero an i tera rangi atu ra i te kauhau i kauhautia ai e tetehi nga Apotoro te Tekau ma Rua i te liui nui i tu ki te Pa Tote hei whakanui mo te pahemotanga te 50 tau mai ano i te timatanga te Miutara. Ko te kauhau nei i kauhautia e Krata Orihana V. Witini te Tekau ma Rua i te 7 o nga ra Hune 1925. Kci to mohio an ka pai nga kai-korero te Karere ki te korero i ana korero. I korerotia hoki e te kaumatua nei e Witini te pakanga nui c pakanga mai nei i roto i te nuinga n " ' !:"! • : *?. 1 *' hi tnua, I: ) nga tangata kaorft Aperira 21 1 926 TE KARERK 1 39 e whakapono ana i whanau mai a te Karaiti i roto i to wahine puhi, a kaore ano hoki whakapono i mahi merekara te Karaiti i roto i nga tangata, e tika ana kia hatcpoa atu i te Iiahi. 1] ki ana tenei talia ko nga minita e kore e whakapono ki te atuatanga te Karaiti me te pono Ana mahi nierekara lea whakakorea atn raton i a ratou mahi minita. Kci te korero tetehi taha kaore ratou   mohio ma te korero pukapuka anake, a c kore hoki tatou c tin;) moliio ki te ha ere ki nga kura; a e kore ano hoki tatou c tino mohio In- tama a te Karaiti na te Atua i roto i rtohi a 1 u tangata. Ko to ai.i anake   Spanish Fork, Utah. I lai mai a ia ki Akarar.a i te 90 n^ r a ra o Mane i te tau IQ22 a i \\\ akaritea ki te Kareti ki te mahi kai-wiiakaako. J te 12 o n^a ra o Oketopa, K22 ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa o Haur. ki, a whakaritea ana hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa i te 1 o n*ja ra o Mei, 1923. I te hokinga atuo Angiha T. Raiti i te 120 Mei ,1925, i whakaritea ko ia te kai- whakahaere   te Mih; 1 a i taua w a tai mai ki te taenia mai o te tumuaki hou o Tu-nuaki Hoani 1 1. I inikini, i te 10 o nga ra o Akuhata. 1925, katahi I a meinga ia te ho 1 haere a te Ti- nikim i a ia e tuiio 1 ac rt ai a i 1 •. a \ a hi a te Mil ana. 1 te lb o n^H ra o Oketora, 1925, ka whakaritta a Harihana hei Tun auk i n.o te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te \} nga ra Aperira ka tukua ho.'ioretia kia hoki am kr toiia kainga. 1 Id, r CI renre I . R;i«n 1 1 Irvin \V Evi KoErata  g 2 o nga raoHunc, 1925, ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa Wairarapa. Whakaritea ana ko ia te Tumuaki o Wairarapa i te 90 nga ra o Hepete- ma, 1925, a i te 130 nga ra o Aperira, 1926, ka tukua hono- retia kia hoki atu ki H it 11a. Ko Erata THOMAS W. HICKMAN (Hikimana) o Og- ilen, Utah. I tae mai ia i te 27 o nga ra o Tihema, 1923, a whakaritea ana ki te Kareti ki te M. A. C. I a ia e mahi ana i te Kareti ko ia h >ki te kai-whakahaere o te mahi wluitu po- oro. I te 6 o ng 1 ra o Oketopa, T924, ka nukuhia atu ia ki Wairarapa mahi ai, a i te 3 o ng 1 ra o Hune, 1925, nukuhia mai a no ki te Kareti. I te 8 o nga ra o Oketopa, 1 925, ka whakaritea a Hikimana hei Tumuaki mo te takiwa pakeha o Manawatu, a i te 130 nga ra o Aperira, 1 926, ka tukua hono- retia atu. Aperira 2[, 1926 TE KARERE He Panui Ki te Etita, Tena koe. Man e panui atu ki te HungaTapu, taku pukapuka ''Articles of Faith" i ngaro i te Hui Tau o Nu- haka. E rua nga ingoa kei roto; Atawiki Wiapo, Grace Hara- tua. Kua mate te kotiro nana i homai ki au he "keep sake''. Mehemea kua kitea me tuku mai ki te M. A. C, Hastings, H.B. E whakataikiu atu ana au. Na Grace Haratua HUI PARIHA te takiwa Haki Pei, ka tu ki TAHORAITI, TANIWAKA, a te 1, mete 2 nga ra MEI, 1926. (He powhiri tenei.) No reira haere mai e te iwi. Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai! I E KARERE Aperira 21, 1920 KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOXONCA Ko enei et ihi o nga pukapuk;i e takoto ana kci te tari o te Miliaria hei ro- konga ki nga niea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga una e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72. Auckland. STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with^fceady Reference, Leathi New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather Book of Mormon, Cloth M " " , Halt' Leather •' " " , Leather Pearl of Great Price, Cloth Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather MA03I BOOKS AND TRACTS Maori Ready Reference, Cloth " " " , Leather Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth Me Nga tiimene, Leather 3 in I II 2 & 1 0-0 & 25-0 II ;  90 150 2-0 9-u 2 3-6 1-9 -6 5-0 15-0 5-J 150 1 4-0 5-0 ?6 4-6 " " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth u " " , Leather Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara l.'tu Nui, Cloth u 1, u it «  j^ T 3^£iE£i££ZE^:i0^iO^ ^L^.i&^s-x^ '■_ Wuhanga XX Mei26, 1926 Numa V KOREROTANGA Ko tc Kmama Rikona Tuaiahi Niu Tim "C& KftR£R&" WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO Kl TE ETITA He Marenatanga 161 Ko te Hui Nui a Ngati Porou 165 Kote Matenga o Metapere Matai 161 ko te Matenga Tepora Kuru 102 Ko teTakanga Atu teRongopai 163 KO NCA RONCO KORERO He Ripoata no tc M.A.C. 171 KO NCA TUHINCA MAI E Ono nga Take mo tc \vh;ik itekau 174 Kote Merekara o nga Karoro 177 Te Atuatanga o te Kara it i 108 MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 158 MAHI KURA HAPATI Concert Recitation 144 Intermediate Department 151 Korero a Ngakau 1 44 Maori Theological 144 Pakeha Theological 147 Postlude 143 Prelude 143 Primary Department 154 Sacrament Gem L43 NA TE ETITA He Mihi 1/4 Ripoata Hui Tau 172 KSHW WaHANGA 20 WENEREI. MEI 26. 1926. NAMA 5 Mazri w«rkullural Ccllcge Hastings, H. B. E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Alihana o Niu Tireni, Halii o ihu karaiti o te hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri ISei. Tukua juai o kuutou reta ki te Etita c Te Karcre, M.A.C., Hastings. Ho l(! ut u mo TE KARERE i to tau e rima herein (.">/-). KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. file nutua utu mo tcu pcpa kc v?.ii\ hi ai. J. 11. Tinikini, Tuniuaki Mtkana Mariana K. Ewatana, lJita. Tiala Witihua, hiita Hoa Auhina. ho U> Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Mcha Ko nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). Wiremu A. Koura Eru T. Kupa MAHI KURA HAPATI. Prelude. After Cowex. Eiiymnj] SACRAMENT GEM FOR JUNE, 1920 ■ in memory of I he broken Mesh We eat the broken bread ; And witness with the cup afresh, Our faith in  ft itop ^iplii^l c l I : [I 144 TE KAIM.KK Mei :6, l  raton Iioki te rangatiratanga o tc rangi. "Ka koa te hunga c tangi ana: ka whakamarietia lioki ratou. "Ka koa !;• hunga rigakau inaahaki: ka riro hoki i a ratou tc whenua. "Ka koa 1c liunga o hiakai ana. c liiainu ana, ki tc tika: c makona Iioki ratou. "Ka koa te liunga tohu tangata: c tohungia li >ki ratou." MAORI THEOLOGICAL Ratapu tuatahi, tttine 6, 1920. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. Na Tia/;a W. Witchira i whakamaori. Putakc: Ko nga vvhakahauhau a tc tauira i v.hakalako- toi i;> ii ti e Ehu hei mahi ma tatou. Ta Whakaatu: I a Maka 1 : 12 ; ia liuka, 4: 1; i a Matiu, 4:1. Tc Wa: I muri tat a mai o te iriiiinga. Te Wahi: I te'Koraha. Te Take Nui: Ka tukua ilio   n >!.o ;;;;'::: mo 1;- rrha tcliau nga .a mc nga po. E korc nga karaipiturc v mca he a!. a Tana mahi, cngari ka wbakaarotia c tatou he hiahia Nona kia korc atu la i nga tangata, Ida korcro marie ai la ki Tona Matua. lie nui Ana patai ki te Matua. phara hold la i tc tamariki Liaiaaei. Kua mohio la inaiauei he mahi nui Tana hoi mahi; a ka hiahia [a kia moliio la ki i! m whakaaro Tona Matua me pehea tc mahi. K alici ai la tc korero ki tc Matua, ka kite la me whalra- kahore e la nga hiahia kikokiko. Kahorc la i vvhakaatu ki a tatou he aha nga mca a tona Matua i korcro ai ki a la, cngari kci te mohio tatou ahakoa he aha ana m  l u KARERfc Mei 26 i« 26 Ratapu t inrtia, liuie 13, I ( J2(i. AKORANGA 14. "Te Tuatahi o ta Pa:ra Mahi Mihana Hicrc." Tg roanga atu 1. Te tutakitanga ano o Paora raua ko Panapa. Ka haerc atu a Panapa i Anatioka ki Tarahu ki te whakatau i a Paoia. Main 11 : L9-25. (b) Kotahi tan i pau i a ia ki Anatioka. Malii 11 : 25-26. (c) I matua Luaina nga akonga lie Karaitiana Ki Anatioka. (d) [va hacre a Paora raua ko Panapa ki lliruharama, he raea mau raw a ma nga teina i Hu:aa. Mahi 11 : 27.-30. 2. Tc hacrenga a Paora ki Anatioka me [Iiria. (a) Ka karangatia a Panapa raua ko Paora. .Mahi 13; L-3. (b) He karangatanga c te Atua pera me Arona. Tiroliia Hiperu 5 : 4. (c) Te tiikunga atu o nga kai-kauwhau tuarua. Main 13: 3; Mahi 6: 6. Whakamarania : Whakamahia nga mapi o te Paipera ki te l.ica e taea ana, hei whakaatu i nga haereerenga o nga kai- kauwhau. Ratapu tnatoru, Huns 20, 1926 AKORANGA 15. ' ' Tuatahi o ta Pac ra Ivlahi Mihana H iere. " Te roa r. ga atu. 1. 1 te motu o Kaipcru. (a) I\ci Llarami e kauwhau ana i nga whare karakia. Mahi 13; 4-5. (b) Nga mca i tupono i Papaho. 1. Te tutakitanga ki te poropiti teka. Mahi 13: (!. 2. Te whakatahuritanga o [Icrekiu Paora — he tangata whai ingoa, c kiia ana nona te putake mai o te ingoa o Paora. 3. Te whakahuatanga tuatahi o tetalii o nga ingoa o Ilanra. Malii 13: 9. 4. Te whakakiteatunga o te mana o tc Atua. Main Mei 26, 1926 TE KARFRE 147 13: 9-12. Whakaritea ki a Aranii 30: 37-56. 2. Ki Percka i Pamapuria. (a) Jui wchcwchc nga wliakaaro Paora raua ko Hoani, ;:,.i Maka. Nga IMahi 13: 13; Mahi 15: 37-38. (}>) Ka haere atu a Hoani ara a Maka ki Hiruliaraina. Malii 13: 13. Whakamarama : Kaorc i te ruarama te take te wehewc- henga. Ki te wliakaaro akc, kaore a .Maka i tino pai ki ta tc wliakaaro Paora i kite ai te whanuitanga te mahi i Aliia Maina (Asia Minor). Ratapu tuawha, Hune ?7, 1926 AKORANGA 16. "Taatahi fct Paora Mahi Mihana Haere." Te roanga atu. 1. Kei Anatioka i Pihiria. (Tirohia te mapi.) (a). Ta Paora kauwhau ki nga Hurai me te hnnga   wehe ana ki te Atua. Mahi 13: 14-41. (b) Ka whakakahoretia ta raua e nga Hurai, ka tahuri atu raua ki nga tauiwi. Mahi L3: 42-49; Mahi 28: 28; Ihaia 4!); G. (e) Ka lu ano nga whakatoinga — ka haere atu raua i Anatioka. (d) Kei roto i te wharc karakia i Lkoniunfa. Mahi 14: 1-6. 2. A Paora raua ko Pauapa kei Raihitara. Mahi 14; 6-7. (a) Ka wlmkaorangia tctahi tangata kopa Paora. Mahi 14; 8-10; Whakaritea ki a :\ Xiwhai 17: 7-!). (I)) Ka whakapono nga tangata, ka mea he Atua raua. Mahi 14: IMS. (  i v I [he later lives of Jacob and Esau justify the ucin us through which Jacob received the greater blessings? 2. Did Jacob have a faith in (Jod thai Esau did not I Did he have a judgmenl of the real life values thai Esau did no, .' Third Sunday, Jane 20, 1926. Lesson 13. Jacob as Father and Patriarch. Texi • Ucnesis, Chapter 28. Objective: To show that man reaches his highest development through faith in and service to God. Sui>p!ementary Licfercnccs: Same as in previous lesson. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: I. Jacob leaves home. 1. I lis journey down to llaran. 2. His vision of the ladder. II. Jacob's service of Laban, his uncle. Covering a period of '10 years. IN. Jacob's return home. 1. J I is preparation to meet Esau. 2. 1 1 is encounter with the angel. .*). lie enters the promised land. IV. Jacob's family blessings. 1. Twelve sons. 2. His journey to Egypt. 3. He succeeded to all the blessings of Abraham. Jacob was a plain man, patient, thoughtful, shrewd, and far-seeing, lie was also gentle, affectionate and home loving, Geikie. Questions for Teachers. 1. Point mil the greal strength of Jaeohalong three lines. 2. Considering that Jacob was really called to his great mission the night of his encounter with the angel -how many years of preparation had lie had? lourth Sunday, June 27, 1926 Lesson 14. Joseph, as a Youth end Young Man. Tcx1 : (: ii \| mi: BOOK OF MORMON" I i»->i Sunday, ■• 111 • -. * 926 l uiioi m 1 OSt Da) I t*SOfl Same ,-s Pakeha Theological Class. Sec page M7 Teaehi Rj nkilful (pic I ioninfl j on w .11 !•«■ uhle in have j our 1 hi 1 E K UtERE Mei 26, I bc€ the fine distinctions between the temptations of Jesus ppcals which Satan made to Him. In each instant- ■ hi in class gel tlie thoughl thai Ihey, too, arc tempted, along, i.e.. their vanity, love of power, greed, disloyalty, appetites etc. Have them point out the big value of their ability i  resist temptation! How can Ihey acquire thai ability? How docs attendance at Sunday School contribu e to (heir power  !* re- sisting temptation Let them show how the many activities and requirements in the Church all help to s rengthen the individual to rise above temptation. Probably some may eare to recite in- cidents wherein they were tempted, and over, ome the temp!ations. Second Sunday, Jiue 13, 1926 Lesson 12. Alma and His People. i : Mosiah, thrptera 18, 23, 21. Objective: To teach thai though "the Lord sccth fit to  ii l!. Conversion of Alum. I he Younger, and the Sons of Mosiah. Tcx1 : Mo: iali 27 and 28th Chapters. Objective: To leach thai Faith brings tho soul "1o behold Ilic marvelous light oi' Clod," while the power of Satan leads ii ; n io •■■!-   w pictures, where possible, of ( hrist in the attitude of prayer. Stimulate the children for the desire to seek their Heavenly Father. If it were necessary for Chrisl to seek Him, how much need we .' Memory Gem. "Jesus friend of little children Be a friend to me; ( Juide my cleeds and ever keep me ( Hose to Thee. " 'n teaching ihe gem, show picture of Jesus blessing little children as point of contact. Song: "Little Purple Pansy," p. 127; D.S.S. "Nature's Easter Story/' Tally Hill, p. 37. Res1 Exercise: Carry out the thought of sacrifice by having the children, on Fast Day, instead of eating their breakfast, fast. They c:m lake apples, potatoes, etc., or else prepare a little i i with a little lunch in, to take [he Bishop or Reli  v . S cond Sunday, Jane 13, 1926. The I ast Suppi r I ' hi" ' Luke 156 IK KARERE Mei 26, 1926 22:7-20, 24 27 ; John 13:4, 5, 12-16; 34:14-15. References: "Jesus the Christ," p.p. 592-597; "Sunday Morning in (he Kindergarten," Lesson -17. Time : a1 (he Fcas1 of 1 lie Passover. Place : Jerusalem. Objective: To teach thai by partaking of the Sacra men 1 worthily we show our willingness to remember II im and follow [lis ic.'ii lungs. Suggestions Lo Teachers. Review, by asking questions aboul some of Ihe things Jesus did while on earili. lie was now preparing to leave the people here and re; urn to II is Heavenly Father. Bring out the im- portance of preparation. As lie sent His disciples to prepare Tor the least, to prepare for what was coming, so we too must prepare Tor what is before us, Jesus showed in how we must be willing to follow. That is why, when He broke the bread, blessed it, and passed it. Hi 1 said, "'lake, eat in remembrance of my body. Drink in remembrance of my blood." When we think of His body and blood sacrificed for us. we can't help but think of His teachings, and when we think of His teachings, we must be willing to follow. Thai is our preparation for what is to eome. Show picture, and lead them to see that this is why we partake of the Sacrament: because Jesus asked h ; s disciples to. Bring out the eommandmcnl that Jesus gave them to love one another. Memory Gem: Tn teaching the memory gem, lend Ihc ehil- ren to tell how the Sacrament was passed to Ihcm. and by whom. How they should partake of it : clean hands, righl hand, quietly, holding cups quietly. Just a liny piece of bread While I eat I bow my head ; Now a sip of water clear To show I leave my Saviour dear. ~Res1 Exercise: Bring out the thought of preparation in ihe home, making it a more beautiful place in which to live. Dramatize the things that the children may do in keeping the home tidy and clean, picking up bits from the floor, dusting books, keeping things in order, setting ihe table in an orderly Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE \'J way. Let this })iin?j.- oul i he thought that is brought  : "The Life of the Master/' John Watson, chapter 29; "Sunday Morn- ing in the Kindergarten," Lessons 48, 4i). Objective: To teacli that by being obedienl to the laws and commandments of God, we will have Life hereafter. Time: When Jesus was thirty-three years of age. Place: Golgotha, just outside of city of Jerusalem. Suggestions to Teachers. Lead the children to see the big purpose of Chirst*s death. To rhow us there is no death. Bring ou1 the beautiful side of it, tiol the horrid. Remove from the mind of the child the dread - ;' being buried, show that it is only our body thai is placed in the grave; thai our spiril has gone to a higher sphere e caterpillar gives np its stages of life to become a butterfly. When the caterpillar goes into the cocoon, we can'1 see it. It op pears dead, lmi ii isn'1 ; it is only preparing for a higher life. Its w,\\ of preparing is to cat certain foods and to grow. Out wu,y of preparing for a higher life is to do kind deeds, be prayer ful. Remember the (cachings of Christ, to love one another, etc Help the children to sec that there is a purpose back of everj lhiii«:. M • ■■ - Oem: Sing or recite the last verse of " Jesus Wants f ' f nu I ■■ i i ■ as last Sum] [test L u rcisc: To brinja oul the thoivxhl of "The Awaken Dramatize Nature's awakening, the warm south wind, the r.'Uiii" of the sunbeams, the caterpillar turning into butterfly, 1 h • li '58 TE KARERK Mei 26, 1926 tor her babies. Or, sing and dramatize "Nature Awakening" l\  i to v hakahaerenga a te wairua. Ruka 1 : 80. 5. I karangatia hoki ia c tc Atua, hoi nvatamua (fore* runner) 1110 tc Kai Whakaora. Iloani 1 : 6-8. (i. Xa ana i iriiri tc Kai Whakaora tc ao ki te wai, i raro i Tana tino whakahau. .Matin .'> : 13-17. 7. I] kiia ana lioki ko ia tc poropiti nui atn kua wliunau mai. Matin 11 : 11. lie kai-kauwkan maia hoki. Maka I: 4-7. !). I hereheroa, i whakamatca hoki ia mo tona !•: we i ki te lii-i i te ha -a. Matin 11 : 3-12. 10. I ara ia i to aranga mai llm Karaiti. Ako. me nga Kawc. 133 : 55. 11. X.i ana i whakahoki mai tc Tohungalanga Arona i nga ra muri nei. Ako. me nga Kawc Wahanga 13. L2. I whakaatu hoki ia i tona hinengaro ki a llohepa Mete mo te taha ki te Atuatanga Mm Karaiti. Ako. me nga Kawc. 93: 16-17, ! '. ' • hacrc i.ihi mai ia me te Ariki ki te an a i  llm. no Iloani i svliaka rite ' i E k \ki-.ri-; Mei L6, 19:6 2. Whakaaturia to rarangi karaipiture c tauroko a. in i ara ;i lloani Kai Iriiri i to aranga to Karaiti, a ka lac talii mai lioki me la a tc tino aranga mai. 3. Whakaaturia to tautoko, i whakaatu a [Ioani Kai Iriiri i tona hincngaro kid flohepa Mote tno te taha ki a tc Karail 1, 1. Rapua i roto i a Matin 3 to tautoko I10 tangata ngakau mai.aki a I [oani Kai I riiri. "). I pohea tc whanaungatunga lloani raua ko lltti? (J. Na wai, a nonahca lioki a lloani Kai Iriiri i tnantfakitia ai ! Ruka 1 : 7(i-77. AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. KO TE WHAEA. "Nga waliino tauria ana ko nga wahinc koi a ral.m nci tc main mii ki tc rapu me te whakaki i aua aluiatanga niaori, pou tai gata waenganui e karangatia uei e t  u ko te kainga. Ka 1u ka hinga tc tangata c rite ana ki to kaha, ki tc ugoho o tana pou." \a Ida Tarboll. A. Tc wkai tikanga to main a nga whaoa. 1. I runga i tc tikanga whakatupu ake i tetahi iwi. (a) Ko tc whakaputanga mai i etahi ki tc ao lici tangata whenua mo nga wa e takoto ake nei. (b) Te whakaakoranga nga tamariki kia rile lici tangata whenua, e tan nui ana koi runga i nga whaoa. 2. I runga i te tikanga whakatupu ake i to kain.ua. (a) Ko tc whaea tc waenganui (center), me tc kai wha- kaoiio ake hold i nga aluiatanga katoa te kai nga. (1*) I te manawanui tc whaea, ki te raataara tonu, me te tupato ki tc whiriwhiri i nga kai c tika ana, i akci ai ia ki to whakaputa mai i nga tangata ora, kaha lioki i roto i tana wlianan. (e) Kei tc whaea te kaha ki to whakau i to nana me to toa ki roto i tana wlianan. •".. I runga i te tikanga whakatupu ake i te Ilal.i. (a) Ko te whaea te mea tnatalii ki tc ako i tc tamaiti i 1c kot iro ranei ki t;- inoi. Mji 26, T926 TE K.ARERE l6l 1 1») Ko te whaca hoi hoatu tuatahi ki tc tamaiti ki te kotiro i 1c \\ liakraro mo 1c Atna. (c) Ko te whaca hci hoatu tuatahi ki te tamaiti ki te kotiro i te whakaaro mo te Rongo-pai. (d) Ka taca c tc whaca le kitc-kia iriiria uga tamariki i tc wa c tika ana, c i*iro ai ratou hci me ma mo 1c Ifahi. (e) V) taca e tc whaea te whakahau 1c tamaiti te kotiro i-aua lahi ko tc papa kia whakaritc i nga malii o 1c Ilalii i.ic 1c pupuii i nga turc o te Kongo-pai. o- KI TE ETITA. Ko te Matenga o Melapere Matai Ki Te Karcrc, tena koe, man e panui alu ki nga marae o lac ai koe tc matenga o la maton tamaiti o Metapcrc Matai i mate atn ki te lloliipera i Painutana. \a nga mafauranga o tc pakelia i toho kin riro ki reira, ka kiia mai c tc Taknta me l.ai-i kia tapahia, ka oca. Ka patai a Sister Wai, "Ki te riro ki tc hohipera, ka ora ranei, Takuta?" Tc uin. "Ac!" I taua rnngi tonu i mauria ;ii, ka tapahia, kaorc rawa he painga akc. [' lorn n°;.! rangi i r.iu.'i mai ka tapahia ano, ka ma ai nga .•ml;.;. Ao manga akc ko te Ratapn tc 25 o nga ro o Aj -iM-ii-a ka licino hoki, korc rawa he painga o tc taknta, Ko tc male i whakakohatu ki poto, no tc tapahanga iho ka kitcn l.na pa k arn kc ki roto. N'ui aiu to matou pouri mo te in ate ii ga o tenci kotiro. I whanau ia 1908 i a Ihnic te 7 o nga ra. [Co ona tan kci tc 17. hci a llnnc to 7   nni nt.u ' » raton manaaki, Kaorc o tukunn mai ana kia hoki mni, lie i ica tohu nakn ka hoki mai. K  Wiromu Takana raua ko to Pecti, e rua o raua hokinga mai. 1 te run o o raua hokingn mai ka haere mai te llui Atawhai o Tahoraiti me uga llunga Tapu. I te takiwa o te karakia na VV. Takana i whakahacro, nga kauwhau i a Tutu, fninita o te Mihingare, raua ko Kiriniwutu. Tcna koutou c uga iwi c tac ai teTici panui. Ma te Alna tat on e tiaki, v awliina, i uga \va katoa. Ka mutu. \:i to koutou tungaam , TAITOKO MATAF. lie Marenataiiga I in Ictchi marenatanga ki te Peka o Moawhango. Ko uga ingaa o uga inatua o tc mea taaue ko te Poihipi Teehi raua ko Iviiiha Teehi. KO uga ingoa o nga inatua o te mea wahine k*> lliaia Ototi raua ko Orfwa Ototi. Ko enei tamariki i nolio talii raua mo tctehi \\a roa, kihai rawa i poke, a i tino pumau to raua arolia ki a raua. Ko te mea taaue lie Elunga Tapu, a koia te liekerilari o te Kura llapati o te Peka o Moawhango. Ko le mea wahine no vvaho i te llalii. \a te Tumuaki o tc Mihana I'.uiii i marena, ara ua Tumuaki Iloani Tinikini. Tino pai taua uiarenatanga. Kii tonu te whare i te Pakeha i te Maori hold. I te taenga mai o te Tumuaki ki Moawhango i tino miharo ia, i tino koa hoki tona ngakau mo tona taenga ki te kainga i tae luataki mai ai ia i tona mihana tuatahi ara i te tau L906. I tenci pariha tonu ia e kauhau haere ana tae noa ki tona hokinga atti ki tona kainga tupu i te tau L910, ka hoki atu ia ki ona matua. I tona taenga mai i raua li> ona tau. Tino pai ona kupu whakaniaraina, tohutohu hoki ki te hunga i marciiatia. lleoi aim. kin ova te Hunga Tapu, ua to koutou teiiia i roto i te Rongo-pai. TE MAKO VVI1ARKMATIII1I. Ko te iMatenga o Tepora Kuril No te 4 o tiga ra o Mei, 1926, i mate to matou whaea, tipu- na, a Tepora Rum, i te Hohipera o Turunda. Tona rtiate, he numonia'pneum - ia), k >tah" .. '.: i takoto tiiroro ia i tona kai- Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE l6j nga i Uawa, ka iriauria Ltu ki tc Hohipera I Turanga i tc Ra- tapu, 2 o Mei, tona p >tiki e Ani Morete Watene, no te Tu- rei 4 o Mei, ka hemo. Haere e kui ki okiokinga. Na tona potiki me Lna mokcpuna me tona whanau. Ani VVatene Ko te T^kanga atu o te Rongopai Koia tenei ko tc mca lino whai tikanga i roto i to hunga c rapu ana i te matauranga ki nga whakahacrc a te Atua mo Ana akc mahi i niahia e la ki waenganui i roto i te ao nei; [vo tonei kaupapa kua hoha ki te Hunga Tapu. 1 te mea kua whi nga taniwha me nga pu whakaaro te hunga waho ki Tc Karoro. No roira ka tino ohorerc ratou ki tenoi. Ara tuatahi i taka atu te Rongo-pai ilui Karaiti me te maun tapu, i unit 11 ;:i tc malii tc Wairua Tapu i roto i nga tar. gat a, ajc 1 1 «*: : 1 main mcrekara, me nga mana uhakaora i nga turoro. 1 tc \va tonu i patupatua ai nga Apotoro me te llunga Tapu, koia tonu te \\a i tangohia ai tc mana te Atua i runga i te whonua tac noa ki te lau L823, katahi ano ka tohungia he tAngata c te Atua liei poropiti, hoi whakahacrc i tc kingitangn tc Karaiti ki runga ki te whenua, aie te whakahokinga mai i tc Rongo-pai kia kauwhautia ki te ao katoa i roto i enei ra muri nei. Ko tloliepa Mete taua poropiti, ko te Ilalii Ihu Karaiti taua liahi, koia c kiia aci he Ilalii Moromona. Kaati, kua kiia ake ra i tangohia te katoa te Rongo- pai, Le Diana mc era atu. K :iii:i to taonga niai «• to 1 i •. 11 . ri ru ui to ki igitani n i Lo li '| UpU, ' " 1 .* 1 r . 1 « • t : 1 " : ' I ' ' Lie nni nga karaipitttre   to Rongo-pai me te whakatunga i Tona kingitanga ki runga i to mata tc whcnua. Koi to tu tcnei kingitanga. 1 tiraata mai te tu L830, kci te tu Lnaianei i roto i to ao katoa. Koi tc Uunga r S"ii 1 > 1 1 nga Ra Muri Nei tc m. ma whakahacrc i tenci kingi- tanga i faro i nga tohutohu a tc Atua. Mo llohepa Mete, ae, koia tc matakitc whiriwhiri ma 1c Atua, he nica homai ki a ia Liga toliutohu mai i tc tan [823 tae n a ki tc taima i tino tu ai tc kingitanga, 1820, hacre tonu nga tohutohu a tc Atua ki tc Poropiti i tc alma ara i tc tauira tc whakahaere i tc kingitanga, ua tc poropiti ki tc llunga Tapu, mc tc whakawhiwhi i tc I lain ki nga mana nunui, me tc liomai i nga kii c tuwhera ai liga rangi ki tc whanau   [haraira mehemea ka ngohegnohe ki tc Rongo-pai b 11m Karaiti. E ki ana 1c Ariki : "Whakatakina nga tikanga nga karaipituro; c nica ana hoki koutou kei refra tc ora tonu mo koutou; ko enci hci kaiwhakaaiu moku." II 0:1 ni 5: 39. Koia i tika ai ma nga karaipiture c wliakaniarania he pono ranci c tae mai he anahera ki to kawc mai i totalii Rongo-pai mc te wliakatu i te kingitanga te Atua. mo te hangangn houtanga Eliruharama, me te whakapumautanga Eliona ki runga ki lenci vvhenua Amerika i enei i*a muri nci. Ac. ko tc kupu na [Iakaraia 2: 1.-5. "I ango akc anb oku kanoki, i litiro, na k  telahi tangata, lie aln ruri i tona ringa. Xa ka mea ahau, E haere ana koe ki heal A ka nica ia ki ahau, Ki te whanganga i Hiruharania, kia kiten ai tonn roa, tona vvhanui. Na ka hacre tc anahera i korero ra ki ahau, a ka puta ano tetahi anahera ki te whakatau i a ia. Na ka ki tcra ki ;i ia, Ltere atu, ki atu ki tc tamaiti nci. mea am, Ka nohoia a Eliruharama, ka rite ki nga pa taiepakorc, i tc tini tc tangata, nga kararehe i roto: A hci taicpa :ilii ahau, c ai t;i [howa, ki a ki ;t karapoi i,oa; hci kororio ano i roto 1 a ia." Ko tcnei poropititanga kua tutuki ki a Hohepa Mete, koia taua tamaiti i ki nci te anahera, "Hacre, mea atu ki te tamaiti nci ." Tekau ma tvha ana tail i tc wa i puta ai tc anaiiera ki a ia. i te tan L823. .Mai i taua tail ki tc 1S44 i puta tmn mai te Atua ki a ia ki te homai i nga vvhakahaunga mc ngo Mji 26, 1920 TK KAh'IRK 1 63 kawcnata rao to Langahanga Uimliarama kua kiia niai pa Hakaraia i tc upoko rac nga rarangi kr.a kiia akc ra, hoi \.h ikatutukitanga an i h '.:i tatou i ana huarahi; no le mca ka puta i.i .i tc turc i Qiona, aic tc kupu a Lhown i tliruharama. ' ' Kei Araciika tenei Wharc Tapu mc tc "iliona. me tc whaka- tapungj o Liiiiihai'aina c LJrata OiSon Hyde i a ia i runga i liaunga O.iwa. I tukua atu ana inoi ki te Atua kia whakatapua lliruharama lici hokinga atu mo nga Ilurai. Kua kiia akc ra i.a tc anahcra i kawc niai tc llongo-pai o te Karaiti ki a [iohcpa Aide. Ac, tirohia Whakakitcnga 14. (>. ''I kite ano alia.i i tralii atu analicra C rcre ana i wacnganui   tc rangi, kci a ia tc llongo-pai man tonu hci kauwhau manna ki le hungj   tc Pirimia. K ':i kupu a Ngata c pa nei ki uga mahi whakairo a tc Maori; Ac, ka tautoko tc Kawanatanga, ara kia mau tonu t ■ mohio ki ana tu mahi kci ngaro i nga ra c hckc mai nei. Kei tc koa ahau, moku i lac mai Id tenci hui, i rongo marama ai ahan i nga tikanga katca c pa ana ki a k >ut  u ki tc iwi Maori. Ka nui nga take kua marama mai i koutau kai-korcro, kaore i marama ki an i mua. No reira kci tc koa taku ngakau. Kei tc koa ano taku ngakau nio!:u ka kite, ka mohio hoki, kei tc tipu kouton tc Maori. "] mua akc nei ka puta nga korero, kci te heke haerc koutou tc iwi Maori. Otira naku lean i kite i tenci ra. kei tc he tana korero. "Mo tc korero wliakaiiohi :ic' i utra hoia Maori. Ivi taku Mei 26, 1926 TE KARfcRE I/" niohio I* tino waimaric tc korcnga c riro mai he ivhenua i a ratou. K;> 1 i take, i taua wa i te tino nui te vvariu   te tikanga tonu tea, ma te tino marama nga taitara ka taca ai te tukn lie moni ki tetahi tangata kia taea ai e ia tc wliaka- raahi tona \vl:enua. Engari, ki tc t atari tatou kia marama nga taitara, tera tatou c laia.i mo nga tan L5. Kati, he roa rawa teuei. llcoi, uu matoii c whakamatau tetahi tikanga kia vvawc tc put a he l.ioni ki nga mea koutou c ngakau nui ana ki te aim whenua. 10 kore c taea te whanga kia marama rawa nga taitara. Ka popokehu tonn i roto i tera alma raruraru, kore akc he painga ki a koutou. N'a reira, waiho ma matou e rapu he tikanga awliina i a koutou, ahakoa ra kore noa e marama te takoto nga taitara. E rua nga tari whakaputa moni, ho to tc Kai Tiaki Maori, mc te "Advances to Settlers Depart incut. " "Kii nga l.ialii whakatopu i nga paanga ka whakalu >ho- rotia. '}] > te taha l:i "c la! i:a moni mo nga kura Maori, te.*a tetahi moni £30,000. Kua tonoa mai c Ngata ma kia wchia tera hei tahua m  nga kura. Kati, te £15,000 kua wehca mo Liingj i tera take. lOngari, kci tc mohio noa atu an. kaorc c rod ka tonoa mai 1   te matau- raii"- ' - kiia in i lie Secondary Education. " I ; .'.u.iui, ka kite an ko tc whakaaru kci tera T.-.i c ;■ "Kaua rawa he rori v mahia ma runga i nga, ^henua M. ■ K  Katarana. Ka korero nga Llungu Tapu i nga whakaaturanga   nga ■ a muii nei. Katahi tc Wairua Tapu ka whakaatu ki a ratou uranga a nj a matua he pono. E ki na .1 anga hold tana, In i apiti I : ' I i : ' | 1 1 a ia e fcai-tamariki ana ka tukua La i runga i te uiihana ki Pen  te iiuinga tana taima i wliakapaua ki i a mo tc kore s a i te R >ngo 1 ai, kia mohio ai ia ki tona t ika, otira he m . ko tana mca pai he tuhi- tuhi ia i roto i te kari ■ t llku 1 lg»l. I I ■ ■ ; a te - v 1 iki i la  u ki to a!iua tc kanolii tc Arild. ll ai i a ia, ka awhi i a ia. Mc *c mca nci ko to Ariki tonu, i ronyn hoki ia i tc maliana Tona unia, a ka mca atu tc Ariki ki a ia, "Kao;v c taku tania. kua oti cnei ta ratou mahi, ka liacrO mai ratou i a! a::. Ko koc, mc nolio ki tc wliakaoti i tan naht." lie ahakoa man tonu a Witini ki tc Ariki, ka i:i atu ki a la. "\a mc oati Koc ka liacrc atu au ki a Koc i mr.ri nci." A ka mencnicnc ki tc kata, ka ata mea atu ki a ia. "Ko tenn, kei a koc tonu." Katalii ia ka olio akc me tc hotuhotu, ko If ata to:in. 1 tana olionga akc ka korcro ia ki tona hoa, ka mca i ]>u mai i t;' Atua. Ka whakahokia e Witini. "Kaorc c tika kia korcrotia mai tona ki a an. kci tc tino moliio aliau." Kiliai i.. i whakaaro v- apotoro ia a roto i nga ra, engari 1 Mei 26, 1926 TE KAKERK 171 mohio ia ko ia te apotoro hinamoe, i te 1110c lioki ia i a ia i tana malii. Mai ano i taua rangi ka timatn tona kaha ki tc ako i tc Karaipiturc, 1:1c tana tuhitulii ano hold mo tc nupepa, cnga.i hi tc; nuinga nga korero c aim ana ki Dga Karaipiturc. Taro akc kua tika ia kia whiwhi i tc Wairua Tapu, a put a mai ana ki a ia tc wliakaatu ko tc mocmco i puta atn ra ki a ia i aim mai i tc Ai ua. Kaoi'c tatou katoa c whiwhi mocmoca pai pai pcra i la Witini, engari mclicinea ka iaal.i tatou i a tatou main tc llahi i tiinga i tc wliakapono, e whiwhi lioki tatou i tc Wairua r i'apu, lici wliakaatu ki a tatou lie pono tc Karaipiturc mi ko tc Karaiti h ■ Tama na tc Atua. LIcoi ko te ara anakc i wliiwhi ai tatou i Ana manaakitanga mc malii tatou kia whiwhi ai. NA TE NGOl KA He Ripoata no te M.A.C. Ko tetalii men whakamiharo mc tc tauhou i maliia i tc Karoti i tc M.A.C. nei i a Maelic 7. L926. Ko taua mca ko tc whaka- tura:i;.: i nga Korama Rikona tuatahi ki tenei mihana ki \iu Ti;*c:ii. I whaknturia te nei mca i raro i tc whakahacrcnga a 1 11... mil- 1 1 1111k 'ii mi- i 2 I 11 111 nasi tc Karri 1 1 I i at a EIcci 1 Kc te Korama Rikona Tuatahi Koia enci ko nga ingoa nga me in a mc nga apiha 1 korama 1 ropu 1 e rua. Tc mea 1 uatahi ko  ."ll:iu(l. Dan Sou'.hon, Joe Hapi, Kcrcsoma Isaia, John O.'msby, Rieliard Watcnc, Mita Wateac, me Dave Thompson. Ko n,".\ 1 tamariki o enci ropu he tino lamr.riki whakaar ) nui 1:1 o rain", karangatanga, me te wliakaaro hoki he mea tin > Klu nui enci karangatanga. Km te whakaritc raton i o rat on karangatanga kia tino rite. Teia nga painga maha ka ri:.' i te mi ropu, ko tc mea tuatalii hold tend o tona litcnga i tenci mihaua. \a Tiata Witehira i whakamaori. \a IIOR1 IIKXIHANA. 7A TE ETITA. Ripoata Hui Tau Ivia pa 'a re ake n ?i to tatou Hui Tail o tc t.u 1926, cngc- ri ka maharatia tenei hi i roto i o tato 1 ngakau mo nga tau maha e tak >to mai nei. Kna whakapumautia tenei lake i ro- to i o tato 1 ngakau e n >;a mahi o t -w-' h r, ara kci te wa kc tatou inaiansi. Nui at 1 te pai o te wa e takoto mai nei i to tera i h >ri akc. Nui ntu te pai mc tc koa kci roto i tenei wa e 111 mai iul mo n.»;a mea tatjj e w'aakaae nei kia mahi i Mei 26, 1Q2j TE KARERE n#a mahi kua whakatakotoria nei c to tatoj Ariki hei mahi ma tatou. Ko te mahi nui o to tatou kai whakahaere hou a 'I umuaki Tinikini hei whakakaha i te Tohungatanga me te whakatikatika i Qga whakaiitenga me nga ropu o te hahi kia tika te whakaiitenga. kua mahia enei mahi i mua, engari i whakapaua te talma o nga kaumatua ki te kauwhau ripenata ki nga mea kua oti noa atu te iriiri. He aha te take? He ngo- ikoretanga no nga Hunga Tapu. Inaianei kua whakamatau- tauria te Hahi, kua taka atu te nuinga o nga] mea ngoikore o tatou nui atu to tatcu kaha inaianei 1 era atu v. a. Kei te taka- tu tatou kia piki ake te mahi. Ki te whakaaro o nga mea i tec, nui atu te pai o tenei Hui Tau i era atu Hui Tau i tu ki tenei motu ki Niu Tireni nei. Tuatahi ko te pai o te rahgi tae noa ki te whakanv tu- nga o te hui. Tuarua ko te pai o te u hakahaeretanga te marae, tc pai o te kai, te pai o nga teneti moe, te korenga o tenei mea o te liaurangi me era atu tu hianga. Tuatoru, te mea whakamulunga me te mea tino nui hoki ko te wairua pai o nga huihuinga me nga mea whakamiharo i rangona nei e tat m. Ko nga huihuinga i raro i te whakahaerctanga a Tumu- aki Hoani I ii ikini, a i tu ki roto i te hobro hou i hangaia e te Hahi ki Nuhaka. 1 tu te huihuinga tuatahi te Hui Tau ; te 10 a.m. o te Paraire te 2 o nga ra Aperira, a man tonu ana ic wairua tae nca ki tc huihuinga whakamutunga i te ahiahi o tc Ratapu. Ko te kupu kai | | nei hi i i katak -toila nei e Tumuaki 1 inikini, "Me tu koutou i runga i nga t ranga t. pu." Tangi ana tenei kupu i roto o nga kau- whai tanga katoa   tc hi i. I in.;', ia e tc komiti mo it- Temapara tetahi putihana ki te Tumuakitanga luatahi kia whakaaetia te kohi moni hei ha- nga 1 emepara K 1 Niu 1 ireni nei. 1 hainatia tenei putihana e nga I li nga I . pti a tuku; . tu ana ki te fa I ote ki a 1 umuaki Karan; ta. I«; rua nga  mai e, me . ■ . ■ , i . • 1 1 n . K 4l I 11 rakau i tc w kei te mohio tatou te Hunga fapu kaore e roa ka tutaki ano tatou ki   tatou hoa an >ha i i"i>- 1 t  tc I Lui I au u i«) 7 1 to I 1/4 1fc kAKERE Mci . ( , i« .0 HE MIIII. Tera tctahi whakaaro whanni, marama, kua Idtca c te Illita i waenganui o nga kai-tango o Te Karcrc. Ko tetalii o nga llunga Tapu o Ngapuhi, ka nui tona hihiko hi te kauwhau i tenei Rongo-pai ki tc hunga   waho. \a i runga i tona hiahia kia rongo ti 1 iwi Maori kat-oa ki nga tikanga nir.iui o tenei \vhakaponr>, i runga ano i tona kore e ahci tc haere ki nga wain tawhiti o tona kainga, ka whakaaro ia inc ntu e ia he Kare/e ma etahi rangatira o era. atu hahi, i.:a tc pepa c tuku atu ana kupii kauwhau ki a ratou. lie tauira pai tenei ma tatou ma J .o hunga katoa c hiahia ana kia piki haere tc ma hi a tc Ariki i tenei svalii o Tona maara waina. I'] \\ Iv.kamihi ana Tc Karere ki tona rangatira ki a Ngapuki ftenata mo tonoi niahi pai ana. 'via ora koc c Xgapuhl, kia l:a!.a ki ton inahi pai. E Ono ng* Tzke mo te Whakatekau ric men tnngohia mai i tc improvement Era, April, 192C, ua Qi Bunker, i tuhi, n:i ngn cita i whakaritc ki tc reo Maori. 1 Pita '■': 15. "Engari whnkatapua tc Ariki, to Atua, I roto i n koutou ngakau: kia rite tonu hoki te kupu i a koutou i nga wa katoa, hoi whakahokinga atu ma koutou i nga tan gat a katoa o ui ana ki a kontou ki tc mea e tumanakohia atu noi c koutou; ki.i mahaki ano ia to ngakau, kia wchi." Pubake Tuatahi: K utu whakatckau ana aliau, a e hiahia ano hoki toku wairau ki te herein. Tuatahi : hei utu i aku nam a. Tuarua: hei hoko kni. kahu, me tc utu i te kura mo toku whanau. Tuatoru: he mea c alici ai aliau tc kohi i nga whakapapa o okn tupuna, me te inahi whakaora hoki i ;i ratou. Maraki 3: 10 "Maun katoatia tc whakatckau ki roto ki te ton, kia wliai kai ai toku wliaro. wailio hoki tonci hci whakainatautan moku. o ai ta [howa p oga mano, mc kahorc o tuwhera i ahau nga matapihi o to rangi ki a koutou, n ka ringitin he mauaaki ki :i koutou, a kia kore ra ano he takotorauga. " Mei 26, T926 TE KARERE ITS Putake Tuarua: E utu whakatckau ana a ban he mca U i n whai li«>.-i ,-ii all an i roto i toku malii. Tuatahi: c korc c taea e au tc main ko au anakc. Tuarua: e whakapono ana ahau Id tc kotahitanga   nga vvhakaaro nga hoa malii, a e korc e taea e au 1*' mahi ki tc korc e pera. M.-imki 3: 11 Ka riria te kaiwhakapnreho, kei he i Q ia nga hua   t  tona, k  te hunga katoa koa (•ti te whakatckau mo utu ia tau, ia tau i tc wahi whakatckau  rc i pono ta koutou mahi ki tc tuonga ho, ■ i;i wai o tuku ki u koutou to Uionga | .'" Maraki 3: 8. " !•: tahac ranoi te tangata i ta tc Atual Heoi kua tahnctia taku o koutou. A   .:>. "Me tenei ano, he p. .no taku mea aiu mi ki q koutoiij kei Ic pupuri te whouua i te li.ro o to kiLgi»ai:g:i " Tikitiki-o-Rangi (Cclcsdal Kingdom), ina hoki kei te rite loan i 11 ia to mchua tona hangangn, a kali, re c takaki i tc ture." Ako. me aga Kawe. 119-0. "Ko taku kr.pu tenei ki a k on ton, ki tc kahoro tokn iwi e pupnri i tenei tare (te whakatckau), c whakatapii ia\\a ranei i taua turc, nia konci hoki ka meinga ai tenei wlienna, hoi Hi. ma ki an, hei tauilga iho 1110 aku tare me aku u liaka wak:. n^a, lie una e lino tapu rawa ai, nana, ho pono taku e mea uei ki a koutou, e k  ta te Rente pukapuka o te ora. VVhakakitenga 21: 27. "E kore ano e tomo ki rotm te.alii mea whakanoa, e malii ana ranei i te mea w lia ka rihariiia, i te teka ranei: ko tc hunga anakc kua o.i te tuhituhi ki to to Rome puknpuha o tc ora." Ako. me ne;a Kav.o. N.~>: 5. "Kia kore ano hoki C kiloa lalou ingoa, aga iugoa ranei o aga aiatua, nga ingoa ranei o nga tamariki e tuhituhi iho i roto i tc pukf.puka o Lo tare o Le Aum. c ai ta te Ariki o nga Mmiio." Ako. me nga Kiawc. 85: !'. "A, ko ratou katoa kali, re nci o ki.cn ki roto i te pukapuka o tc whnkamaharatanga, c koio e whlwhi ki te v alii tap i i tana ra, Engari ka patua ratou ki tvacuga, ka whiwhi n",ata- lii'.ia a rat  taku iwi; no tc mea ko ia e vvliakatekauria ana  7, M58, tin Hohepa 1". Mete Apatoro i tnlii. na Eru T. Kupa i whakamaori. TE MATE PIHAREINGA. Kua whakaiiHitiiniiitu kc tc raumati ka tac nga Paconia ki I *t a i tc tan 1847, he tino iii lioki nga luia i puta mai roto i ;i ratou kai i tanu ;ii. hcoi ano ko ctahi purapura tacwa mania 11 i. Kci tc tumanako ratou ki nga ngakinga   tc tau L849 lici ivliakaora i a ratou i tc matc-kai. H torn nga inirn kani rakau i vvliakaturia c ratou, kotalii tc inira kauoro kanga, witi, nic era atu kai pcra. Ko tc nui   tc walii i maliia c ratou hci niaara kai c rinia mano kotahi ran c torn tckau ma torn cka, c \\\ ;i rati o ana cka i tiria ki tc v ii i. I tc mea kua  .|>n kino. I !• 1 iiri 1 piharcii ilio i iiga 1.1I1.1 tuaunga ki iiga rao ao ano lie tana tino nui c tvliakatutu ana ki Ic kokiri, na ka tahuri « n. i inaara kai Ka pan l« na \. aiii \..\a 111 k. ki I. -J .1 1 ■ i al .1. I/,; TK KARERK Mei 26 i 26 rawa hoki c roa kua mootii, kua rito ki lc koraha titohca. K ora ai tc iwi i tc mate-kai, me inahi ra ano tetahi tikanga hci vvhaka:autu i ta ratou pakanga. Ka o!:o ako te iwi katoa, k.i uru atu ki tenoi whawhai rerekc tc tangata ki tc ugarara. Ka karia e ratou he awa karapoti i nga maara, ka tukua atu lie wai ki roto hci pupu/i atu i nga ugarara, otira kore rawa i taca. Pera ano ki tc alii koi'o rawa i noho atu. I whakama- tauria ano ki tc arai atu ruo hauliau ki tc rakau, ki Lc pumma, me era atu patu pcuci, otira ahakoa he alia tc aliua karo c v\ hakaarongia ana e tc tangata hci arai atu, kore rawa he alia. Kore rawa he painga tc iwi kainga ki nga ugarara nei. TE LIEREKARA NGA KARORO. I te mca c pan katoa nga kai, kua tau mai lie pouri nui ki nga LIunga Tapu, otira i taua wa ano ka tirohia atu pango tonu te rangi i te karoro, ka rcre mai ki runga akc i nga maara tangitangi hacrc ai. Kua wbakaaro ettihi ratou he pakanga ke ano tenci, tera hoki e vvliakapana c nga karoro nga toenga mai a nga piliarcinga, otira kaore i pera. Kaorc e taca tc kautc nga rupu karoro i whakatau iho, a ka tiinata lc kai i r.ga piliarcinga, ka pakanga hoki ko nga karoro ki nga piliarcinga, kia ora ai nga kai. Ka kai ana tc karoro kin ta; 1 ra ano lei tc korokoro tc ki, ka rcre atu ai ki nga awaawa inn wai ai, katalii ka ruaki mai ai ki waho, ka hoki ano ki lc pakanga. lie penci tonu tc mahi i a i:\ ra tac noa Id te pannga o nga piliarcinga. Ka wliakawhctai tc iwi i konci, no tc mca he inci'ekara tenci ki a ratou. Ac ra. tino arolia tc Ariki ki a ratou, a ka tukua mai nga karoro ano lie anahcra aroha, hci whakaora hoki i a ratou. Mai ano i taua wa tac mai ki naianci c rite ana he maun tapu te karoro ki nga Hunga Tapu nga Ka o Muri Nei, lie manu whakaora hoki. He mca paahi hoki he tui'e hci tiaki i enci manu, ki te patu kari noa tc tangata ka eke he lino lie nui ki runga ki a ia. I tc L3 o nga ra Hepctcma i te tau 101,'), lie Pohatu Whakamaharatanga mo tenci i hurahia ki te Pa Tote. Ko tenci pohatu e karangatia ana ko tc Pohatu Whakamaharatanga Karoro, na Mahonorai AT. laanga i hanga, lie mokopuna hoki ia na Pirikamu laanga. Mei 26, 1926 T£ KARERE ^_____ Ki nga Kai-Kauwiiau te Pei Whairangi Ki Te Karere: Mau e panui atu tenei panuitanga ki nga kai-kauwhau katoa o te Pei Whairangi. I te mea kua kore he hui takiwa mo tatou i roto i enei marama e toru, me haere ano koutou i roto i enei rnarama e toru e tu mai nei ki nga wahi i whakaritea mo koutou i tera kuata, kia tino pai ake nga ripoata mo to tatou hui ka tu nei i a Akuhata. Na to koutou teina, R. R. Stevenson Tumuaki Pariha E "He rangi tc ao k a u h i a t he huruhuru te inanu ka rere." / Mei 26, 1926 TE KARERE NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto aim kei te tari o te Miliaria hei lo- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mca e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather no Book of Mormon, Cloth 26 & 7-6 " " " , Half Leather 90 " " " .Leather 10-0 & 150 Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0 " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MA02I BOOKS AND TRACTS Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 20 " " , Leather 30 Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 " " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in I II-6 " " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0 " " , Leather 15-0 Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-J " " " " " " ", Leather 15 Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer I S JNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0 What Jesus Taught 50 Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 3-6 Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6 SONG BOOKS Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 " " " .Leather 6 6 Dese ret Song Books, Cloth 30 " " " , Leather 6 6 Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3 Vitality of Mormonism 4-6 Sc'entific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson 6-0 Restoration of the Gospel, IV idlsoe 40 Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6 Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6 Tp^us the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9 Bible Ready Reference 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 6-0 KO J H. VINIK1NI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI .1. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. P- I^ariftp WuhMiga XX. o o o — o Thine 23, 1926. -O- O O—O - Nama VI O O O I I'o le Ngsherc Ttpu "V\ te hrpa telahi o koutou i te ma- 11 tauranga, me inoi ia ki ie Atua f e homai pui nei ki te katoa, kahore hoki ana tawai mai ; a ka homai ki a ia." Hemi 1 : 5. o o u o o O- -o — o 00 — 00 00- "C& KflRSRS" WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO Wha rangi. Kl TE ETITA He Manaakitanga 207 He Ripoata Hui Tau 198 He Ripoata mo te Rao nga Whaea Note Kirikiri 203 No Korongata 205 No te Mahia 204 He Ripoata no Korongata Ko te Matenga o Koro Waerea 206 "Ma nga Hua ka Mohiotia ai" 206 Mo te Ra o nga \\ haea 205 KO NCA RONCO KORERO Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona roj KO NCA TUHINCA MAI E Mahi ana Tatou mo te Aha? 2(k) He W'hak'aahua Pai 200 Ko nga Mahi a te Kura Hapati hei 1'ainga ma Tatou 2 r V MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 194 MAHI KURA HAPATI Concert Recitation 180 Intermediate Department 187 Korero a Ngakau 180 Kindergarten Department 100 Maori Theological 1 80 Pakeha Theological 183 Postlude 179 Prelude 179 Sacrament Gem 179 Kaww WAHA.JGA 20 WErtErfEl, HUNE 23. 1926. NAMA 6 Maori Agricultural ColUge Hastings, H. B. E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o ISiu Tireni, Hani o ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri JNei. Tukua mai o kcutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings. Ko te utu mo TE KAItEEE i te tau e rima hercni (5/-). KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. file matua utu mo tou pepa ka whiwhi ai. /. H. Timkini, Tnmuaki Mihana Mariana K. Ewatana, htita. Tiata Witdiua, hiita Hoa Awliina. Ko te Kai-R.poata Te Tuati Mc/ia Ko uga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). Wiremu A. Koura i.ru T. kupa MAHI KURA HAPATI. Prelude. After Cowex. *E4z 2S 3s=mmm t—$r ■+■*■ ~. +- + UliltiHi SACRAMENT GEM FOR JULY, 1926 "In memory oi' the broken flesh We eat the broken bread ; And witness with the cup afresh, Our faith in Christ, our Head." Postlude. 1 !•: k VRERE Hune 23, 1920 tONCERT RECITATION IOK JILY, 1926. (Luke, Pourlli Chapter, Fourth Verse.) i Jesus answered him, saying, [1 is written, That shall hot live by bread alone, but by every word of God." K0RERQ A NGAKAU MO HURAE, 1920. I aRuka, 4: 4. "Na ka whakahoki a Diu ki a ia, ka men. Kua oil te tuhituhi, B kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, engari i nga kupu katoa a te Atua." MAORI THEOLOGICAL. Ratapu tuatalii, Hurae 4, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-FUKTJ. Na li^ia W. V/iLshira i vvliakamaori. Putakc: Ko nga whakahauhjiu a te tauira i whikatako- toi ia nei e [h-u hei main \ i a tatou. TA HAT ANA WHAEAMATAUTAU&ANGA I A IUJ. He iti rawa atu te korcro mo tenei whakamatautauranga 1 atald engari kei roto ia tetal.i whakaaturanga tino nui ki a tatoii. Ko te kai-whakamatautau ko taua Rutiwha ra ano ko te xama a tc Ata nana nei i aralii letalii wahi nga mano te llangi, i arahi ke. Koia auo hoki te mea i whakaiaatautau nei i a I \v i i roto i te Kari Erene, me te mea i hanga mi i to kohurutanga Kaina. Nana hoki a Rawiri te mea k:.li 1 i ai, nana hoki a Horomona te mea matau i whakapoke, nana hoki a ilopa te mea tika i whakahe ki te aroaro te Atua. Ka haere tonu a Hatana ka malii i ana whakamatautauranga i nga Ilunga Tapu me nga hunga katoa hoki e aroha ana ki te Atua. 1 whakaara pakanga a 1 hit ana ko tc take i hiahia ia kia meinga hei kingi hei tu i te turanga te. Atua. Kei te hiahia. tonu ia hei kingi ia a kei te mahi tonu ia i nga wa katoa ki te whakaniate i te kaha te Atua. lie mea tino matau ia a he nui nga wa e ta  nga tUFC a Mohi he mea wehe ke na te Karaiti. Matin 5: 17; Karatia 3: 24-26. II. Ko te tautohetohenga — nga kotinga ki nga kotinga-kore. (a) Ko te kotinga me te whakaoranga. Mahi 15: 1. (b) Ko te runanga i Eiruharania. Mahi 15: 2-5. (c) Ko te karonga a Pita i nga tauiwi nga kotinga-kore. Mahi ir ): 7-11. (d) Ko te tohutohu.'ki nga tauiwi. Mahi 15: 19-29. Ratapu tuatoru, Hurae 18, 19_6 AKORANGA 18, Ko te Haerenga Tuarua Paora i te Mihana. Te wehenga Paora raua ko Panapa. (a) Ko to raua liiahia lie torotoro i nga hahi. 15: 2G, (b) Ko te lake te tautohe. Mahi 15: 37-39; 13: 13. (c) Ko te haerenga Panapa raua ko .Iloani Maka ki Kaiperu. .Mahi 15: 39. 1. Ko te wahi i whanau ai a Panapa. Mahi 4: 36. 2. Ko te piringa nga Karaitiana tera takiwa. Mahi 11 : 19-20. (d) A Paora raua ko I lira i Iliria i Kirikia. Mahi 15:41 ; 15: 23. I Rerepe, i Raihitara, Raikonia. (a) Te tutakitanga Paora ki a Timoti. Mahi 16: 1. (b) Ko te kotinga Timoti. Main 16: 3; I. Koriniti 9: 20. (c) Ko nga whakahaunga a te Rununga Hiruharama ki nga Tauiwi ; Mahi 16: 4-5. d ) K'o te whakakitenga ki a Paora mo Makeronia. Mahi Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 183 16: 0-10. Ratapu tuawha, Hurae ?5, 1926 AKORANGA 19. Ko te Haerenga Tuarua Paora i te Mihana. Te roanga atu. . T. A Paora me ana hoa i Makeronia. (a) I Piripi i te pa nui, Mahi 16 : 32. (b) Ko te whakatahuritanga me te iriiringa o Riria me tona whare katoa. Mahi 16 : 14-15. (c) Ko te peinga te wairua kino e te mana te Tohu- ngatanga. Mahi 16 : 16-18. (d) Ko te patunga o Paora raua ko Hira me te makanga ki te whare herehere. Mahi 16 : 22-24 ; II. Koriniti 11 : 23-27; Whakaritea ki a Mohia 17: 12-20. (c) Ko to raua putanga i te whare herehere. Mahi 16: 25-26 ; Whakaritea ki a Arami 14 : 25-29. II. Ko te whakatahuritanga o te kai-tiaki herehere Piripi. (a) Ko tana whakamatakutanga me nga whakahoki kupu a Paora. Mahi 16 : 27-31. (b) Kaore e nui te whakapono anake, engari me iriiri. Mahi 16: 32-33; Korerotia te upoko 30 Niwhai Tuarua. (c) Te matakutanga nga kai-whakawa, no te mea he tangata a Paora raua ko lliria no te pa Roma. Mahi 16: 37-40. PAKHH4 THHOLOGICAL "GRKAT BIBLICAL CHARACTHRS" First Sunday, July 4, 1926. Uniform Fast Day Lesson The example of Jesus: what il bids us do. .Jesus Tempted. This firsi temptation, ;is reported by Matthew (4:3, l i immediately following His forty days' fast, and while He was still in the wilderness, does not occupy much space, and yet contains n message  f the Morning" T! K. A KKKK Himc 23, I926 Lucifer— who led away one-third of tlic hosts of heaven; who led Eve in the Garden of Eden; who made Cain a murderer. As Papini says: "He suborned David the strong, corrupted Solomon the wise, accused Job the righteous before the throne of God. And Satan tempts and always will tempt ail tlie Saints, all those who love God." He has never abandoned the determination to rule, that was behind his rebellion, nor is he yet ready to admit defeat, but is always on the watch to tempt and destroy by use of all the wiles of the most subtle of all intellects. Out- weak points are his vantage places of attack, nor does he retire so Long as we permit him to remain. Subtlety is shown in the time chosen for this temptation, when Jesus was alone and weakened through the long fast. "Satan had chosen the most propitious time tor his evil purpose. YYhai will mortals not do, to what lengths have men no, gone, .11 assuage the pangs of hunger? Esau bartered h s birthri{ hi for a meal. Men have fought like brutes tor food. All this Satan knew when he came to Christ in the hour of extreme physical need, and said unto Him: 'If thou be the Son of God, command these stones 1o be made bread'/' (Tahnage.) in putting it in this way there was a double appeal to the human — the challenge of the "It"' and to extreme hunger. If we turn our thoughts inward for self-examination, we cannot fail to recognise the power of temptation, and that we, too, are subject to similar ones. As mcmbeis '>f God's Church it is our duty to offer private and family prayers morning and nighl ; to observe, for instance, this day by lasting; to pay an honest tithing even though we seem to be deprived of luxuries long desired'; to attend Sunday School or Pr : oathood meetings requiring our arising earlier than our desires indicated ; to attend Sacramenl meetings instead of taking an automobile ride. Je as answered Satan, saying: " It is written, man shall noi liv . Sold the people corn tor land. 4. At the end of tin 1 famine the king held .ill moneys, Hocks and land. 5. He rented back tin 4 (locks and hind ;ii a good rental and made everybody happy. 1 86 TE KARERE Ilnne 23. 1926 Questions for TeacLeis. 1. Djcs religion add to the power of statesmanship* Tliustraie. 2. Name:; three points upon which .Joseph demonstrated great strength of character, and explain why. Third Sunday, July 18, 1926 LESSON 16. JOSEPH AS SON, BROTHER AND FATHER. Txt: Genesis, chapters 42-50. Objective: To show how love and faith in God lifts man above littleness and sin. I. The famine required Joseph's brothers to go to Egypt. 1. They come to him for food. 2. Joseph's temptation to punish them for revenge because of their earlier treatment of him. 3. He overcomes the temptation and as a servant of God arises above himself as Prime Minister. II. He receives his father with great affection. 1. His kindness to him evidence of his respect for him. 2. He took Jacob's body back to the promised land for burial. III. His sons, Ephraim and Manasseh. In spite of environment and a pagan mother, lie rear's them in a knowledge of and faith in God. Questions fcr Teachers. 1. Is marriage outside one's own religious belief condusive of right living and happiness? (Jive reasons. 2. Give five reasons why Joseph was a great leader and why we consider him as an ideal. Fourth Sunday, .lu'y 25. 1026 LESSON 17. MOSES' BIRTH— EARLY MANHOOD. .Text: Exodus, Chapter 1-4. Objective: God is mindful of His leaders and trains them long and well for really good service. I. The birth and boyhood of Moses. 1. Conditions in Egypt. Hune 23, 1920 TE KARERE 1 87 2. Time — latter part of 16th century, or the beginning of the 15th century, B.C. 0. Israel increasing alarmingly. 4. The order to kill Israel's babies. 5. Moses saved by daughter of Pharaoh. II. The training and education of Moses. 1. In the palace of the Pharaoh. 2. As leader in his armies. 3. An associate in his wise men. II. J\ loses driven to Midian. 1. He killed an Egyption task master. 2. He fled to Midian. 3. In Midian in training for forty years. 4. Supposed to have written Genesis there. Questions for Teachers. 1. What two incidents in the early life of Moses impress you most and why? 2. What was the effect upon Moses of living so long in Midian? Compare with the preparation required of latter-day leaders. INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT "THE BOOK OF MORMON" First Sunday, July 4, 1926 Uniform Fast Day Lesson Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 183 Teachers, as they study carefully the suggestive outline will find a wealth of material out of which to construct an interesting lesson. All boys and girls in our department know the call of hunger. When they come home from school, they are "starving,'' al- though they have eaten lunch only a few hours before. They Can realise the force of this temptation. The lessons they can draw are numerous. They can Forego food on Fast Day to strengthen their own character and to give to the needy. They can forego seeming pleasures during the week in ov(\i>\- to bc ] more efficient in school work. 1 88 TE KARERI£ Hune 23, 1926 Physic;'.! well-being upon physical properties taken into our bodies. Abstinence from harmful, or excessive amounts 01* unharml'ul foods, conducts to greater physical strength, Boys and girls, Like Jesus, are tested also in being asked to risk their safety or to break away from their ideals or from parental counsel for pleasure or tor power. This lesson offers an excellent opportunity to discuss the everyday temptations that interfere with living up to the Gospel. Have pupils indicate what these problems are and then lead them in a discussion of l!,om - I. Second Sunday, July 1 I, 1926. Lesson 15. Enemies of the Church and of the Nation. Text : Alma, Chapters 1 to 3. Objective: To teach that "every man receive! h wages of him whom he Jisteth to obey." (Alma 3:27.) Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation. 1. The teacher might briefly state the facts concerning change in government, as related in Mosiah, 29th Chap. 2. Special assignments: a. Nehor slays (Jideon. (Alma 1:1-15.) b. Peace in the Church. (Alma 1:16-31.) c. An election held. (Alma 2:1-9.) d. Victory through faith. (Alma 2:10-20.) e. Amlicites and Lamanites combine. (Alma 2 :21-38.) f. The curse of the Amlicites. (Alma 3:1-19.) g. Another victory. (Alma 8:20-27.) 3. Passages to memorise: Alma 1:25, 29, 30 Alma 2:19. Ques! on for Teachers. 1. What strong points stand out in the life of Gideon? 2. Mention the blessings that came to Alma and his people when serving the Lord. 3. Contrast the condition of those drawn away by Amlici. Third Sunday, Jily IS, 1926. LESSON Hi. MISSIONARY EXPERIENCES OF ALMA AND AMULEK. Text: Alma 9th to 15th chapters. Huie 23, 1926 TE KARFRE 189 Objective: To teach that those who serve the Lord even while passing through afflictions are sustained by the Spirit of the Lord. Supplementary References: Acts 12:1-19; 10:13-34; Latter- day missionary experiences. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Chapters 9 to 13 should be carefully read by the teacher, and briefly discussed in the class. Special assignments should be made to pupils of passages to be read or memorized by them, such as Alma 9:26-28; 11-21-40; 13:21-26. 2. Story of imprisonment of Alma and Amulek for special assignment. Alma 14th chapter. 3. Conversion of Zeczrom. Alma 15:1-12. A. Alma and Amulek return to Zarahemla. Alma 15: 13-18. In making special assignments to pupils, teachers should wisely choose those who can take longer parts, while the more timid pupil may be assigned a short part. Always make assign- ment in writing. Questions fcr Teachers. 1. Mention some of the characteristics oc Amulek that would class him as a true servant of the Lord. 2. Discuss the tw T o visits of the same angel to Alma and the progress Alma had made between these visits. 3. Relate briefly a missionary experience similar to some that Alma and Amulek had. Fourth Sundry, July 25, 1926 LESSON 17. ALMA AS MISSIONARY. Text : Alum chapters 4 to 8. Objective: To teach that in giving unselfish service one can rejoice even in the midst of trials. Suggestions on Preparations and Presentation: 1. General assignment of text for home reading. 2. The teacher should give briefly to the class the in- structions given by Alma (Alma 5th, 6th and 71 h chapters.) a. Ask one pupil to memorize and recite Alma 5:46-51, and another to recite Alma 7:7-13. IQO TIC KARERK Hune 23, 1^26 1). Experiences of Alma in Ammoniliah. (Alma 8:6-32.) e. Opposition of the wicked. (Aima !):1-12.) Passages to be memorized: Aima 7:23-24. Questions for Teachers. 1. .Mention striking points in Alma's testimony of the di- mity of Christ. 2. AY hat trails in Aima mark him as a great missionary? KINDERGARTEN DKPARTMHNT First Sanday, July 4, 1926. Uniform Fast Day Lesson. Subject: The Temptation of Christ. — "Man shall not live by bread alone but by every word that proceeded from the mouth of God."— Matt. 4:4. Text: Luke 4:1-8. Objective: Prayer and purity are essential conditions in preparing for membership in the Church of Christ. Approach: I. Christ in the Wilderness. . 1. lie goes to prepare for His ministry. a. Through prayer. b. Through fastings. 2. lie becomes an hungered. The hour of danger. II. Christ Tempted by Satan. 1. Jlis appeal to the appetite (an incentive alluring.) a. ''If thou be the Son of God command that these si ones be made bread." These stones shaped like loaves. 2. Christ's Reply. a. "Man shall not live by bread alone, but by exevy word that proceedeth out of the mouth of Cod.'' b. The reply made possible as a result. (1) Constant prayer. (2) Purity j*i. thought and action. III. Christ's First Victory, 1. He gains power over evil. a. Through self-renunciation. b. When Satan turns to a new plan of appeal. Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 191 2. He becomes one step nearer in being prepared for His ministry. 3. He sets a powerful example for others. Application: Every one of us must get ready to help our Heavenly Father. What do we do every night when we go to bed, and every morning when we get up, that keeps us near to our Father in Heaven? When we are angry and naughty, words want to come into our mouth. What shall we try to do? Second Sunday, July 1 1, 1926 Topic : ' ' Father 's Day. ' ' Text: Ex. 20:12; Deu. 5:16; Luke 2:51; Proverbs 1:8, 15:5 23 :22. References: Juvenile Instructor, May, 1919, pp. 240-243, very good material; April, 1919, p. 452; March, 1921, p. 155, extra good; Sept., 1921, p. 501. Objective: By honouring and obeying our earthly father we are obeying and honouring our Heavenly Father. I. Our Horn's Parents. Father. II. Father's Love for Family. 1. lie sacrifices to earn a living.  w did the Lord direct Lehi (1) in escaping the destruction of Jerusalem. (2) In finding his way to the wilderness. (3) In obtaining the lecords of his forefathers? The Lord made Lehi a promise that he should have many descendants. What plan did He direct to make this possible? Describe the Liahona and how it operated. Name some ways in which Lehi and the members of his family did the will of God. Name one way in which Nephi listened to the wishes of his father. Which wishes were also the desires of his Faihar in Hya\cn. Hune 23, 192J TE KARERE 192 What are some ol: the things our parents ask us to do? How do we respond 1 ? Songs : " 1 )addy ? s Home Coming, " * i Love at Home, ' ' Deseret S.S. Songs. Rest Exercise: A follow up of last Sunday. Have the children tell of what their father does to earn the money with v. hich to buy their food and clothes, and the comforts of life. Dramatize the various occupations as the children tell them. For instance, at the suggestion, "My Daddy is a farmer,'' dramatize plowing the ground, sowing the seeds, cutting the grain. "My Daddy is a Shoemaker, ' ' dramatize the repairing of the shoes — cut the leather, sew it, hammer in the nails, etc. Fourth Sunday, July 25, 1926. Subject: Nephi Obtains Food for the Family. Text: Lesson 52, "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten''-; I Nepl.i 16:14-32. Objective: God blesses those who strive earnestly to help others. Suggestions: When Nephi and his brothers were striving to obtain food the second time for the family, what accident hap- pened ? How did the hunters Ceel when they returned to cam])? How did the members of the family, even Lehi, express their feelings of disappointment ? What stand did Nephi take which influenced the family (o cease their murmurings? Wha1 evidence is there that the Lord guided Nephi in the preparation for the next hunting expedition, and also that lie directed the way he should travel. Why did lie do this? Describe the scene of rejoicing at camp as result of Nephi 's helpfulness. Memory Gem: "The Family,'' Emilie Poulson, Finger Play. The (Jem on page Hi!), "Sunday Morning in the Kintcr- grgrten," under Lesson 53 — in June. Songs— Same as Tor last Sunday. Res1 Rxercise: Lead the children to feel thai we arc. showing our 1 ove for mother sod father when we are kind and helpful to 194 TE KARERE Hune 23, 1926 our brothers and sisters — as Nephi showed his love for his brothers. Dramatise: — Wheeling the baby in the pram. Lacing little brother's boots. Brushing little sister's hair. Putting on brother's rubbers. Bring him play things MAUI HUI ATAWHAI. KORA S. TIN1KINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawliai. Na Toko Watene i whakamaori. AKORANGA MO HURAE. Te Wa te Taima i Rite ai. (Meridian cf Time). A Ihu, te Tangata te Wa. A. Tona Ingoa. Ki nga mea whaka-te-Atua kotahj ano te lhu, ko ta te karaipiture i whakaari ai, Nona nei hold te ingoa i te Rangi a i runga hoki i te whenua ko tona tikanga nei, "Kei a tatou te Atua. " Matiu 1 : 21-23. E whakaatu ano hoki te ingoa nei he Atua ano a Ihu i mua i Tona taenga mai ki te ao, inaianei, a ake tonu atu. Ka marama i konei te whakaatu a Apinari Poropiti nga Xiwhai. Mohia 15: 1. Te ingoa o Ihu he mea tapu, a kia ahua wehiwehi ano te whakahua. Ko te whakahua hopohopo i tend ingoa, he whakaatu tena i te whai-whakaaro te hunga whaka- pono, me te karakia pono. B. Whakamarama mo te Taha ki Ona Matua. 1. Tona Matua ko te Atua. Ko tatou katoa nga tamariki whaka-te-wairua a te Atua, engari ko Ihu anake te tamaiti kotahi a te Atua a te whaea kikekiko. Hoani 1 : 14. 2. Te whaea o lhu. Ko te whaea o Ihu lie wahina (puhi) i tanmautia me tetahi tangata whakaaro-nui. I tona whakaaro lei te iti tona whakapono, e kore te tika TTohepa e mau i a ia ki tona kainga hei wahine ma ana. Engari kihai tona nga- kau-nui i tuku kia whakaiti ia i a ia ki te aroaro nga Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 195 tangata, pera me etahi. Otira i tae mai he anahera, he karere no te rangimarie, me te korero mai ki a Hohepa ka riro raua tahi hei kai-tiaki mo tetahi tamaiti nui atu i te mana kikokiko. A i pupuri ia i taua kai-tiakitanga i hoatu ki i a ia, e marama ana i a ia ngohengohe ki te whakarite i nga whakahaunga a te Atua i te wa i whai ai nga tangata kikino ki te whakamate i te pepi i a 11m. Ko te whaea Ihu te wahine manakohia nuitia atu o nga wahine katoa. Ko te whakaatu a Ihu Mona ake ko te Tama a te Atua, engari kei te karanga ano hold Ia i a la ko te Tama a te Tangata, e whakaae ana ki te taha tangata Tona whaea. C. Tona Whanautanga. Ko te poropititanga a Ilakopa i a ia e manaaki ana i a Hiira kei te tino mohiotia. Kenehi 49 : 10, a tera hoki pea i a Ilerora e mau ana tenei mohiotanga i nga tangata matauranga i haere mai ai me te ui haere mo te tamaiti mo Ihu. No te mea ko Ihu te "Hiro," te Tama a te Atua, te Piriniha o te Rangimarie, ka mutu ko ia anake te Kingi lharaira e kingi mo ake tonu atu. D. Whakaaturanga a nga Tangata mo te Taha ki Tona Atua- tanga. 1. Ta Himiona i roto i te Tcmepara. Ruka 2: 27-30. 2. Ta Hoani Kai Iriiri. Hoani 1 : 29-34. 3. Ta Pita. Matin 16 : 17-17. 4. Ta Erihapeti. Ruka 1 : 39-43. 5. T^ Ana i roto i te Temepaia. Ruka 2 : 36-38. 6. Ta Maata. Hoani 11: 27. 7. Ta Anaru. Hoani 1 : 40. 8. Ta Natanahira. Hoani 1 : 47-51. E. Whakaaturanga a nga Anahera. 1. Ta Kapariere ki a Meri. Ruka 1 : 31-33. 2. Ta te Anahera me te ope tini te rangi. Ruka 2: 11-14. F. Te Reo te Matua i te Rangi. Matiu 3 : 16-17. G. Whakaaturanga a te Wairua Tapu. 1. I tona putanga iho i te wa Tona iriiringa. H. Whakaaturanga a Ihu ano. 1. Ki Tona Whaea. Ruka : 48-49. 2. Ki a Ma'ata. Hoani 1 f: 25-26. 196 TE KARERE Hune 23. 1926 8. ki te Tohunga Nui. Maka 14: 61-62. 4. Ki te tangata kapo. Hoani 9 : 30-37. 5. Ki te huihuinga tangata. Hoani 10: 17-18. Me Tana meatanga hoki, "Kahore he aroha tetahi i rahi ake i tenei ara, kia tuku te tangata i a ia kia mate mo ona lioa." Hoani 15: 13. Tei'a atu etahi kua tuku i ratou oranga mo runga i etahi tikanga papai, engari ko Ia te mea tuatahi i wliai kaha ki te tango ake ano i Tona oranga. No reira ko Tona aranga mai te whakaaturanga nui rawa atu mo te taha ki Tona Atuatanga. NGA PATAI ME NGA PUTAKE IIEI WHAKAUTUNGA. 1. Korero whakariterite — Ko Ihu he tangata i kaha nei ki te tu atu ki nga whakamatautauranga, a he Axua i taea ai e [a tenei mea te mate. 2. Whakamaramatia — i whakaatu nga rewera mo te talia ki Tona Atuatanga. 3. No tehea wa i whakaatu ai to Wairna Tapu i te Atua- tanga te Karaiti ? 4. I runga i tehea huarahi i rite ai te whakaaturanga ;i nga Hunga Tapu o nga Ra Muri Nei ki ta Pita? 5. Korerotia te whakapaeng-a Ihu kia whakaraatea 1110 te whakaaturanga i a la ko Ia to Tama a te Atua. 6. He alia te take hoi whakaponotanga he tane, ho wahinc tahi nga anahera i roto o te ope whakaatu i te whariautanga te Karaiti. AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. Ko Pirikama Iaanga. A. Nga tino putake roto i tona oranga. 1. Tona whanautanga me ona matua. 2. Tona whakatupuranga, whakaakoranga wawe hoki i tona taniarikitanga. 3. Tona huangatanga tuatahi ki te tikanga "Moromona." 4. Tona urunga ki roto o te haere i heke mai i Mihuri (Missouri). 5. Tona urunga ki roto te haere i heke mai i Nawuu (Nauvoo). C>. He Apotoro ia, he Tumiiaki. B. Nga tino nutake tana mahi mihana hoki. Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 197 1. He kai-whakaputa, ho kai-arahi no tona iwi. 2. He kai-whakatupu ake i nga tangata tona takiwa- 3. He kai-whakahaere kawanatanga. 4. He Poropiti. C. Nga tino tohu a tona ahua. 1. He whakakitenga — he kalia ki te titiro whakamua. 2. Ko te kaha ki te whakariterite. 3. Ko te mail ki tona karakia. 4. Ko te kaha ki te whakawa tika. 5. Ko tona tahuri ki te whakahoa. Nga korero a Pirikama Iaanga : "Ki te pono koutou Id kouton karangataiigaj taku knpu ki a kouton, kaore he manaakitanga i roto i te ture te Tiki- tiki-o-Rangi, o te Rangatiratanga o te Atria e kore ai kouton e kore te whiwhi ki te koa." "He kahore noa iho tatou, heoi ano ko ta te Atua tonu e whakarite ai hei pehea tatou." "Ki te kahore te niaramatanga o te wairua te Karaiti, e kore tetahi tangata e ahei ki te whakarite tika i te tikanga te ora." "Ki a all an tonu toku karakia i te ata o tetahi Mane ki tetahi, huri noa te tail, ki te kore e kore la e korero mai ki a an." "Te putake tonei oranga Ida ako tatou, a kore nei e taea te mahi engari iti nei iti nei i te wa kotahi. " "Kaua e mahi ki te Atua no te mea kei te welii koe i te reinga, engari whakarHea nga tikanga o to karakia no te mea ma reira koe e whiwhi ai ki te oranga tonutanga. E tohu ana hold ki taua oranga kaore nei he mutunga, tera atu huarahi 18 ki te whakangaromanga." "E mea ana ahau ki te ki atn ki a koutou e oku hoa, kei te whakapono hiaton ki nga tika katoa. Ki te kitea e koe te pono i te whenua i te rangi i te reinga ranei, no to matou akoranga, kei te whakapono matou, no maton hoki, me ta matou pupuri ano.''' Nga whakaaturanga kei \o "Biographical Encyclopedia*^; "Historical Record," na Jensen; "History of UtalVna Whit- ney; " Life of Joseph Smith," na Cannon; "One I In ml red Years of Monnonism," na Evans. TE KARERE Hunc 23, 1926 -0- KI TE ETITA. He Ripoata Hui Tau Tc pai te whakahaere 1 nga mahi, te hui, te nui te kai, Die era atu, koia te arolia toku wairua ki Xuliaka. No te po te Wenerei ka tatu matou ki te marae te hui. I taua po ano ka tatu a Ngapuhi me Waikato. Ki auina ake ko te Taite te 31 nga ra te marama, na katalii ano ka whakaeke nga ope a Ngati Kahungunu ki Heretaunga tae atu ki te Upoko te Ika, huri noa a Manawatu, Whangahui, tae atu ki Taranaki, whiti atu ki te Waipounamu. Ko nga ope katoa enej i tatu ki te marae o te Hui Tau i tn nei te 1, 2, 3, nga ra Aperira ki Nuhuka. E kore e taea e an te tatan nga iwi i tae mai ki te hui, i te lini a te tangata ara nga uri Aperahama, Ehaka, Hakopa, Hohepa i whakaraua atn ra ki Ihipa, puta mai nei ko Manahe, puta mai nei ko Riliai i tonoa mai nei e te Atu a Ida puta mai ki waho o te whenua Hiruharama e 600 tau i mua atu te whanautanga te Karaiti, ka rere atu ratou ko tona whanau ki te whenua o Tawhiti-Nui ara ki te whenUa o Amerika, ki reira whakatipu ai i te peka hua i korerotia ra e Hakopa i roto i tana manaakitanga i ;t Hohepa. Xa ka ti])ii ratou, ka kapi am) lioki te whenua o Tawhiti-Nui i a ratou, a lea ara nga pakanga, nga tautoiic- tohenga i waenganui i a ratou, na ka puta te whakaaro i te Atua kia tohaia mai ratou ki runga i nga moutere te moae.a. K 54 nga fan i mua atu te whanautanga te Karaiti ka tonoa mai e te Atua a Hakota i te whenua Tawhiti-Nui ki Qawaiki Moutere e tau mai nei i te Moana-Nui-a-Kiwa. lie maha nga tail i muri mai ka heke mai tatou tipuna i TTawaiki ki nga moutere te moana a tae noa mai ki Aotearoa nei, ara ki te pito mutunga tc ao nei. I tutuki ai nga kupu a te Atua ki tatou tupuna i te koraha o Maunga Hinai i mea ai ia, "Ka ])eia atu koutou e au i konei a te pito wliakamutunga ra ano te ao. A maku ano koutou e tiki atu, e kohikohi mai i nga whenua i whakamararatia atu al koutou, a maku koutou e whakahoki mai ano ki o koutou ake oneone tupu." E te Whare Iharaira, e te Hnn.^a Tapu. ko awhe'a koutou Hune 23, 1920 TE KARER E _^ 199 kohikohi ai, whakahoki ai ki to koutou oneone tupu? Maranga, whakatika, hamama, tupeke! Hamama atu ki a Ihowa ki to Atua. Whakarahia to rco ki to karanga atu ki a la. Kua tae mai nei Taana whakaoranga ki a koe, e te Whare o Iharaira, ara te Hunga Tapu nga Ra Muri Nei. Ko te Ava tenei o te kohikoliinga. Whakarongo ake ki nga kupu i puta mai i roto i nga mangai nga pononga, a te Atua. E niea ana a Tumuaki Tinikini i roto i te Hui Tan ka hori ake nei, e ki ana ia, ''Ka koa te hunga ngakau ma, e kite hoki ratou i te kanolii a te Atua. E tu ra koutou i runga i koutou turanga tapu. Kua tata te ra te haerenga mai e kingi ai a te Karaiti ki vvaenganui tona Hunga Tapu mo nga tau kotalii mano." Titiro atu, e te Hunga Tapu, ki nga mahi i mania e te Tumuaki te Mihana, ki nga vvhakahaere nga huihui, nga tohutolm ki nga api-ha v/liakahaere ia peka o ia peka. He tino niiharo nga whakahaere tenei Hui Tau. E mohio ana an I.e maha te hunga i kite i nga mea kaore nei ia i kite, i rongo i nga mea kaore nei ia i rongo. E tohutolm ana i nga Tumuaki Peka me ona Kaunihera kia tahuri ki te whakapai i ratou peka, ki te ngaki i nga taru a ratou ngakinga. Kei tipu ake nga taru kino. Ara te Puremu, te Haurangi, te Tahae, te Whakapae, te Kohuru, te Korero i nga korero paruparu (ara e puta nan mo nga wahi ngaro o te tane te wahine, nga haka paruparu. He nui nga haka lie pai nga kupu, he nui nga haka he paruparu nga kupu), te Hae, te Taunu, te Tawai ki etahi, ara atu o nga mea kaore nei e tika kia mahia e tatou. E te Hunga Tapu, i mahia katoatia e tatou nga main kua korerotia f,ke nei i mua atu i to tatou uuinga ki te wai o te iriiringa no reii'a pu ano koutou i horoi ai kia ma. Koia na hoki te take i hoatu ai te Wairua Tapu ki a koutou. T tana ra kua, rite koutou ki te Temepara, kua oti te whakapaipai hei nohoanga mo te Wairua te Atua. E kore hoki te Wairua o te Atua nolio i roto i nga temepara poke. He alia te temepara poke? Ko te tangata kaore c taea e ia te pehi nga hihikotanga te Kikokiko, ara to Puremu, te Hae, te Kohuru, te Hiahia Taikaha, te Taunu, to Tawai tetahi ki tetahi, \c aroha-kore tetahi ki lotahi, te kore-ripenata, t u i roto i tenei taonga kua hornai ano e te Atua ki n?;a tangata. k'o te wawati nui hoki o ta- lon ngakau kia kitekite tonu i nga mea hei whakakaha i o ta- tou whakapono i roto i te Rongo i'ai nei. Kua taka mai enei whakaahua ki oku ringaiinga, hei tino mea whakakaha ki a Hunc 23, 1926 TE KAR1-RE 201 au. No reira i runga i te ! iahia kia kz erui mea hei painga ma tatou tal i. :a ake tatou kua tukua Ko tt Ngohcrc Tapu Ko te whakaahua tenei o te Ngahere Tapu, ara te wahi i whakakitea mai te Matua raua ko te Tama, i a raua ano ki a Hohepa Mete i te tau 1820. E ta te whakaaro o nga Hunga Tapu i tuturi ai te tamaiti, a Hohepa, ki te taha o te Rekau nui, ki te wahi kua whaitohungia. O aria te roanga) He Manaakitanga Ki Te Karere, tena koe, tenei au te tuku atu nei i tenei ripoata ki te manu tangi pai hei mau mana ki te hunga e tae ai ia. Kaati tena, no te whitu o nga ra Mei ka tae mai nga kaumatua, a Erata Paapiti, Tumuaki Waikato raua ko Erata Karaitihana. I tae mai raua i runga i taku tono kia tae mai ki te iriiri i taku tamaiti. Xo te wild i te i wa o nga ra katahi ka iriiria. I te wa tonu i iriiria ai te tamaiti, te putunga ake i te wai ka huri mai matou ka liok mai, katahi to tatou whaea ka karanga mai, "Taihoa, e haere kia korero atu au i taku whakaaro ki a koutou. Xo reira e penei atu ana au kia koutou, mehe kaore koutou e whakaae me haere atu au ki roto i te wai tapu a te Atua." Katahi ka utua e au, "Kei to whakaaro te 232 Tli KARERK Ilune 2J, 1^26 whiriwhiri 1110 tena wahi." Ka tautokoiia c te Tumuaki. Katahi ka matika mai to tatou whaea ka kuhu ki te wai raua ko te kaumatua. E te Hunga Tapu lie tino ruruLi rawa to tatou whaea. E hoa ma e tata ana J .e pa o te ihu ki te wkcnua mebe ki te haere tu ia. Kati, e hoa ma i te wa i tu ai ki roto i te wai, c te Hunga Tapu e tia nei ka tekau ma ono ano nga tau te tika o te tuara i a ia e tu ana i roto i te wai. Tuarua i a ia ka puea tonu akc i te wai ka kite katoa atu oiatou i to kanohi e minamina ana ki te kata. Kati tena, no te ekenga mai ki uta, i te matao o tena rangi katahi ka hoatu lie kooti liei uhi i a ia i te matao, katahi ka karanga, "llei alia te kooti, kei mea mai koutou e maeke ana a an. Kaore an i te maeko. E tia nei te wai e mea nei i runga i a an he wcewera no taku tinana, te pai o te mahana ki taku tinana." Kati tena whakamarama, tuarua o nga whakamarama ko tenei ruruhi kua kaumatuatia ki roto i nga tikanga Maori i roto i nga Whare Wananga o o tatou tnpnna. Kaati, i tenei ra kua kore ia e mobio he taonga ano era, ina lioki e ki ana ia. i a matou e heare mai ana ki te kainga, katalii a Kirika Toheriri ka puta mai ki waho ka maiolia mai ki to tatou whaea i te mea kaore i mohiotia ka iriiria i a ia i taua taima. 1 te mea e maioha mai ana katahi ka mea mai, ''lie aim te take o te maioha? Kaore lie hiia o tera mea o te tangi. Kna ruruhitia au e kimi ana i te kaupapa o tenei mea o te arolia, kite akc nei e au ko te whakapono ki to talon Kai Whakaora ki te Tanga Nana tatou i whakaora i te ao nei." No reira e 1c Hunga Tapu nui atu to matou koa ki tenei whakawhiwhinga a te Atna i a matou ki tenei iriiringa. lie tino manaakitanga nui tenei na te Atua i tenei takiwa o to tatou niihana. No reira me mutu iho i konei cnei whakamarama mo te Peka o Aria o te Takiwa o Waikato. Kia ora koutou te Hunga Tapu puta noa te Mihana o Xiu Tireni. Ma te Ariki koutou e tiaki hei whakakaha i nga wa katoa, Aniene. Xa to koutou teina, tungane i roto i te TCongopai. Na HERE TANGIHAERE. POWHIRI HUI PARIHA No te Tai Rawhiti ; hei te 3, 4 o Hurae, ki te Muriwai. No te Wairarapa : hei te I 0, 1 1 o Hurae, ki te Kohunui, Fea- therston. E powhiritia ana tatou katoa. Hune 23, [926 TE KARF.RE 203 KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. Elder H. Lester Petersen huier Golden J. Webster Ko ELDER H. LESTER PETERSON 6 Rexburg, Ida- ho. 1 tae mai a Erata Pitihana i te 20 o nga ra o Hurae, 1923, a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Wairarcpa. No le 3 o nga ra Pepueie, 192^, ka whakaritea ia Lei tumuaki mo taua ta- kiwa. Ka nukuhia atu ki te Kareti i te 2 o nga ra lihema, 1924, a i te 2 o nga ra o Maehe, 1925, ka nukuhia rno ki te takiwa o Foneke. Ka tu ia hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa i te l o nga ra o Hepetema, 1925, a tukua honoretia atu ana i a Aperira te 8 nga ra 1920. Ko ELDER GOLDEN J. WEBS! ER o Kaysville, Utah. I tae mai a Erata Wepiha i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira 1924, a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Whangarei. I a Mei te 26 o nga ra 1925 ka nukuhia atu ia ki te takiwa o Poneke, a i te 15 o nga ra o Pepuere 1926 ka nukuhia atu ano ki te takiwa o Otago (Waipounamu). 1 te 8 o nga ra o Hune ka tukua ho- noretia atu ia kia hoki atu ki tona kainga. He Ripoata mo te Ra o nga Whaea NO TE KIRIKIRI. Ki te etita o Te Karere, tena koe. Man e pamii atu enei korero. I tu te huihuinga whakanui mo nga whaea i te wiki tuarua te 9 Mei ki te Kirikiri nei (Takiwa Hauriki). I hui mai Hunga Tapu Omahu me nga kaumatua te Thames a 23 ]._ Tlf KARERK Hune 2:, iy:6 Ex'ata Wehitoa raua ko Erata Teira. Tino pai tana huilminga, ahakoa te nui o te ua o iaua rangi. Nga tikanga nunui o roto ko te pai o te whakahaere a te Tuinuaki a Tiki Reihana mc tona kaanihera a te Wirihana Watene, me nga tamariki hoki i nga mahi i whakaritca ma ratou. Ko te tu-a-rarangi a nga tamariki tane, kotiro, me nga ret;::, M-O-T-TI-E-R, he pepa, he mea t&pahi, me te korero ano tena, tena, i tana raraagi. Me nga waiata hoki e rite ana. Te tuhanga o nga putiputi ki nga whaea. Te 1 meneti ata noho whakahonore mo nga whaea kua wehe ki tna o te arai. Toko-ono nga whaea i tu ki te korero ko Sister liaira Te Aue, Panikena, Whakamura, Kahukore, me Rose Watene. He nui te pai me te aroha o a ratou kupu i liaere mo runga i nga mahi a o ratou whaea, ki te tiaki me te mana- wanui hoki i te ao, i te po, ki te whakatupu ake i a ratou tamariki, me era atu painga, me te tangi ano o etahi. I tu hoki nga kaumatua a Erata Yv'eliitoa, he nui ana korero. Ko te whaea te hoa pai atu o te tamaiti, kotiro ranei. Ahakoa he aha te raruraru, ka piripono tonu ia ki tona tamaiti. Koia noki te kai-whakamarie ina tupono ia ki te raruraru. Ko tetahi o nga ture nui i homai, kia whakahonore tatou i o tatou wlmea. Ko Erata Tarapata, lie tautoko, he nui tona nama ki tona whaea. E whakaae ana hoki ia, kaore te whaea e moe ana ki te haere tana tamaiti, kotiro ranei, i te po ki nga kanikani ; kei te oho tonu ona mahara ki te rongo kau ki tetahi haruru, ka karanga ia, "Ko koe tena?" e mea kia moliio ra ano, ia, katahi ano ka tatu ona wliakaaro. I tu hoki a Erata Roiti raua ko Ahitarama, pera ano te aronga o a raua korero. I puta hoki enei korero, kaore tatou e tino mohio ki te nui o te painga o o tatou whaea me ana mahi papai, kia mate ra ano katahi ano tatou ka mohio mc te hoki ano o nga mahara. Na ROSE WATENE. NO TE MAHIA. Ki te Etita o Te Karere, tena koe. Ileoi te mihi. I te 9 o Slci nei ka tu to matou karakia ki te Paratiamu lie wliakaaro H te Ra o nga Whaea ara Mother's Day. Na, e hoa ma, tetahi ra whakamiharo tenei ki a matou. No te mea he mea hou tenei ki waenganui i a matou ki nga Hunga Tapu o te Mahia nei. I whakaritetia e matou tenei ra i roto i te aroha ki a matou matua kua hinga kei te po. Ko te mea nui ki a matou kei roto Hune 23, 1926 te karkre 205 i tenei ra ko te kotahi meneti e noho-puku ana, ara one minute silence. E lion ma, hold atu ana nga whakaaro ki nga whaea kna hinga kei to po. Ahakoa ra, eliara i to moa whatoro tenei ra i waenga parae, kaore. Tirohia Ekoruhe 20: 12. Kei reira ki ana kia whakahonoretia ton papa me ton whaea, kia roa ai o koutou ra ki runga i to mata to whenua. Kaati, e te Hunga Tapu, kia ora koutou katoa i roto i nga manaakitanga a to tatou Matua i to Rangi. Kia kalia tatau ki te whakarite i o tatau karangatanga. Heoi na to koutou taina. W. J. MATENGA, Timuaki o to Kura Hapati to Mahia Peka Oraka. He Rjpoata no Korongcta Mo te Ra nga Whaea. E whakamarama ana tenei ripoata i nga mahi tenei ra i whakahaeretia i roto i nga tauira i roto i Te Karere. To in ah a o nga tangata i tao mai ki te whakanui i tenei ra, 105. Te in aba nga whaea i roto i tenei ra e toru tekau ma warn. Xga apiha whakahaere tenei ra, Hamiora Kamau me ona kaunihera mo Teiti Kamau, hekeretari. E to Runga Tapu. tetahi tauira tino pai tenei kua oti e tenei llalii to whakatu hoi whakaako i a tatau tamariki ki to nni to honore tenei moa to whaea. Ko tatau te iwi Maori, eliara tatau whaea i to moa nui raw T a ki a tatau. He aha to take ? He kore kaore i akona ki te nui ta ratau mahi ki te miramira i a tatau. Engari no roto i nga whakaakoranga tenei Hahi, katahi ka kitoa te nui tatau wiiaea ki a tatau i roto i nga Hui Atawhai mo nga roopu te Paraimere no roto i tenei ra i te ra o nga whaea. Ka whakamaungia te tohii whakanui ki runga ia whaea, he putiputi. Katahi ka titirp whanui atu nga kanohi to hunga ngakau papaku ki ratou 11 ei whaea. Tino heke nga roimata me te hoki o nga whakaaro ki muri, ki to takawa ora ana ratou nei whaea kihai i penei to whakanui. Ka mohio tatau ka noho to ngakau whakahonore ki roto i a tatau tamariki inaianei ki ratau whaea. No muri ka hoatu to tohu whakaniaharatanga mo nga whaea kua mate, kotahi meneti noho puku ana t«^ katoa. Tino 206 TE KARERE Hune 23, 1926 nui te urunga te arolia ki roto i nga ngakau te hunga i tae tnai i tenei ra. Ko te luia tenei tenei mahi te Ra nga Whaea. Ka rite te ture, "AVhakahonoretia to papa me to whaea kia roa ai ou fa e homai ana e ton Ai-iki. " Nga kai-waiata me nga mahi whakatangitangi na Dga tama- rika to Kareti me nga kauniatua te Pariha me te Karri i tae niai ki nga Hunga Tapn Korongata. Te Karakia Hakarameta, 108 nga tangata i tae mai. Nga kai-kauwhau, Erata Heera, Erata Paraone, Erata Piringihaate, Paora Hapi, Rawiri Kamau. No te Miutara 175 nga tangata i tae mai ki tenei huihuinga. Tino njii nga mahi i mahia i roto i tenei Miutara, e kore e pau ki roto i Te Karere te tuhi nga mahi. Te knpu polo, e rite ana he Ilni Pariha. Ko te Mateng'a Koro Waerea. E whakaatu ana ki nga whanaunga tenei tamaiti, no te 7 nga ra Mei nei ka mate a Koro Waerea. Tekau ma rima 011a tan, tona karangatanga i roto i te Hahi lie Rikona. He tamaiti pai tenei, kaha hold i roto i tona karangatanga tae noa ki te ra i mate ai ia. He nui te pouri i pa mai ki a matau ki ona matua. E kore hold, e warewaretia te pai o ana mahi me tona kaha i roto i tenei peka. Kua rite i a ia tona karanga- tanga, kua riro ia i tona Matua hei mahi i ana mahi i tua o te ai*ai. E hari ana e koa ana tooku ngakau mona i mate i roto i te ma, Kaore he raruraru. Koia nei lie tauira mo ona whanaunga. E kalia ana ahau ki te ripoata, ki te kore tenei tamaiti e whiwhi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua kaore hoki tetahi tangata atu e whiwhi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua. "Ma nga H.ua ka Mohiotia ai." E whakamarama ana tenei ripoata i tae mai a Takuta Te Rangihiroa ki konei ki te pokapoka i a matau i te 10 o nga ra Mei. I liui katoa mai te Hunga Tapu kia pokapokatia. Ko Paraire Tomoana me Poke Henri me te neihi. 1 tino nui t>* jnilii a te Takuta Te Rangihiroa. 1 puta i a ia tenei korero, katahi te kainga whakanui i a ia roto Heretaunga nei. kaore he omaoma te ahua o nga tangata. lie aha ra te take i penei ai nga tangata o tenei kainga, i rereke ai etahi atu kainga ? Te whakahoki ko tenei iwi ko te Hunga Tapu e haere ana i raro i te mana o nga kingi, o nga tinmaki, o nga ranga- Ilune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 207 tira, nga kai-whakahaere tikanga, c pai ana hoki matau ki te ngohehgohe, ki te tautoko hoki i te ture. He ture tenei i roto i to matau Hahi. Whenci he tohunga Maori whakaakoranga kaore matau e whakarongc. "E te iwi, e kore e warewaretia e ahau to koutou alma me la koutou manaaki i a ahau. E tino mihi ana ahau ki a koutou, te maa to koutou kainga, te maa a koutou tamariki, te ataahua nga pakeke. E noho ana koutou i roto i te tupato, ma tenei alma ka taka atu etahi o nga mate e puta mai ana i roto i te paruparu. No reira koia nei te taonga nui te Pakeha, he maa. E mihi ana ahau mo to koutou karakia Hahi "Momona." Ko au, kaore au i te tangata karakia. He aha te hahi, kaore aku whakahe, engari e puta ana he mahi pai he malii kino i roto i nga hahi katoa. No reira kua kite ahau i te pai o a koutou mahi pai i roto i to koutou hahi." I timatatia to matau huihuinga ki te karakia. Ilimene tuatahi, Iloia o te Hahi ki te reo pakeha. Inoi na Katima Hakopa. Himene whakamutunga "Till We Meet Again," inoi wh'akamutunga na Rangi Kawea. Na RAWIRI M. KAMAU. KO NGA JVUHI A TE KUIM HAPATI HE! PAIN3A MA TaTOU Na Te Ngoura i tuhi, na R.apata Tanapu i whakamaori. Ki Te Karere : Tena koe. I a au e korero ana i te puka- puka te Kura Hapati Hiona (Juvenile Inst rue tor), ka korero au i te kauwhau i kauwhautia ai e Tumuaki Ilipa J. Karanata i te hui a nga kai-arahi o nga Kura Hapati roto te Hahi, i tu ki te Pa Tote i te wha nga ra Oketopa, 1925 Ka korero ia i te pai te mahi e puta mai ana i te Kura Hapati ki a tatou ki te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Ned. E ki ana ia e awhinatia ana e te Kura Hapati nga tangata katoa e haere ana ki te Kura H-apiti tae atu ana ki te Tumiiaki Xni nei ki a Rawiri 0. Makei ki te katoa ano hoki nga kai-mahi, kai- wnakaako, akonga, a ki nga tamariki ano hoki. Na, ko tetehi ano ana kupu e penei ana. Ko te niea nui i'awa e ahei i te tangata te mahi, he awhina i tetehi i runga i te aroha, kaua lie utu. lie nui ke atu nga kai-mahi a te Hunga Tapu e mahi ana i roto nga Kura Hapati, i nga kai-mahi 203 TE RARER K Hune 23, 1^26 roto i etehi atu Iiahi penei ano i to tatou nai te nui. Kei etehi hahi he wahine nga kai-w hakahaere o o ratou Kura llapati, kaore he tane, c meatia ana hei kai-whakahaere. Engari ano to tatou lialii e mahi katoa ana nga tangata nunui, e whakaako ana, e arahi ana i nga mahi o te Kura llapati, awhiiia atu hoki i nga tuahine, me te tohutohu ano ki nga mahi. He niaha nga tangata o waho i to tatou Hahi e haere mai ana ki o tatou Kura llapati e chorere ana i te Qui o te matauranga o nga tangata whakaako, arahi, o roto i o tatou Kura llapati. E ki ana a Tumuaki Karanata ehara i te mea ma te nui o nga kai c pau ana i te tangata e kaha ai tona tinana, engari ma te nui ke o te painga o nga kai e tapoko ana ki nga toto i te puku. Waihoki, ehara ano i te moa ma te nui o to tatou kaha ki te ako ki te korero pukapuka i roto i o tatou Kura llapati e puta mai ai lie painga ki a tatou, engari ma te nui ke o te puwerawera e riro mai ana i a tatou i roto i te Wairua o te Atua. Ko te kai-whakaako e ako ana i nga tamarika ki te pono o te rongopai, he pai ke atu ia i tetehi e mea hei me ako a ngakau te nuinga o te karaipiture. Ko te mea nui rawa i riro mai i a Tumuaki Karanata i roto i te Kura Hapati i a ia e tamariki ana ko tana whakaatu hinengaro ki te pono o tenei rongopai. He tino pai hoki tana kai-whakaako i ata whaka- marama ki a ia i nga ture i whakatakotoria ai ki roto i te karaipiture, me te korero atu ano hoki ki a ia i ana mahi i a ia i te miliana, i a raua e ako ana. 1 tino arohatia hoki tenei kai-whakaako e nga kotiro, e nga tamariki tane, a kore rawa i warewaffc i a ratou nga mea i akona ai ki a ratou a taea noatia to ratou matenga. Ko te kai-whakaako kaore e whaka- pono ki nga ture katoa o te rongopai, kaore c hiahiatia kia ako i roto i o tatou Kara llapati. E whakapono ana tatou tera ano he Atua, he Rewera. Ko a tatou mahi papai katoa i puta mai i runga i te whakapono ki te Atua, a ki ana mahi ako hoki, na ko nga mahi kino katoa e puta ana ki nga mea e whakarongo ana nga taringa ki nga tohutohu a te Rewera. He poi'opiti ano ta te Atua. he poropiti ano hoki ta te Iveweia. Tera ano hoki etehi whakaakoranga e mohiotia nei e nga tangata e nohoia ana e te Wairua o te Atua lie mahi na te Rewera. Xa he mea kia marama ai tenei ka korero a Tumuaki Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE 209 Karaiiata ki etehi mea i pa Id a ia i mua tona tunga hei Tumuaki mo te HaLi. Tokotoru nga tamariki a Tumuaki Karanata raua ko tana wahine, tino ngakaunui hoki nga tamariki nei ki ratou matua.. Engari i mua te kamautua-rawatanga ka mate to ratou whaea. I muri te tapuketanga o to ratou whaea ka haria e Karanata ana tamariki ki te hacreere i nga whenua, ma tera pea e whaka- wareware te pouritanga i roto i ratou ngakau mo to ratou whaea. I haere ratou ki nga taone nunui Amerika. A i a ratou e noho ana i Wahingitana ka pangia ana kotiro tokorua e tetehi mate kirika te korokoro ara e te tipitiria. I aua ra ki te pa ana tenei mate ki le tamariki e kore rawa e ora. Kore rawa nga takuta i niohio ki te rongoa e ora ai tenei mate. Ko tetehi nga kotiro nei kua kino rawa te mate. Pewhea ra ka rongo a Tumuaki Karanata i te takuta e korero atu ana ki te neelii kia whakainungia te kotiro ra ki tetehi rongoa i nga tekau ma rima meneti katoa, 11a ki te hapa i a ia tetehi whakai- numanga kotahi nei, ka mate tonu atu te kotiro nei. Kore rawa a Tumuaki Karanata i moe i taua po, he mea mona kei wareware te neelii ra ki te iioatu i te rongoa ki tana kotiro. ( Faria te roanga) E MAHI ANA TATOU MO TE AHA? Improvement Era, April 1926, ua J.W. i whakamaori. Ka korero atu te minita ki tetahi kaumatua "Momomi," "E lie ana koe 111011 i ki kei nga main te mea nui. Kahore rawa atu he take mo te main. I korero hoki a Paora, 'Na te aroha noa hoki koutou i whakaorangia ai i runga i te whakapono ; ehara ano hoki tenei i te mea no koutou he mea homai noa na te Atua: Ehara i nga malii, kei whakamanamanate tangata. ' ' Epeha 2: 8-9. Ka whakahoki te kaumatua, "He tika i korero a Paora, engari kei te rarangi i raro iho e ki ana, 'He mahinga hoki tatou naana, lie mea lianga i roto i a Karaiti Ihu mo nga mahi pai i whakaritea e te Atua i mua hei haereerenga mo tatou.' Epiha 2: 10. I korero ano hoki a Paora, 'Whakaotia to koutou whakaoranga i runga i te wehi, i te wiri.' Piripai 2: 12. 1 korero te Rangatira, kei runga ake nei ia i a Paora, 'E mahi ana toku Matua a taea noatia tenei ra: e mahi ana ano ahau.' 2 TE KARERE Hune 23, I926 Hoani 5: 17. 'Me mahi e ahau nga uialii a toku kaitono tnai i te mea e ao ana : meake ko te po e kore e taea te mahi e tetahi tangata.' Hoani 1): 1. 'Tenei akc hoki ka haere mai te Tama a te tangata, ratou ko ana anahera, i runga i te koro] La o tona Matua; a ko reira hoatu ai e ia ki tenei, ki tenei, 1c utn o tana mahi.' Matin 16: 27. Ac, i runga i te whakamarietanga a to tatou Kai Whakaora ka ara katoa nga tupapaku. Otira e kah'a-kore ana tatou ki to ara mai, engari i roto i to arol.a o to Atua ka ara mai aua tinana kikokiko engari kahore nei ho toto. A ka hoatu nga kororia- tanga, to utu mo nga mahi a tena tangata a tona tangata. Kahore katoa ara i to wa kotahi, kahore hoki e haere ki to walii kotahi. E ki ana to pukapuka pai, "Ka rite ano ki tana ake mahi tona utu e riro i tetahi, i tetahi." J. Koriniti 3: 8. "Kei whakapohehetia : ko ta te tangata hoki e rui ai, ko tenei tana e kokoti ai.". Karaitia G: 7. Ko te kupu tenei a Tumuaki Pirikania Taanga, "Ko an nei ka whai mo te oranga tonutunga. " Kia ara mai i te ata tonu o te aranga mo to hunga tika, me te whiwhi ano hoki ki to kororiatariga o runga rawa. Kahore hoki tatou e pai kia Avhanga tonu tatou i te aranga tuatahi a pau noa te kotahi mano tau, hei pononga ma etahi atu mo akeake tonu, pora me te kororiatanga o nga wh'etu. E nga taitama te llahi, ko nga manaakitanga mo koutou hei kingi hei piriniha mo te Kingitanga o te Atua ki to mahi koutou. ] J ]hara ranei i te mea lie utu nui tenei ! No reira matika "hei kaimalii ano koutou i te kupu, kaua hei kaiwhakarongo anake." Hemi 1: 22. Ma tatou ano whakarite o tatou mihana, kahore e taoa tetahi atu. Ko to rangi e whiwhi .tatou ko te rangi i taea e tatou ana mahi; engari mo te Tikitiki Rangi me tino awhinatia rawa te tangata te Atua i nga wa katoa katahi ka whiwhi. Kia mahara e nga Hunga Tapu i roto i a tatou mahi katoa kia mahara ki te Kai Hanga. Ko to mana to kikokiko he mea kahore noa iho. \o reira ma inoi tatou ki to Atua kia aratakina kia awhinatia i roto i a tatou mahi, mo te hoatu ano i te whakamoemiti me to kororia ki a Ia i nga wa katoa mo ake tonu. Ko te hapai ra tenei to waiata nei (keyonte) te Hahi "Momona," To v/hakapono raua ko nga mahi. Hune 23, 1926 TE KARERE Ko nga Kai=kauwhau Waikato Ki Te Karere. Tena koe. Ko enei nga ingoa o nga kai- whai-mohoao o Waikato me nga wahi e haere ai ratou ki te kauwhau i nga marama o Hurae me Akuhata e tu mai nei. Tu George Stockman Erata Reke Karaitihana Winieta Kapinga Erata Wiremu Oketana Here Tangihaere Erata Reke Karaitihana Walter Tangihaere Erata Wiremu Oketana Henare Maiho Te Whare Hetaraka Hokio Tarawhiti Erata Reheri D. Paapiti Te Awe Pongo Ngaha Ratana Hoani Ormsby Tetahi Kaumatua Hemi Haki Te Whotu Apiti Karena Takono Hongi Rawhiti Pene Poutu Kupa Tetahi Kaumatua Tamati Honetene Totana Arona \ Okahukura J Matiere \ Aria i Taumarunui 1 Piopio J Te Kuiti I Kokohi I Woodleigh I Ngaruawahia X Taur J Ohir jpere inewai Matakowhai Puke Tapu Waingaro Pukekohe Frankton Tauhei ka- E hoa ma, e koutou no te takiwa nei kia ora koutou toa. Kei ware ware ki a koutou mahi i tenei wa. I te mea ka tu to tatou Hui Tau ki Ngaruawahia, ara ki te kainga o Te Puea, a tera tau, me tino whakamohiotia ka_ toatia nga Maori ki nga ahuatanga o tenei taonga nui kua whiwhi ai tatou. Na tatou katoa no tenei takiwa te Hui Tau nei, no reira me mahi katoa tatou. Kia kaha kia manawanui ki tenei mahi whakahari ngakau. Kua kii mai a Kingi Tawhio ki a tatou, "Ko Arekahana- ra toku Hoana Kaha, ko Kemurete toku oku Aoroi, ko Ngaruawahia toku turanga waewae." No reira kia kaha ra tatou katoa. Ma te Atua koutou e tohutohu e whakakaha i nga ra e tu hum nei. Heoi ano, na to koutou teina, Na Reheri D. Paapiti, Tumuaki Takiwa. Ti; KAKKKK Htmc 23, 1926 KO NCA PUKAPJKA HEI HOKONCA 25-0 11 7-6 9-0 *>-0 Ro enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kci te lari o to Miliaria hei bo- konga ki nga niea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapaka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Bex 72, Auckland. STANDARD CHJRCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with Re;idy Reference, Leather... New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather Book of Mormon, Clodi 2-6 " " " , Half Leather " " , Leather u-o Pearl of Great Price, Cloth Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth " " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAORI BOOKS A.4D TRACTS Maori Ready Reference, Cloth " " " , Leatiier Ko Te Kawenata Hon, Cloth " " " " iVie Nga Kimene, Leather 3 in i " " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth " " '' , Leather Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth " " " " " " ", Leather Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer SJNDArf' SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS The Restoration of the Cospel What J ts. is Taught Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton S0.4C BO0X3 Songs of Zion, Cloth " " " , Leather Deseret Song Books, Cloth " " " , Leather Kindergarten & Primary Song Book DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS / rticles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talttioge Vi'ality of Mormonism Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson Restoration of the Gospel, li idtsoe Joseph Smith's Teachings Life of Christ for the Young, Weed Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talnwge Essentials in Church History, Smith Bible Ready Reference 2 3-6 1-9 li-O 5-o 15-0 5-J 150 1 4-0 5 ° 4-0 2-\ 66 3-0 66 3-o 8-3 4-6 6-0 40 3-6 46 8-9 6-9 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Mot ris 6-0 KO J. H. TIAT^INI TE KA) TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KOROVCATA HASTINGS. II. H. ;Caa>tro OlIIOI II IOI I IIIOI 1 1 I I I O I I I 1 1 IOI III I IOI I I I I OH IIOIIlO 5 WAHANGA 20 HURAE 21, 1926 NAMA / 5 O O r Ko te Ruma a te Tamaiti, a Hohepa Mete z **[JERE atu, ka korero atu ki te tamaiti 11 nei, mea atu, ka nohoia a Hiruha- rama, ka rite ki nga pa taiepa-kore, i te tini o te tangata, o nga kararche i roto." Hakaraia 2 :4 Oil IOI 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 1 IOI 1 1 lOll IO 'C6 KAR&R&" WHAKAEMINCA O NCA KORERO Wharangi. Kl TE ETITA He Powhiri 224 Ki a Ngapuhi Renata 235 Ko te Matenga o Piki Waerea 232 KO NCA TUHINCA MAI He Piki i runga i te Tumatakuru? 233 He Whakaahua Pai 235 Ko nga Mahi a te Kura Hapati hei Painga ma Tatou 236 Ko te Namaa te Atua 242 Me Pehea e Riro ai nga Tangata ki te Kaha o te Atua hei Whakaora? 238 Mo te Aranga Mai 240 MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 229 MAHI KURA HAPATI Concert Recitation 2l2 Intermediate Department 2 Korero a Ngakau 212 Kindergarten Department 2?5 Maori Theological 212 Pakeha Theological 217 Postlude 211 Prelude 211 Sacrament Gem '-'II ■L f^roro WAHANCA 20 WENErtEI. HURAE 21. 1926. NAMA 7 Maori Mgricullural College Hastings. H. B. E tukua atu ana ia mamma e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, Hani o iliu Karaili o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. Tukua uiai o kqutou reta ki te Elita o To Karere, M r A.C, Hastings. Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hercni (5/-). KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. Hie niatua utu mo tcir pcpa ka vChivhi ai. J. H. Tintkini, Tumuaki Mihana Mariona K. Ewatuna, htiia. Ttaia U iidiu u, Ltita he a Awliitia. Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha K  tatou. Kngari mchomes i malii la i ta flatans i noa ai, c kore 2U ■ TE KARERE Hurac 21, 1926 rawa la e tu hei Kai-Whakaora — ka he la i roto i Tana tnihana nui mo te mea i a la hei rangatira, a ka riro la hei kai-mahi te kino. Te whakahoki a Ihu i rite ki ta uga poropiti onamata, "Ka oti ano hoki te tuhituhi, kaua e whakamatautau ki te Ariki, ki ton Atua." lie aha uga manaakitanga kua riro mai i a tat 011 ma roto i a tatau takahi i nga whakamatautauranga? Tukua ki nga mema te karaihe te nuinga te taima ki te korero, e, he mea pehea ratou manaakitanga i roto i a ratou mahi i nga tauira o Ihu. Te Oranga me te Mahi o nga Apotoro a Ihu Karaiti Te Kaupapa : Ko te Kawenata Hou Na Wircmu C. Kaa raua k3 Rapita Tanapu i whakarite. Ratapu tuarua, Akuhata 8, 1926. AKOEANGA 20. Ko te Haerenga Tuarua Paora i te Mihana. Te roanga atu. .1. Te haerenga atu i Makeronia. (a) I Tcharonika — a Paora i roto i te whare karakia. Main 17: 2; 13: 14. (b) Ka tukinotia raua. Mahi 17 : 10-13. (e) Ko nga mahi pai a Paora i Peria. Mahi 17: 10-13. (d) I Atene. Te tautohetohetanga Paora i roto i te whare karakia. Mahi 17: 15-17. II. Ko nga whakaakoranga i te Hiwi Areopaka. (a) Nga Apotoro i roto i nga tohunga. Mahi 17: 18-21. (b) Ko te "Atua Ngaro," nana nei i lianga te ao. Mahi 17: 22-24 ; Hipcru 1:2: Mohia 4:2; Xiwhai Tuatoru 9 : 15. (c) Ko te tangata he uri no te Atua. Hipera 12: 9 ; Matiu 6:9; Kenehi 1: 26. (d) Ko te tikanga te ripenatatanga. Mahi 17: 30; 3: 19-20; Arami 2: 24; Ako. me nga Kawe. 19: 31. (e) Te ai'anga o te hunga mate. Mahi 17: 31-32; IToani 11 : 24-2(5. Korerotia te Upoko 40 o Arami me te Wahanga 7(5 te Ako. me nga Kawe. Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 2.5 Ratapu tuatoru, Akuhata 15, 1926. AKORANGA 21. Ko te Mutunga te Mihama Tuarua i Haere ai a Paora. J. J Koriiiiti 1110 te kotahi tau me te hawhe. Nga Mahi 18: 11. (a) Tana nohoanga i a Akuira raua ko Pirihira. Mahi 18: 1-2. (b) Ka tika hold te utu mo te kai-mahi. 1. Ko nga akoranga a te Karaiti. Ruka 10: 1-7. 2. A Paora raua ko te kai-mahi teneti. Mahi 18 : 3 ; 20 : te. 3. Ko te akoranga a Paora mo te utu. Mahi 20: 33; Koriiiiti Tuatahi 9: 18; Koriniti Tuarua 7: 2; 11 : 7-9. 4. Ko te whakakitenga nga ra muri nei mo te ako kaua he utu. Akoranga me nga Kawenata 84: 78-92. (c) Ko te piringa ano Eliraha raua ko Timoti kia Paora. Mahi 18:4-5. (d) Ko te whakatahuritanga Kirihipu, Kaiu, me te whanau katoa a Tepana. Mahi L8: 8; Koriniti Tuatahi 1 : 14-16 ; 1(5: 15. Tiroliia iho tenei: Ko tetahi vvahanga nga halii waho c tohc na ko te whanau Tepana he tamariki kan. he mea iriiri, engari kaore he kaupapa tenei whakapono. (e) Ko te whakakitenga te p . Mahi 18: 9-10. (f) Ko te inainiga mai Paora ki te aroaro nga iwi Kario. Mahi 18: L2-8. II. Ko te haerenga atu Paora i Koriniti ki Epeha, ki Miliaria, ki llii-iiharaina, 111c Anatioka. Mahi IS: L8-23, Ratapa tuawha, Akuhata 22, 1926 AKORANGA 22. Ko te Haerenga Tuatoru Paora i te Mihana.. I. Te \\ haknunga i nga hahi, (a) I Karatia, i Pirikia. M.ihi L8: 23. 1 1. K .vn he answered from The written word, "It is written again, Thou shall not tempt the Lord thy God." Jesus was sufficiently well acquainted with the history of jsrad to know of such manifestations of God's power as occurred in the days of Moses with Israel crossing the Bed Sea, of bring- ing water Mom the rock, and other like incidents. The Example of Jesus: What i1 bids as do. "If" yon have received remission of sins through baptism, wjiy is it worth while to devote as much time, perhaps go to greal trouble, perchance pay ou1 so much money m connection with the Church . ; "If" you have received the wonderful promises given in [In Hon 1 ol the Lord, whj can'1 yon sit down and wail for their fulfilment .' Why accept serious responsibilities such as are imposed upon official acl ivity in I lie ' lunch ! Why take unnecessary risks physical, financial, spiritual? What blessings have been poured out upon as when we have followed Iks example and resisted temptation 1 Read Ta Imagers "Jesus the Christ," pages ! :> >  lo illustration mid applications, and all beai Htanl ly in mind thai Ihc *ri \i but I hi 220 TE KARERE Hurac2I, I926 the lesson being the determination oi' what the example of Jesus as depicted in the story, bids us do, and to draw out testimonies of blessings following. Second Sunday, Augusts, 1926 Eeview Questions. 1. What effect docs the example of a good man or woman have upon you? 2. What circumstances or event occuring in the life of Isaac has impressed you and why? 3. Name two outstanding accomplishments in the life ot* Jacob that make him great in your estimation. 4. Could Joseph have attained to what he did if he had not served the Lord? Give three reasons for your answer. Third Sunday, August 15, 1926 Lesson 18. Moses as Leader and Deliverer of the Israelites. Text: Kxodus, chapters 5-12. Objective: To show how man's leadership under God is the highest leadership of all. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: I. Moses called to leadership. II. Moses visited Pharaoh asking the deliverance of his people. The plagues. III. Israel released. [V. Moses as leader in the wilderness. Questions for Teachers. 1. What Priesthood did Moses hold, and were the people able to live up to its requirements f 2. (Jive examples of leadership similar to that of Moses. Fourth Sunday, August 22, 1926. Lesson 19. Moses as Orator and Statesman. Text: Exodus, chapters 13-20 and others listed in body of outline. Objective: To show how man's leadership under God is the highesl leadership of all. Hurae 21, 1926 TE K ARE RE Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: I. As a statesman and Law-giver Moses has probably exercised a greater influence than any other character except Jesus. 1. The Ten Commandments embrace the principles of primary law, and these principles are accepted not only by Christians, but by Mohammedan nations as well. (Exodus 20:3-17.) 2. Many of the laws of Moses are decidedly practical and humane. a. Charity for the poor. (Lev. 19-9-10; 25:35-46). b. Equalization of wealth. Redemption of the land of servants. (Lev. 25:1-34 and 47-o5.) II. Moses presented religious truths in the form of wonderful orations. (The book of Deuteronomy comprises chiefly four orations by Moses. The fourth one is contained in Chapters 29, 30. \)v. Richard Green fcloulton says: "When I was a beginner in literary studies I recollect setting myself as an exercise to read through on three successive days, each at a single sitting, an oration of Demosthenes, one of Burke, and the Book of Deuteronomy ... I well recoiled the feeling 1 had at the time that neither of the other two rose to the oratorical level of Moses.") Note: in closing the discussion of Moses, il would be impressive 10 have some good reader read to the class the poem, ••The Burial of Moses," by Mrs. Cecil Frances Alexander. It may be found in "Choice Readings," by Cummock, as well as in several other volumes of readings. Il is suggested thai ii' available the teachers gel the General Conference sermons of Presidenl Grant and compare with teachings of .Moses as to profound religious truth being combined with keen practical wisdom. (See Emprovemcnt Era, January, L922.) Questions for Teachers. 1. Summarize the life or Moses and name five great attributes of character that liis life exemplified. 2. How do >oii explain his supreme greatness! Fifth Sunday, August 29, 1926 Lesson :.  . Objective: To tench that those who serve the Ix>rd serve 22| TE KARERE Hurac2I, 1926 one Who is powerful to aid, while those who labor for Satan have no support in time of need. (See Alma 30:69.) Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. All the elass should read carefully the whole chapter. 2. Special assignments: a. Korihor's teachings. Alma 30:6, 12-18. b. Korihor in the lands of Jershon and Giddonah. Alma 30:19-29. c. Have one student memorise the words of Alma and another the words of Korihor and have them give from verses o'O to 49 as a dialogue, to make a diversion. d. Korihor's confession and end. Almo 30:50-60. Memorize Alma 30 :(>(). Draw attention to the following words of Elder Rudger Clawson, President of the Council of the Twelve: "Prom earliest boyhood 1 was religiously inclined. One of the shaping forces of my character was of the reading of the Book of Mormon. Early in life I became interested in this remarkable work, which I read and read, drawing from its divine pages inspiration and hope. Faith sprang up in my breast. By a careful study of thai glorious book, well defined ideas of right and wrong were firmly fixed in my youthful mind, and I was thus measurably able to withstand the temptations thai assailed me, and was thus able to escape many of the sins and follies to which some of the young were addicted. With advanced years the conviction lias constantly grown upon me that the Book of Mormon is one of the grandest books of the age." Questions for Teachers. 1. Compare the teachings of Korihor (Alma 30:13-15) with the belief of many in the world to-day. 2. Quote Alma 30 : 44, and discuss its appropriateness as an answer for any who may ask for signs. Fifth Sunday, August 29, 1926 Lesson 20. Zoramite Manner of Prayer. The Poor Accept the Gospel. Text: Alma, chapters 31 and 32. Objective: To teach that we should ''worship God in Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE 225 whatsoever place wo may be, in spirit and in truth.'' (Sec Alma 34:35.) Supplementary References: Matt.: 6:5-8; Luke 18:!)-14. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Have class read the whole text. 2. Special assignments: a. Alma again goes forth to preach. Alma 31:1-11. 1). Vain worship. Alma 31 :12-23. c. Alma's prayer. Alma 31:24-35. d. The appeal of the poor. Alma 32 : l-5. 3. The answer made by Alma 32r6-43; also chapters 33 and 34 should be carefully read by the teacher and given briefly to the class, assigning such passages as 32:11-13; 32:21; 32 -.4042 : 33:8; :J4 : 1 7-2S to different pupils to recite, and have all pupils mark these and oilier passages in their own books. Questions fcr Teachers. 1. Point oul the main features in the Zoramite manner of prayer thai would make ii most objectionable to the Lord. 2. Define whal you think to be true worship. KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT First Sunday, August I, 1926. Uniform Past Day Lesson. Topic : The Tcmplat ion of Jesus. "Thou shall no1 live by bread alone," etc., Matt 4:7. Text : .Malt hew 4:5-8. Time : A t'tcr (he bapl ism ol JCSUS. Place: The Holy City. Objective: Courage to resisl temptation brings strength. I. Satan lakes Christ to the Holy City. I. Prom t he wilderness w here | [e Pasted. Sctteth Him (in tli.' pinnacle of the Tcmplo. 1 1, lie attempts to t  : 1-2. 1 1 1 \'_i;i akonga a lloani kai-iriiri. lloani 1 : ."."» I'i (Ci A llcini. me lloani, he tuakana he teina hoki raua. 1 I 1 Nga taina a (leperi. Ruka 5: 10 L2; Matiu 1 : 21 23 (2 ' Nga i.miii.i .1 (laroini tcina >> Mori \n haca «» to Karaiti. Matin "7 : 56; Maka Hi: 1. A [ioani i tinci aroliatia nuitia u llm. Lloani 19: 26 '.'7; 21 20, (d ) \ Piripi Petanaira   K.iriii. 230 TE KARERE Hurae 21 , 1926 (1) Te mea tuatahi i kitea a tinanatia ai e Mm. Iloani 1 : 43. (2) A nana hold i matau ai a Xatanahira kia te Karaiti. Iloani 1 : 45-51. (.3) A Piripi hoki i to wahi i whangaia ai te i-inia iiiaiio (5000). Hoani 6: 1-14. (  in at 011 \\ henua. a. Ko tc ngohengohe ki nga ture. 1) Ko to awliina ki te whakakalui i nga ture. 2 Ko te whakanui ki te kara to taton whenua. .1 Ko tc whakaarahanga   t  King! 1 1. mm | tc II   \onna i E KARERE Hurae 21, 1 026 "Armistice Day" ko te ra i mutu ai te whawhai nui i rhahuc ake nei. I). Ko 1c whakanui i te kara. Ka nga lioia. Ka luiiia te "Union Jack'' ka maati nga hoia i mua te kara me te ara te ringa matau ki ratou rae he whakanui, i te kara, me te whakautu pcra inai hoki to raton Apiha whakahaere. c. I nga kura. Ko nga tamariki ka maati ka tu ranei i mua te kara i tc hutinga*. Ka pera ano te whakanui nga ringa i niuri ka waiata, i te waiata ''God Save the King. " KI TE ETITA. Ko te Matenga o Piki Waerea Tciici tetahi mea whakapouri kua pa mai kei a matau kei nga tangata Korongata nei. Mo tc 5 nga ra Hune ka mate tetahi o matau nei pakeke, ara a Piki Waerea. He tangata ngakaii mahaki tenei, lie tangata atawhai i tc manenc. Kahore tetahi mahi pakanga raruraru i niahia e ia i waenganui i a matau. lie tangata tu marae iioki ia, he tangata tautoko i nga whakaaro nunui i waenganui i to matau marae, tautoko i nga tikanga tc Rongopai Ihu Karaiti. Tona karangatanga i te Tohungatanga Arona, lie Kai-Whakaako. Mahue iho i a ia tona lioa wahine me a raua mokopuna nui noa atu i muri i a ia, kai ai i tenei ika nui i tc hakura me tc tangi. Ka rjro tc matua. no tc 7 o nga ra Mei i mate ;ii tona taniaiti a Koro Vy.acrea, c wha tonu nga wiki i muri mai i tc matenga atu tona tamaiti ka mate atu ko ia. Mai i tc ra i mate ai tona tamaiti ka iti tona whakaaro ki tona ake tinana i tc nui tona aroha me tona tangi ki tona tamaiti. Ko nga korero mo tona tamaiti kua oti ano tc panui i roto i Te Karere. Ko ona tan e 63. Heoi i te kaha tona tangi pouri mo tona tamaiti kua mate ia. kua rite ona whakaaro tangi ki tona tamaiti, kua tae atu ia ki tona, tamaiti. Heoi, mihi mai, tangi mai e ona whanaunga i roto i enei hapu Ng&ti Kahungunu, Xgati Rakai]>aka, Xgata Tuwharetoa, mc era liapu tenei tangata. Heoi ano, R. M. KAMAU. Hurae 21, 1920 te karere .3$ He Piki i runga i te Tumatakuru ? E korero ana i roto i nga Qiangai te hunga kaore e pai ana ki tenei kura ara te kura a te "Moniona," he kura mani- heko, ahakoa e mohiotia ana etahi hua pai me etahi main pai e puta niai ana i roto i tenei kura. Kaore te hunga puhaehae ana ki tenei kura e ki lie pai, engari lie kura weriweri, whaka- rihariha, ko t ;ii ki to ui 11 i To Karero kia haero ki nga marao te luinga e whakahe mai n:i i i  hlm Ra Muri N r oi. K tunianako atu ana toku noi ngakau kia vvhai hua taua nialii n hau i roto i nga po me nga pa tenei koanga, l\di;i 11.-1 ano nga mahi 1 ki ana hoki ngn koroua »> nclic pa, "Ki to koro   tc l'a Tote, me i male ia. Katahi a Karanata ka moliio ki tc tikanga   nga kupu o ic iooi n te kaumatua ra, "Kua wliakaritea noatia atu hoki ion matenga  i, 1926 ME PEHEA E RIRO AI NGA TANGATA KI TE KAHA A TE ATUA HEI WHAKAORA ? Ka mea a Paora, "Kahore hoki oku whakama ki te Rongo- pai te Karaiti: ko te kaha hold ia te Atua hei whakaora mo nga tangata katoa e whakapono ana." lie aba taua kaha i roto i te Rongo-pai? Ko te kaha i roto i te Rongo-pai koia to Wairua Tapu. E ki ana a Paora : 1 Koriniti 12: 8-10. "E homai ana hoki ki tetahi e te Wairua te kupu whakaaro; ki tetahi atu te kupu ihatau, lie mea na tana Wairua ano; Ki tetahi ko te whakapono, na tana Wairua ra ano; ki tetahi atu ko nga mana whakaora, na tana Wairua ano; Ki tetahi atu ko nga nialii merekara ; ki tetahi atu ko te niahi poropiti; ki tetahi atu ko te matauranga ki nga wairua; ki tetahi atu ko nga reo ke; ki tetahi atu ko te vvhaka- maoritanga i nga reo." .Ma konei ka kite tatou, ki te whiwhi nga tangata ki tana wairua katahi ia ka whiwhi ki te kaha te Atua. No reira ko te tino take mo tatou, me pewhea e whiwhi ai nga tangata ki taua wairua 1 He alia te huarahi c riro ai nga tangata ki tana kaha ? E ki ana to tatou Poropiti a Hohepa Mete, ko te huarahi e riro ai nga tangata ki taua wairua, ara "ko te whakapono ki te Ariki ki a Ihu Karaiti; tuarua ko te ripenatatanga ; tuatoru ko te iriiringa rtimaki hei nmrunga hara ; tuawha ko te whaka- pakanga nga ringaringa mo te hoatntanga te Wairua Tapu." Na, mehemea he poropiti tika a Hohepa Mete, e tautokona ana ia e nga poropiti onamata. Titiro ki te kauwhaUtanga a Pita i te Ra o to Petekoha (Mahi '2: 39) i te mea kna kite a Pita he whakapono 1a te whakaminenga, no to mea i patai ratou, ".ATe aha matou?" Ko te whakahoki a Pita, ^Ripenata, kia iriiria tena tangata, tena tangata o kouton i rnnga i te ingoa o Ihu Kai'aiti, hei murunga hara ; a ka riro mai i a konton te mea homai, ara te Wairua Tapn." A tenei ano, titiro ki Xga Mahi S: 14-20. I te mea kna uiohio a Pita rana ko Ilemi kna whanan enei tangata i te wai, ara nga tangata na Piripi i iriiri, ka tae atu a Pita raua ko Hurae 21, 1 rE KARERE 239 Jlciiii. me 1" whakapa iho o raua ringaringa ki runga ki o ratou mahunga kia whanau ai ratou i te wairua. Na ka kite a Haimona mi te whakapakanga o nga ringaringa ka whiwhi cnei tangata ki te Wairua Tapu. Kua mohio lioki a Paora ki te tika o enei whanautanga, no tc mea i te \\ a ka tac atu in ki Epiha (Nga Mahi 1!): 2-4) ka patai atu ia ki nga tangata, "Kua riro ranei tc Wairua Tapu i a kputou i muri i to koutou whakaponotanga "( Ano ra ko ratou ki a ia. Kiano matou i rongo noa he Wairua Tapu tenei. Ka mea ia ki a ratou, 1 iriiria oti koutou ki roto ki te aha.' Ka mea ratou, Ki roto ki 1a lioani iriiri. \a lea mea a Paora, Ta Eloani iriiri he iriiri ripenata. I mea ia ki te iwi, kia whakapono ratou ki tetahi e liaere mai ana i muri i a ia, ara ki a Karaiti Ihu." Na, e hoa ma, me ata rapu koutou i enei rarangi karai- piture, no te mea e korc enei tangata c taca te whakapohche i a Paora. Kua mohio a Paora he tangata tika a Eloani, he tangata vvliai in ana ia mo te iriiringa, a kei te mohio nga tangata tika katoa ki te kahore te tangata e whanau i te wai i te wairua lioki c korc ia e ahei tc lomo ki te rangatiratanga a te .\tu.!. Aia ka mea a lioani ki 1c iwi (Maka i "Ko ahau nei, he iriiri laku i a koutou ki te wai : mana i;i koutou c iriiri ki te Wairua Tapu." Ko enei tangata kei Epiha, kihai ratou i rongo ko te Wairua Tapu tetahi mea. \'a kua mohio a Paora ehara tenei i !  nga rarangi, a ka rongo ratou, ka iriiria ano ratou i runga i tc ingoa o tc Ariki a Ihu, ara ka iriiri ratou ki tc iriiringa tika na tetahi tangata kua vvhai mana. Na ka whakapakia iho nga ringaringa a Paora ki runga ki a ratou ,-i k;i tac mai ic Wairua Tapu ki a ratou. Na ka korerotia i ra1 (>u nga reo ke, ka poropil i iioki, M.i Loin i ka kite te huarahi e w \\\\\ hi ai whanautanga » tc wai mc )«• Wairua lioki, ara h kaha Atua lici w hakaora m ki ratou i runga i ta te Itewera i pai ai. I tc wa tc matenga atu e penci ana te uoho a enei karailie wairua e rua, tae 110a ki te aranga tuai, te hunga tika i roto i te whakahari, te huuga kino i roto i te pouritanga, hei te wa pa ano hoki kua rite i te Atua. c ara mai ai te hunga mate,   me 1 ; ' ,r tangata kia rite ki to tatou hoa, tuakana hoki, he p whai ho . : e tika hoki i roto i A hoki i Tona (i matenga mo ake tonu atu mutii atu .,■ men i m ;i ll " 1 ' ' 244 TK KARERE Huiae2I, 1926 turanga i roto i te Miutara, trie tana utu tonu i tana takoha i nga ruaraina katoa, a no te tatanga rawatanga te pan te rua tan, ka korero tahi ano raua ko tana Pihopa. (Taria te roanga) H e Fowh i r i Ki Te Karere: E rere ra e te manu tangi pai ki nga waahi katoa e tae atu ai koe, man e whakaatu atu ki nga tangata katoa e noho ana i runga i enei motu e rua, ara i te Aotearoa me te Waipounamu. E penei atu ana me haere katoa mai ratou ki to matou Hui Pariha ka tu nei ki te Kiri- kiri takiwa o Hauraki nei a te 31 o Hurae me te I o nga ra o Akuwhata, 1926. Haere mai kia kai tahi tatou i nga kai whakatewairua rne nga kai whakatetinana ano hoki. Haere mai! Haere mail Haere mai! Na Anara Tarapata, Tumuaki Pirimona Watene, Tumuaki Peka Haere mai! Haere mai!! Haere rmi!!! Tenei matou o te Peiwhairangi ka powhiri atu i te Hu- nga Tapu katoa, nga hoa aroha, Maori, Pakeha, aha atu ranei, kia hui katoa mai ki tenei oa tatou Hui Pariha; tenei ka tu ki Mangamuka i te 28 me te 29 o nga ra o Akuhata. E kii ra a Ihu, "E kore e ora te tangata i te taro kau, e- ngari i nga kupu katoa a te Atua." No reira e te Hunga Ta- pu, e nga hoa aroha, tenei matou ka powhiri atu i a koutou katoa kia haere mai ki te kai i te taro o te ora. Na to koutou hoa, na Apiata Meha (R.R. Tiwinihana, Tumuaki Takiwa) Ko te Hunga Tapu o Korongata takiwa o Heretaunga nei kei te takatu i to rato.i marae kia tu he Hui Pariha kei tenei takiwa i roto i te marama o Hepetema nei, engari ko te tino taima hei tunga kahore ano kia whakapumautia e te Timuaki. No reira e te Hunga Tapu, kia mataara, tera pea ka panuitia te tino powhiri i roto o Te Karere mo Akuhata. Hurae 21, 1926 TE KARERE Ko nga Kai-Kauwhau te Mahia Iriparete Pom are Te Amo Tengaio Whakahe Matenga Ruka Rarere Tiema Taurima Henare Taurima Perea Reupene Tungane Reupene Runga Tengaio Rangi Tengaio Hirini Christy Hoani Kemara Hohepa Te Kauru Hirini Kemara Paora Hapi Friday Pirihi Tere Waerea Wi Mete Ora Noa Tengaio Raiha Tengaio 1 iemi Mete Waaka Toroaiwhiti Pita Reihana Pene Areta Kerei Potiki Kahuroa Keita Kahuroa Heremia Mae he Ray P. Thompson Hetakia Pirihi Hori Haere Tamihana Pere Miria Kamau Peri' Te Kauru Piripi Epeniha Kaihote Ko nge ingoa enei o nga kai-kauwhau Mahia mo Hu- rae Akuhata me Hepetema. E hoa ma, titiro, kua ma te mara, kua rite mo te kotinga, no reira ko ia e hiahia ana ki te kokoti, tukua ia kia aki ih  i tana toronaihi i runga i tona kaha, kokoti ai, i te roanga te ra, kia purangatia ai mo to- na wairua he oranga mutunga kore 1 roto 1 te kingit Alua. Na tO koUtOU trina, l II. Anihana 1 Nuhaka 1 J Mahanga 3 1 Oraka J Waikokopu 4 2 1 Nuhaka / Waikokopu 3 1 \ Mahanga J Nuhaka 2 4 \ Whakaki J Oraka 1 3 \ Ki Roto J Wairoa 2 4 ) Wairoa J Ki Roto 3 I ) Mahanga J Tuahuru 4 2 1 Tuahuru J Wairoa I 3 S Oraka 2 J Tauapata 4 \ Ki Roto J Whakaki 4 2 1 Mohaka J Waihu 3 1 ) Wairoa 2 i Reinga 1 ) Mohaka j Nuhaka 1 3 \ Nuhaka 2 j Putahi 4 J Nuhaka 1 j Wairoa 1 1 Te I'hi 4 ) Putahi 2 TE KARERE I [urae 21, 1926 KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather 1 1-0 Book of Mormon, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6 " " " , Half Leather 9-0 •' " " , Leather 10-0 & 15-0 Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth ^-0 " " ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 , Leather 3-6 Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 " " " " Me Nga tiimene, Leather 3 in I Il-b " " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0 " " " " , Leather 15-0 Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-J " " " ", Leather 15-0 Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 10 SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS The Restoration of the Gospel What Jesus Taught Kindergarten Plan Book, Kesler & Morris Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Morton SONG BOOKS Songs of Zion, Cloth " " " , Leather... "... Deseret Song Books, Cloth " " " , Leather Kindergarten & Primary Song Book DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORX3 Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage Vitality of Mormonism Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson Restoration of the Gospel, Widtsoe Joseph Smith's Teachings - Life of Christ for the Young, Weed Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage Essentials in Church History, Smith Bible Ready Refcence 4-0 5.0 36 4-6 66 3-0 6b 3-0 8^3 4-6 6-0 40 3-6 40 8-9 6-9 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Motris 6-0 KO J. H. TINIK1NI TF KAI TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KORONGATA, HASTINGS, H. B. fetw gC^^^g^gpCC^ ^^i^rs^ssiir^^ | WAHANGA 20 AKUHATA 25, 1 926 NAM. A 8 i 1^,% , *^ Ko te Puke Kumora '•KA iti ano tau kupu i rolo i te puehi 1 , 11 ka rite tou reo ki to te tangata i te atua maori. he mea puta ake i te whenua, ka kowhetewhete ake tau ku- pu i roto i te puehu." Ihaia 29 : 4. ;-o w, ESS m I   Koroniti. I\.»iiniti Tuatahi L6 - Tirohia ili»» tcnei: l\  to pukapuka noi he mea tuhituhi atu na Paora i te tatanga pan te toru tau tana noho i Bpeha. I !. Ko te haerenga   i t« pukapuka hiatahi, i Makeronia 248 tk KARERii Akuhata 25, .y26 (b) Te pukapuka ki te Hunga o Roma. Tirohia ilio ano: I tuhia mai i Koroiniti hei whaka- at n tahi ki nga Eiunga Tapu o nga Hurai, a o Qga tauiwi hokij ko te aroha me te whakaoranga a te At na i tau ki a ratou kaioa. III. Ko te haerenga o Paora i te akau o te moana o Ahia Maina. (a) Te whakaoranga o Utiku i Toroa. (1>; Te poroporoakitanga ki nga Hunga Tapu o Ahia. Mahi 20-: L8-36. Ata tirohia ng, frhakaakoranga i put a i reira. (e) Te poropititanga   A.kaJ)U i Toroniai. Ratapu tuatoru, Hepetema 19, 191:6. AKORANGA 25. Ko te Toronga Whakamutunga a Paora i Hiruharama. A. Ko tana powhiritanga atu e nga tuakana ki iliruharama. 1. Ko tana ripoata o tana mahi mihana i waenganui i nga tauiwi, mo nga tau e toru. Mahi 21: 17-19. 2. Ko tana whakaaturanga i nga mahi i oti i roto i nga tauiwi. Mahi 21 : 19: Roma 15: IS. 3. Ko te pataitanga o te kauwhau a Paora. Malii 21 : 20- 22. 4. Ko t . 4. Te whakapuakitanga i te karanga a te Atua i a ia kia malii i roto i nga tauiwi. Mahi 22: 17-21. Tirohia ano Nga Mahi 9: 15; Roma 11: 13. B. Te po tuatahi Paora ki roto i te pa (castle) Hiruharama. 1. Te takatakainga ona ki te peha kau. Malii 22: 25-28. 2. Ko tana kiinga i a ia he tangata no te pa Roma, a korc ake ia i tapua. Mahi, 22: 29; 16: 37. P4KHH4 TH FO LOGIC* L "GREAT BIBLICAL CmKACTIKS" I ir*t Sundav, September 5, 1926. FAST DAT TOPIC The Example of Jesus: What it Bids us l) . The Third Temptation. Text : Mati hew 4 :8-ll. Probably must  i* the casual readers of the scriptures fail to see the greal significance to  ii  - KAKBKl Ak ihata 2J>, 1926 c ( >hcdient, loyal, humble, 2 :20. d. ! :ho,sen Queen, 2 :15-17. III. Privileges of a Persian Queen. a. Limital ions, 4:11. i). Queen Vishti's banishment, 1:10-21. IV. Esther as Queen. a. Loyalty and faith, 1. Mordccai's appeal to save her people, 4:1-14. 2. Her appeal tor the faith ;m . II is groat speech. (I Sam. 12.) 4. Lord says: " His character was reproachless. He was. indeed, one of the best men that ever lived, universally revered while 1 living, and equally mourned when he died. '* Questions for Teachers, i. To whai do yon ascribe Samuel's great wisdom and power. 2. Whal great lesson comes to you from the study of the life of Samuel? INTKRMEtmTH DKPaKTMHM "lill: BOOK OF MORMON" First Sunday, Septemeber 5, I92(> Uniform Fast Day Lesson. Sh roe as Fakeha Theological Chss. See page 249 General Subjed : The example of .Jesus: what it bids us do. Special Topic: The Third Temptation. Adaption for Intermediate Department. Refer to the notes for .May and June. Use the copious suggestions in the outline in the Theological Department. This temptation centres around power. Every boy likes to be ;i loader, ;i captain of ;i team, or ;i patrol leader. lie can grasp the significance of this appeal to the opportunity to rule. 'To lead is laudable, provided our does not need to lose one's self-respect and liberty, in order to lead. Some public office holders secure their positions only by selling their liberty to some political ring with ulterior motives Such a man loses in character development. That person who sells himself to any power, is forever under Its influence and control. We can readily see that we should resist temptation lO do base things, and make ourselves lable tO those powers \\h  ,7:24-:)7; chapter 38'; chapter 39; 40:11-14. I 1 might be interesting to have pupils give brief sketches of llelaman. Shiblon and Corianton from the Dictionary of the Book of Mormon. Make the lesson alive. Try to picture Alma and his sons at this time. (^ues on for Teachers, 1. Discuss the warning given in Alma 37:28, -I'M. as it might &ppty to present times. 2. How may the words of Alma to his son CorianthOn, Alma 29:11-13, he fitting to young Latter-day Saints? Third Sundav, September 19. 1926 LESSON 22. FOES PROM WITHOUT AND TRAITORS WITHIN THE NATION. Text : Alma, chapters 4: > >-4C>. Objective: To leach that in all our si niggles, if we have faith in the Lord He will he our powerful friend. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. II would he well for 1 he teacher to give Alma 43:1-25 Akuhata 2->, 1926 TE karere 257 as an introduction to the lesson, to make clear the mo- lives of the Nephites and Lamanites at this period of history, and to introduce the leaders, etc. 2. Special assignments: (a) Alma 43:26-54. (b) Appoint two students to give the dialogue between Moroni and Zerahemnah, Alma 44:1-11. (e) Zerahemnah humbled. Alma 44:12-24. (d) The Title of Liberty, Alma 4(i. Passages for pupils to memorise: Alma 43:48-50; 44 -.'3, 4; 46:12-18. Note: The events related in the above assignments are of a stirring nature. Impress each pupil who is given a part with the necessity of reciting them in a way to arouse deep interest. Questions for Teachers. 1. Mention the advantages which the Nephites had over the Lamanites both spiritually and temporally. 2. Point out the characteristics of true leadership in Moroni. Fourth Sunday, September 26, 1926 LESSON 23. WAR AND WARRIORS. Text : Alma 47-51. Obective: To teach thai in war time or in peace righteous living increases our joy. Su^i'i ions on Preparation and Presentation: For special assignment : (1) Amalickiah's wickedness. Alma 47. (2) Moroni's preparations. Alma 48 :7-'J.">. (3) Laminates disappointed. Alma 4!). ( 4) The happy Nephites. Alma 50:1-24. (.")) Quarrels between brethren. Alma 49. (6) Kingmcn and Freemen. Alma 51:1-21. (7) Victory for the Lamanites. Alma 51:22-27. (No1 more than lour or five minutes should he allowed far eaeh of these parts, in which time the main points can be given in a way in amuse interest in 1 he class to read the si. tries from tic- Book of Mori. mci | Note: A blackboard should he used with these wartime IE KAktRK Akuhata 25, 1926 lessons. From the descriptions given of the fortifications a pupil might be able to make drawings on the board, also to Locate the position of the different cities that were fortified. Questions for Teachers. 1. Contrast the motives of Moroni and Amaiickiah as leaders. 2 Review the time of happiness, as related in Alma *>0:l-24, and point 011I the inward causes for it. KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT First Sunday, September 5, 1926. PAST DAY LESSON. Topic: 'i'lie Tempatation of Jesus. "Thou sJudl worship the Lord thy God and Him only shall thou serve." Text : Matt. 4:8-10. Time: After Christ's forty day Last. Place: On s high mountain in wilderness. Objective: l>; resisting temptation we grain the approval o!' God the Father. !. Satan pleads Cor Jesus to worship Jlim. 1. He shows Him all the kingdoms of the wo-Id and the glory of them, a. Man\- countries. 1). Great possessions. Palaces, churches, homes, fields, flowers, people, and their homage, riches, pearls, diamonds, crowns, etc. 2. Offers all these things if Jesus will fall down and worship him. 1 1. Jesus Rejects Satan 's  ffer. 1. dvt thee hence. 2. "Thou shah worship the Lord thy God/'' etc. •'!. Satan leavcth Him. 1 1 1 The Approval of Ood the Father. 1. He sends inward joy and peace. 2. Angels come down and minister unto Him. Application • When and how shall these little children resist temptation? Specific instances. Mother said, "Johnny, please remain inside the yard to-day with baby sister." Soon Akuliata 25, 1926 TE KARLRE 259 Tom came along and said, "(.'ome on over, Johnny, I have some- thing to show you," etc. What should Johnny say or do? Memory Gem: Is there a wrong deed that wants to be done? Don't let it, my dear, don't let it; Just do two kind deeds insteads of one And that will help you forget it. Rest Exercise: Have the children suggest kind deeds to do lor others. Dramatize the suggestions. Clean the yard for an old lady or a widow; paint a fence; clear the weeds from the ('itches, etc. Song: "Do what is right," Desert t S.S. Song Book. Second Sunday, September 12, 1926 Topic: The Story of the Pioneers. Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Lesson 5$. History of Utah, or History of Church. Objective: Courage to do righl wins the favour of God and man. Suggest ions: 1. Show pictures of Pioneers. a. The way they travelled. 1). The count ry they crossed. r. The valley as il looked to 1 hem. 2. Their sacrifice was .1 greater gain. a. Their love for Iheir religion was greater than for worldly goods. I). Their greal faith and trusl in a higher power c. Their strength of character, •'! I lov. 1 heir example ran h i;iin;i! i/e t lie children '* Drive the oxen ; push the handcart ; chop down 'hushes;  . Ko te whakatahuritanga Qga mano e torn. Mahi *_ } : 6-47. 4. K  te whakaoranga to tangata kopa e Pita raua ko Eioani. Mahi 3: L-9. 5. Ko te whiwhinga a Pita ki te tuaia Die te kaha nui i miiri n te tukunga iho te Wairua Tapu. Mahi 2: 14: 3: L2-6; -! : 8-12. (j. Ko te hoatutanga ki a Pita i te mana e niatau ai e kaha ai ki te titiro atu ki roto i nga niea katoa. Mahi 5: 1-11. 7. lie tokomaha nga turoro i whakaorangia. Mahi 5: L2-17. Ko te u'hakaputanga ki waho te whan- lierehere e tda hi anahera. Mahi 5: 17-21 . 9. Te mahi me te whakamatenga   ^ I ; i 1 1 ; 1 Imki i ;i tatou ki te w haka fil   nga ropu huihuinga tangata k  te tu he wehewehenga i roto i tetahi whanau ki te inea ka haere te tane lie huarahi puta ke i tu te wahine ki a raua uei takaro. Kaore rawa lie whanau e tino kotahi ki te kore e kitea e nga tamariki lie ngahau i roto i nga whakahaere ngahau a nga niatua a whaea hoki. Ko te wa pai hei timatanga i te mea ano e ri.-iki ana nga tamariki, e taea te whakarite tetahi ahiahi whakangahau, ;i haereere a waho ranei, e whai ngakau ai ratou ki roto i taua nica. Kotahi po, hei po ngahau i te kainga i te niarama, a mi nga tamariki e awhina i roto i te whakarite i nga takoro, me nga waiata, me te taha ki nga kai (refreshments). I'] taea te whakarite enei whakaritenga hei whakangahau i te w lianau katoa. 1. Ko te waiata a takitahi, a ma te whanau katoa ranei. '2. Ko nga takaro. .'I. Ko nga waiata whakatangitangi ma nga mea e mohio ana ki te whakatangitangi. 4. Ko te korcro pukapuka, a vvhakaatu ranei i etahi korero purakau papai. 5. Ko te tuku i nga kotiro kia whai wahi i roto i te whakarite, me te tuwha haere i nga kai. Ko te whakarite haereerenga mo te whanau i nga hararei, e tika ana hoki kia whakaritea kia kaua ai tena, tena, e haere i runga ake i tona ake wliakaaro. Me te wliakarite wawe i roto i nga whakaaro nga tamariki, te tikanga whakarite tahi me te whanau i nga hararei e man mai ai te whakaaro   te whanau me nga tamariki hoki i raro i 1a nga matua, me ta nga whaea tiaki. Ko te hoki whakamuri nga mahara ki nga wa whakahari nga tuakana teina me nga tuahine, me nga matua whaea hoki. ka riro hei pupuri i te whakaaro ki te kainga, ki roto i nga ngahau te tangata. KO TE NAMA A TE ATUA (He roanga atu) Inn Hoori e neraro atu ka whanau a Pirihira i tana tamaiti, Akuhata 25, 1920 TE K ARE RE 263 heoi ka koa noa iho raua ki ta raua taniaiti. I hokona e Hoori tana whare piha ka tangohia mai e ia tetehi whare hukapapa hei rongoatanga niiti. Ko te nianaaki a te Atua i a ia e nui rawa atu ana. I tetehi rangi ka haere a Pirihira ki te hui a te hahi, te kitenga o te Pihopa i a ia, ka inca atu, kei whea a Hoori, katahi ia ka ki atu kua riro ki t( tango kau, hipi mana kei apopo ia ka hoki mai. Kihai i pai a ji ihira ki te haerenga tana lioa tane ki te tera mahi i te rtatapu. Katahi te Pihopa ka mea atu kei te pai noa atu, he tangata pai a Hoori alma nei koina ke te ra e hiahiatia ana e tana tangata hei kiietanga ia ia. He wahine tino u hoki a Pirihi/aki nga tikanga te Hahi, na kaore e pai kia Qiahi tana tane i etahi mahi ahua he. I te nui haere te tupi. te mahi hukapapa a Hoori ka pan ke te nuinga o tana taima ! :i ana mahi ake te tukunga iho ka wareware haere ia ki nga tnahi o te Miutara. Ka whakaaro te Pihopa lie pai rawa me korero ano ia ki a Hoori. I tetehi rangi ka haere te Pihopa Ida kite ia Hori i tana whare hukapapa. Tana taenga atu ka whakaaturia ia e Soon ki nga mahi katoa rot,) ? tana whare. Ka mutu tena ka ki atu te Pihopa. "E Hoori, kei te tino koa toku ngakau ki 1c nianaaki penei a te Atua i a 1- >e, na kia mohio mai koe e hiahia ana au kia utu Ia i Tana nama ki a koe. M Alma whak una ana a Hoori i enei korero, katahi ia ka mea atu, "K ore enci mea i puta noa mai hi a an. engari na taku kaha tonn ki te mahi, na kei etehi po   te whaka ha   • nama ana te Atua ki a an mo takn : . 1 : 1 '• : i i roto i te Flahi. Otira l  a maua mea katoatia li«' mea homai na te Atua, ma mana a e kore 1 1 « i lioki niana   te mutunga tana inoi, ka rongo ake ia Atareta e korikori ana ka tangi ake ka karanga, ' E mama." Heoi ka moe iho ano nga karu te Pihopa ka irhnkawhctai Id tona Matua. KataH ka karan •■ ki nga matna te tamaiti nei ka haere mai ka koa ! i te Tinga a ta ran,-, tamaiti. 1 muri Lho ka taka tu te Pihopa ki te b e katahi a Hoori ka haere atu kia ia ka pupuri i tana ri Ka titiro atu te Pihopa ki nga mata   Hoori kua rehnrenu I te roimata, ka mea atu ifa, "Kua tika tan Hoori, kaore tcnei tnea iv nama mai te Atua/' Na TE NGOURA. -o- He Powhiri Haere mai e te manuhiri-tu-a-ran^i, haria mai ko te Aroha. Kua tae mai "nga karere o Mahuru." Tenei matou o te Tai Rawhiti nei te powhiri atu ki te hunga katoa e tae ai te manu, ara Te Karere, kia haere mai ki te Hui Pariha ka tu nei ki a Uawa wahi o te Tai Rawhiti i te II me te 12 o nga ra o Hepetema. "Kua pai nga hua- rahi." Na nga tuahine kei Uawa. ( Tamihana, Tumuaki) He Panui Whakaatu ka Tu te Hui Pariha ki Korongata Hepetema 4, 5, 1926. Kei tenei hui ka korerotia e te Timuaki o te motu etahi take hou kaore ano te ao i rongo. No konei ka panuitia kia mohio ai te katoa, kia riro ai ma ou taringa ake e whakaro- ngo atu ki te Timuaki e korero ana. Kia riro ano mau e pa- tai atu au whakaaro me ou hiahia katoa. Kei konei hoki etahi tikanga hou hei painga mo te tinana, engari e kore koe e whiwhi ka noho mai koe i roto i to whare i to kainga ranei. E wehi ana ahau kei rereke te korerotanga atu ki a koe i nga korero a te Timuaki a ka poraru o whakaaro i roto i nga ti- kanga pono. No reira haere mai, haere mai! Na Rawiri Kaman, (Erata Heke, Timuaki Pariha) Ak »hata 25, 1926 TE KARERE -0 - He Whakaahua Pai Na R.R. Tiwinihana (He roanga atu) 27; «%&• ~-—^* Ko te Puki Kit mora Ko te Hiwi Kumora tenei, te inc.! ttratoru. Te wahi te whawhai whakamutunga nga Niwhai. Te wahi hoki i hu- naia ai e Moronai, (i a ia e tangata ana), e rite ana ki nga whakahannga a te Atua, nga papa k  Hurae ka wehe atu tona wairua 1 a mat mi. He nui te whakapouri 1 pa mai ki .1 matou Kua tutuki te 1 E KAKhRE Akuhata 25, iy^G kupu a te karaipiture, ka hari nga tupapaku e mate ana i roto i te Ariki i nga w a muri nei, e ai ta te wairua, kia okioki ai ratou i a ratoj mahi. Eieoi ma te Matua i te Rangi tatou e tiaki, na to koutou teina i roto i te Rongopai Ilm Karaiti, Karena W. Takaroa KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. Elder Geo. R Henderson Elder LeRoy \\ estov Elder LE ROY WES TOVERo Lewiston, Utah. I tae mai a Erata Wehitoa i te 28 o n#a ra o Pepuere, 1924, a wha- karitea ana ki te takiwa o te Mahia. I te 30 o nga ra o Tihe- ma, 1924, ka nukuhia atu ia ki te takiwa o Haki Pei, a i te 16 o n^a ra o Oketopa, 1925. ka nukuhia ano ki te takiwa o Hauraki ki te mahi i waenganui o n^a Pakeha te Thames. A ka tukua honoretia atu ia i te 20 o nga ra o Hurae, 1 926. Elder GEORGE R. HENDERSON o Joseph, Utah. I tae mai a Erata Henihana i te 23 o nga ra o Hune, 1924, a ka whakaritea ki te Kareti M.A.C. hei whakahaere i te mahi wa- iata, whakatangitangi, o reira. A i te 13 o nga ra Oketopa 1925 ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa Pakeha o Akarana. Ka hoki atu ano ki te Kareti i te 21 o nga ra o Hanuere, 1926, a i te 20 o Hurae ka tukua honoretia kia hoki atu ki tona hoa wahine me a ra ia tamariki i Hiona. Akuhata 25, 1926 TE karere 269 KI TE ETITA. Ko te Hui Pariha o te Kirikiri I lu re Hui Pariha llauraki nei ki te Kirikiri i te Rahoroi, te 31 liurai. me te I o nga ra Akuhata. Ko tiga kaumatua l tae mar, ko I'umuaki Tinikini, ko Erata Pirihana, hekeretari o te Mihana; ko Erata Kimepara me Karanata Hamilton, ko Erata Paapiti me Karaitiana Waikato, hui tahi ki nga kau- iiiatua tenei takiwa : Erata Tarapata, Aratama, Koiti. Naiti, Lietaraka Anaru raua Rupata Wi Hongi Ngapuhi, Erata Teii*a te Thames. 1 konei lioki etahi nga Hunga Tapu Tau- ranga, a Waikato. I konei lioki a Te Puea me tana ropu poi ki te purei liaere he mahi moni hei whakapai i te marae te Hui Tau ka lu nei ki Ngaruawahia. I manaakitia tenei Ilui Pariha ki nga rang] papai, a i mutu pai hoki. i puare tenei hui i te 10: 30 i te ata te Rahoroi. Na Erata Tarapata, Tumuaki Takiwa, i whakahaere. Nga himene na Erata Paapiti. I limene tuatahi 1. "Kei Runga te Maunga." inoi vvhakapuare na Tumuaki Tinikini. Himene tuarua 2. "H Iharaira " Kai-kauwliau tuatahi ko Pirimona Watene, Tumuaki te Peka   te Kirikiri nei. He powhiri ki nga manu- hiri. I ko em mo te mihana te Karaiti, [riiringa, Whiriwhiri- nga i n^:\ Apotoro, me te hanganga i te Ilahi he mea kia tiuo rite ai te Hunga Tapu mo te main minita. Bro. Rupata Wi Hongi. .M  te takanga atu me te v liokinga mai te Rongopai v tetahi anahera, e kauwhautia nei   tatou tinana. ko Erata TciTa. I korero mo Hona i tona turinga U i te haere ki te kauwliau i t Y.- *'ll |>viiiiii  i:i;i. kei t«' maiiara an i etahi wa, lie aha ranei a tatou vvhakalioki am ki te Atua mo nga mea e tono ana tatou i a la. Kia. kaiia, In- ugawari noa iho te ope oneone ake, engari te piki, me main" rr.a ka eke. Ko Mori Watene: Ko te whakatunga te Hani ki runga i te kamaka te whakakitenga. Whakahokinga mai te Rongopai kia Hohepa Mete kia kauwhautia ki te ao katoa. Ko te iwi Maori no [haraira. I * ukapuka a Moromona, a no te whare lioki tatou [haraira. Himene whakamutunga 170. "God Be With You." Inoi 11a H.\). Billman. Ka/akia te aliiahi, to V nga haora, he karakia whaki hineiigaro, na Pirimoa Watene i whakahaere, na R. \Vi Jloiiyi nga himene. Tuatahi ko tc 152. "Let l"s All Press On." Inoi nj Erata Teira. Himene tuarua L02. "We Thank Thee, I Grbd, for a Prophet." K  nga mea i tu ko Panikena, Tuku- niana, Hovi Taniaki, Te Aue Kahukore, R. Wi Hougi, Tukino Iiakopa, Rosie Watene, Ripoi. Ko Tnmuaki Tinikini: Ko nga hahi he mea hanga na te tangata ka karangatia In rat 011 ingoa. Ko te hahi he upoko katoa he mea mate { korero mai tetahi tangata ki a an 10 ratou te hahi pai rawa, c 300 nga apotoro, e oOO hoki nga neehi, e 300 hoki nga akonga, ko a ratou man : rite tonu. Xa he upoko katoa. ko te ahua- tanga he mea mate. Ko tenei hahi ia he Poropiti, he Ilai Piriti, he Piriti, lie K  Akuhata i te 10: 30   nga haora   te ata. 1 tu te karakia Kura Hapati. \'a Erata Tarapata i whakahaere. Nga himene na Bro. Anarn i whakahaere. Himene tuatahi B2. "Welcome, Welcome." Inoi na Erata Kimepara. Himene tuarua L27. "Though Deepening Trials." \a Toke Watene raua ko Turoa Royal i uhakatapu te Hakaremeta. Korero a Ngakau, Matiu 4: 7. "Kami e whakamatautau i te Ariki i urn Atua." \a Erata Karanata i vvhakamarama, Ka inutu i konei nga inani   Hamilton. Mo te Atualanga. K n A.D. Ko Henri Poto- n .ii 11 he mea vvhiu a mate noa. Ko Tariu he mea whakamate ki te kopere i te tau 72 A.I). Ko Haimona he mea ripeka i te tau 72 A.D. Ko Maka he mea tooto i nga tiriti Arehanaria b mate noa. Ko Paora i poutoa te matenga i Roma   to boa awhina, tens korua uga kai panui i nga rongo korero ! na tau p 14. Ko ana taniariki tekau ma tahi, e torn kua mate e warn kei te ora. Tona kainga i mate ai ko Whakatu. Hastings. Haki Pei. He Hunga Tapu tenei wahine ho mema ia no roto i te Hahi Tim Karaiti te Hunga Tapu nga Ra Mini Nei, peka Korongata. Te ahuatanga te mate n tenei wahine he mate kaiakiko. Ko Akuhata 2' D > 1926 n: KARERE 275 t '' 1 "' 1 k.'iihiuo lie waiiine tenei i whawhai nui ia ki te japu 1 tetahi aio toim mate, tvua taea hoki e ■ ; g* ■fct» ut anga kai ■ "'• l ' i,,i kacre kau ana in painga ake u tona mate. Kafta k " '• ' "' ■■■ ;1 - Ltamna iin wuakaoru i tona mate. L goto ia i te whaka- oacic u u .una mo tetahi w a roa tonu, kore kau ana he p tona 1. a.e, e iieke haere ke atu ana ki Le mate. I rno»u - in.. ;. ,;: i.,i. he tona I . ua  " Karaiii. i haere a Erata Heke raua ko Paati ttiUKH»aui 1 a ia me ie kaumatua iviaori Kaui ,. 5 nga wiki i i,i,.,i iho kaiaii/ uiic ka mate, ao reira i man- ia i roto i te Kahi. u te u.unga tapu, e u hakainarnina ana Le kai ripoa te kn\\ Liautangd u te Kongo I'ai i ma roto i te i uuxtu ;i.u i te ma ran nga langata i tae iaai ki te Leiiei wahine, I rongo hoki i nga pouonga a te A; . i Le iiiihnga mo ■-• liunga mine. No kon \ ahau ka lulu i ; Ahakoa kauie tenei tualrine i kau , liau ., ana main i kauwhau Le Kongo I'ai. Nuku atu i te tU aga I'akeha i i.\ kia kiuu i te tapuke^unga o lenej vvahme, aie to aiatau kite touu atu c ntitu niai ana ,  te nhua >> tenei wahiue i a ii noa ki tona matenga. Kai kauwhau tuarui ko I I ii aw h(i n i te ha M n tor 276 TE KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926 1 tenei take. 1 kore.ro hoki ia mo te taha ki te iriiringa, mo »e mai c 1 mi Kara in i a La 1 ara ake ai 1 te uuue 1 ha ere La ki te kauwhau ki ugu aairuu 1 .«■ whare Ucrehere a 1 kauwhau huki 1 te iriiriugu uiu ,.■ hunga male i a i Ixoroiuiti 15: 29, penei ka aim ic hunga u iriiria aim in', ivhakakapi mo te huagu mate ki te kore ruwa  ana ka unga alu 6 ahau a haia Poropiti ki a koutuu i nma i te taenga mai n te ra nui o Lhowa, te whakamataku, a ka tahuri i a La nga ngakau o ng; i mania ki nga tamariki, me oga Qgakau t> uga tamariki ki oga lnatua, kei haere atu ahau ka pain i te wheuua ki te kaauga. lie wuiata na Bratu I iriugihaata raua k.> raati. Kauwhau mi Liaia Henihana. I kurero La mo te alma ■ te ora i tenei a  te ahuatanga o te urauga >■ tera no. ! run yd i te hari me tc ki>a o to tangata i roto i tenei orauga kihai i na kua mutu iaua aari, taua koa kua tangohia atu i a tatau. 1 whakariten e i., tatau ki te kaipuke. 1 te takiwa i rere atu ai te kaipuke e mohio atu una tatau ki aga tangata ki te alma o nga ruea katoa i rungn i taua kaipuke, cngari i te taima ka lawhiti haere am ka timata tc ngaro haere atu i a tatau — aawai a. kua kite atu tatau ko le niaa anake o nga hera «' knen am ana, nawai aaa, kua ngaro, kua mutn to Laton mohio atu ka pewhea ra :i ko atu. Penei me io tatau tuahiue, i mohio tatau ki tona alma i Le taima o ora ana e noho ana i waenganui i a tatau. Engari i te wa kua male ia kua kore tatau e kite atu i a ia. kua ngaro atu ia i a tatau, kua kore tatau t) mohio pewhea ra a k-j niu. Ko tc vvahi pouri nnake tenei, engari ko te tikangn ia ka hoki mai ano taua kaipuke, ka kite ano ■ tuna wa. E mohiotia ana hoki tona ra h »ki mai e nga tangata whakahaere. Engari to tatau tuahine kei te mohiotia ano ka hoki mai ano. engari awhea te ra, te marama, tc tau ranei, kaore e mohiotia -kore rawa he tangnln hio ahakoa tc Tama n te A.tua, kore rawa tetahi tangata kin kotahi, koia anake ko te Matua. ka. te nga anahcra. He tangata aroha tonu le A i na. ara a llm Karaiti. E taoa e is t  nga manuhiri, Xgati Hineuru, Ngapuhi, Ngati Kahungunu, aga tauiu riki o te Kare.i 7.1. tangata w henna. Kn tae ki te rua. He paka a roto. ko nga taha he karoko katoa te rua atrahua ana te rua. Tuku i te tupapaku ki roto. Himene l(5(j i te himei.e Pakeha. Xa Erata PaaJ i whakatapu te rua. i aiua o te ;,. ratanga i te k  aga taha kua takaia ki te kawhena ake. Katahi .-nui ka aeratia te kopani u te paaka, tapukena hoki te rua. He nui nga mihi a te I'akehn tenei alum tapuke tupapaku a tenei Ilaln. Kaoro rawa ratau nei e kite aim he aha t«- llnln. kaorc he tapuke tupapaku penei te whakahaere. Te pai ki te titiro atu a te kanolii. Atnahua ana nga mahi katoa. lie nui tonu hoki nga Maori katahi ano ka kite, mo te mihi ki tenei tanu tupapaku. Te Tina ara Ilakari. I te mutungfl i) te hakari kn inea mm tetahi wahine ninku e whnka puaki tona mihi. Ara wahine Pakeha, Mrs. McKenzie. • ■ W i >■ whnka mnori atu nku korero. Tino ki tooku ngaknu i te aroha ki tenei u me tona whnnnu katoa. Ka nui taku whakumoemiti I na i whakamohiu i au ki te aroha ki tenei wahine Maori. I mohio ai ahau ki te ahua   tenei iwi Maori. I. korero pono mm ahau ki ••  te peka o L'uranga. L ki ana a ia ka aui Le kaha o toi.a inn Atawhai ki te whaka- rue i aga main o to ratou Hui Atawhai. To ratou aui 8 warn ano aga inenia, a ko ia ano he kai-whakuako. Ka nui hoki to ratou kaha ki te t  lc ttatapu. 1 tino ohorcrc 10 Poari i tenei ahua, tt* kaha (» te paij pai atu hoki i a matau nei kai. Te uiea tuarima, ka nui te ora nga ahua u nga tamariki hauuga la aga mea e pangia ana •■ te mate. Engari uuj atu le ora aga tinaua. He urn aga mea 1 tae puhutihuti aiai ki tenei kura, i to roanga e nohu ana ka tiinata te ora, lc nui. Kaore lie tii. lie >\ai luatno uoa ih . Te mea tuaono, kua wrhakaritea he takuta tirotiro mo ratou ko Dr. Johnson no Hehitingi. Ki te kiia aie tuku ki te holiipera ka tukua, engari ko aga raruraru katoa mo tana tamaiti ka hoki atu ano ma tona matua auo uga raruraru e utu mai. 1 pcneitia e vvhakakeke ana etahi o uga tamariki ki te haere ki te Hchipcra e titiro whakamuri ana kci ratou niatna ta aim te tikanga ma ratou ra aim e uhakanc aiai, mi reira ka r. a e takoto ana Lc tuniiti i to kura, tac rawa mai to whakautu kua wiki ke e takoto ana. [naianoi kaore e tatari ki nun m -.uia. Take tuawh'uu, i uiuri mai i te Hui Y; u i Xuhaka i puta te panui a h'.M.K. to inali' a te Kareti kw uga moni utu o Uga tamariki e haere mai ana ki te kura uei, e OUO ran euhitu tokau ma warn pauna kci te nama. Inaianci c rim a ran c whitu tokau ma warn pauna kua puta mai, kotahi rau pauna kci te toe. Te mohio iho o te Poari tae rawa ake ki te w a c inutu ai te Kara ka ea katoa mai i to koutou kaha, c aga matua, ki te utu mai i nga moni a koutou tamariki. Ka kite iho koutou ka ora nga tamariki i te kai, ka kore c uepuku nga korokoro, pai ana tc lickc (i nga kai. Tt kai a Lo langata cliara ho kai mahaialiara. kaore, ki tana kai ake, lino kai. tino makona. Heoi ana nga nama e toe ana kci ruuga i nga tamariki o nga iau kua hori ake. kua ]>uta nei ho painga ki a rataii E hoa ma, c tig atua o nga tamariki kore nei ano i utu d  ne Bldi r Koroniria Tari ( me Elder 1 Tena koutou, e oku hoa mahi, ka nui oku whaimihi atu ki .1 koutou mo to koutou tautokotanga ki ahau, mo to koutou kaha hoki ki te wharite i koutou karangatanga 1 .1 ;ui i tu nei lie tumuaki mo koutou. Na, hei konei ra e oku hoa aroha. Ma te Atua Kaha Rawa koutou e manaaki e whakauu ki tenei mahi i a koutou e haerc ana 1 raro 1 to kou- tou tumuaki hou. I loi an ne month 3 week si ( )nr month 1 eeks 11 KARERE Akuhata 25, 1926 KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei tc tari te Miliaria ht-i ho- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea C hiahia ana ki etahi O enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box J2, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with Ready Reference, Leather 25-0 New Testament & Ready Reference, Leather no Book of Mormcn, Cloth 2-6 & 7-6 " " , Half Leather 90 .Leather 10-0 & 150 Pearl of Great Price, Cloth 2-0 Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0 " , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS Maori Ready Reference, Cloth 2 " " " .Leather 3-6 Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in I n-b " Pukapuka a Moromona, Cloth 5-0 , Leather 15-0 Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nni, Cloth 5-0 " " " ", Leather I5-0 Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer I SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS The Restoration of the Gospel 4-0 What Jesus JCaught 5 Kindergarten Plan Book, KesHer & Morris 50 Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, .Morton 4-6 SONG BOOKS Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 " " " . Leather 6 6 Deseret Song Books, Cloth 30 44 " " .Leather 6 b Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Talmage 8-3 Vitality of Mormonism 4-6 Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson o-o Restoration of the Gospel, II idtsoe 40 Joseph Smith's Teachings 3-6 Life of Christ for the Young, Weed 4 6 Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 Essentials in Church History, Smith 6-9 Bible Ready Reference 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Mom's 6-0 KO J. H. TINIKINI TE KA1 TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. R. j^trpr? i a Wahanga 20 Hepetema 22, 1926 Nama 9 Ta Kamariere: >»UI te mea hoki na te tangata tenei whakaaro, tenei mahi, tera e ka- hore noa iho : Tena na te Atua, e kore rawa e taea te whakakahore e koutou." Nga Mahi 5:38-39. \0! I 1 ! % M "CS KMR&R&" WHAKAEMINGA O NCA KORERO Wharangi. Kl TE ETITA He Matenga 303 1 [e Matenga 304 He Ripoata no te Mahia He Poroporoaki 30S Ko te Matenga o Piripi 306 Ko te Marae o te Hui Tau 305 KO NCA RONCO KORERO Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona 307 KO NCA TUHINCA MAI He Whakaaturanga mo te Whare Iharain 308 MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 300 MAHI KURA HAPATI Concert Recitation 282 Intermediate Department 294 Korero a Ngakau 282 Kindergarten Department 297 Maori Theological 282 Pakeha Theological 288 Postlude 281 Prelude 281 Sacrament Gem 281 j^an>n> WaHANCA 20 WENEREI. HEPETEMA 22, 1926. NAMA 9 Maori Hgriculiural college Hastings, H. B. E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, hiahi u iliu ivara:u u te iiunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, AI.A.C, Hastings. Kii te utu mo TE K ARK RE i te tan e rima hereni (5/-). KO IE TIKANGA TENEI. iTle malua utu mo tou pepa fcu wuiv hi ai. J. H. Timkini, Tumuaki Mihana Marioiui K. Ewutana, htita. Tiala Wttehtra, Etiia Hoa Awhina. Ko te Km-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha Ivo ogu Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). Wiremu A. Koura Rap ita Tana pu Eru T. Kupa ~ MAHI KURA HAP ATI. Prelude. Adagio hgato. Arr. After Schumann. by Edw. P. Kimball. SaCRaMHM GEM FOR OCTOBER, 1926 "His precious Mood He freely spilt, His life I le Ereely gave ; A sinlrss sacrifice for guilt, A dying world to save. " Postlude. '\I:. :: J.: J: ,,!-!;•!' Hi.!. I I PPP mm P .i.-.n _>;; rh k AkkkK Elepetema zi, 1926 CONCERT RECITATION FOR OCTOBER, 1926. FAST DAY CONCLiRT RECITATION. (Matthew Chapter 4. Verse L9. 1 And 1 1   mi matua, 1 i ,1 ia ano In pepi 1 te nine u Tona vvhaoa ka nuu^ria la 1 runga nga rori tino wera ki Ihipa, a i reira ka hoki mai 284 TE KAKhKi. liepctema 22, 1920 la ki Tona kainga i Kariri. 1 Kariri i liaereere fconu la ki Hiruharama ki te Kapenga. Na te reo Eloaiii la i karanga ki tioranOj na te reo te svairua ia i arahi ki te koraha, rue te tiuiata ia ki te ako ka kit*' taton i a Ana main i Kariri n n- Kaperenauma ano hoki, i Korahina, i Kana, i Makatara kainga   Mere Afakarini), i Taipiria. Ka kite ano tatou i a la c noho ana i te taha te puna Haika i Samaria, i Peta- haiia. i Karara (te whenua ki tawahi atu Kariri)', i Miliaria. nu' te wlienua Qga Kerekehino. i a la . tata ana ki I I'm harama ka haere la ki Petani me fclerikp, i haere ano lioki la ki tawhiti atu tae atu ki nga takiwa Taira me Ilai ona Die te whenua o Miria. He haere tonu Tana maiii. kaore he okioki, he tangata haere kahore he kainga, i runga Tona aroha ki Taha tnahi. i malum i a la Tona kainga kia tiro ai ko la liei kai-haereere i roto o Tona whenua ake, kahore lie kohatu hei takotoranga iao Tona matenga, Tona kainga tupu ko nga rori, Tona tnoenga ko nga awaawa te tnaara, kei 1*0 waka, kei te taumarutanga ranei tetahi rakau. Pera ano hoki nga apotoro ka malnie a ratou mahi, kainga, matua, teina, tuukana, tnahine, wahine, me nga taniariki kia aru ai ratou i a lliu. llei aha? I uiea atu ranei la ki a ratou me utu ratou ki te koura, whenua. mea utu nui ranei? Kahore, i korero ke la i te aroha anake; mc te poharatanga, me te main tika. E hia tatou e pai ki te am i a Ia nieite karanga la i a tatou inaianei .' .Mehemea e tae mai he poropiti ki te kai-hoko taonga, ka mea atu, waiho taonga, a ki te aiahita kura, panga au pukapuka am mai i a An. ki te roia; waiho au pepa me main tinihanga, l  Qga Parihi nga Haruki ki poto i nga kai-vvhakapae Paora. Mahi 23: 6 B. Ko te whakaoranga  i  i te pa i ona hoa rirl Mahi 23: LO 1 1 2. Ko te putanga n Paora i nga ivhakaaro nanakia nga Hurai e wrha tekau. Mahi.2 I S Te pukapuka a te kapene Roma ki te kawana pari pawa ki 1 Pirika Mahi 23 26 30 Tirohia ihn tenei: Na e tino manaakitia ana hoki e tc Vtua 28o T£ KAREKh I kpciema 22, iy20 Ana pononga 1 nga tnea kino katoa i te Diea he main Tana ma ratOU. J Oti lioki i a te Kaiaiti Ana mahi i mua Tona matenga. K  te meatanga a Apinari ki Kingi Noa. Mohia 13 : 3. I ki a Hohepa Mete e kore ia e mate i ona hoa riri i mua o te tutukitanga o tana mahi, Ratapu t.atoru, Oketopa 17, 1926. AKORANGA UH. l a Paora i mnaria. A. Ko te vvhakawatanga o Paora i te aroaro o Petuha. 1. Nga mea i vviiakapaea ai a faora e nga ilurai. Mahi 24 : 1-9. (a) Na Paora i tutu ai nga Hurai. (I)) Mo tana akonga ke i te Ture a Mohi. (c) Mo tana whakanoanga i te Temepara. 2. Ko te whakahoki me te whakahe a Paora ki nga whakapae a nga Hurai. Mahi 24: 10-21. 3. Ko te hikitanga o te wa hei whakawatanga mo Paora. Mahi 24: 22. B. E rua tau a Paora e tiakina ana. .Mahi 24: 22-27. 1. Ko te korerotanga o Paora ki a Pirika raua ko Ruru- liira. (a • Ka memeha te kino i te aroaro o te pai. Mahi 24: 25. Whakaritea tahitia ki nga tikanga o te llitoi-i o te Hani, wharangi 243-245. 2. Ko te alma o Pirika. Mahi 24 : 26-27. Rrittpu tuawha, Ok'topa ?t, 1926 AKORANGA 29. I Muri o te Rua Tau. A. Ko te whakawatanga o Paora i te aroaro o Petuha. 1. Ko te pitihanatanga e nga Ilurai kia whakawatia a Paora ki Hiruharania. Mahi 25: 1-6. 2. Ko te karangatanga o Paora ki a Hilia. Mahi 25: 11. r}. Ko te uiuinga p Paora i te aroaro o Petuha. Mahi 25: 1-V2. B. A Paora i te aroaro o King] Akaripa. Hepete.Tia 22. 1920 TE KARERE 28' 1. Ko te toronga a Akaripa raua ko Pereniki i a Petuha. Mahi 25: 13-37. 2. Ko to kiin.ua a Petuha. Mahi 25: 24-27. 3. Ko te karonga a Paora i a ia. Mahi 26: 1-29. 4. Ko te mohiotanga o nga kai-whakawa ki te pono nga korero a Paora. Mahi 2b: 30-32. Tirohia iho tenei: i runga i te mea kua tangata whenuatia a Paora ki Roma e ahei ana ia ki te karanga ko Akuhata llilia hei whakawa i a ia, 110 te mea e mohio ana ia ki te liaere ia ki i li.-uiia ama ka whakamatea ia e nga liurai, heoi ko te tango- iianga atu taua take i a Akaripa raua ko Pirika. 5. Ko te whakahaunga a Paora kia haere ki Roma. katapu tuarima, Gkeiopa31, 1926. AKOKA^GA 30. Ko te Rerenga Paoia ki Roma. A. Atu i tana ekcnga taea uoatia te pakarutanga te kaipuke. 1. Ko te haere-noatanga Paora i Hairona (Sidon) Poeniha (Phoenicia). Tirohia te mapi. 2. Te ekenga i Maiia ki runga i te kaipuke wit i e rere ana ki Roma. Mahi 27 : 5-6. 3. Ko te whakatupatoranga Paora i Nga Kokoru Ata- ahua. mo te mate te rerenga atu. Mahi 27: 8-11, Tirohia tenei: Whakarit* a to te tangata matauranga ki t,-i te Atua whakakitenga. 4. Ka mea atu a Paora ki ana hoa i to ratou ora te paka- rutanga te kaipuke. Mahi 27: 11-26. B. Te pakarutanga te kaipuke. 1. Ko te meatanga nga heramana ki te whakarere i te Kaipuke. Mahi 27: 30. M.ihnalia iho te ahuat anira to ratou whakaoranga i te urupa inoana ko te ngo- Kengohe. Tirohia rarangi 3 1 2. Ko te meatanga a Paora kia kai ratou i te pal tanga te tekau ma wha ra. Na ko taua kaipuke he lino uui IUO an a ra. 3 K  excellent character, b. Who make the Following statement, and to whom ii made "Entreat me aol to Leave thee and to return Prom Following thee; For wither Ihou goest, I will l:o. and where thou Lodgest I will Lodge; U13 people shall be mj people and th} God mj God ; where thou dies! will I die, and there will I be buried The I. "id do so to me, and more lllso, if aught bill death par! I bee and • What "i \i\ Testament, Joshua, chap ter (i. gestions on Preparation and Presentation: ( 1 ) The taking  \ Mulek. Alma 52:15 10 (2) Faith fulness of the people of Ammon. Alma 53 ( 3) Faith of Helaman 'a 2000 ^-ns. \in, ( \ ) The capture of the   God, tor a Prophet," D. s. s. Songs. Suggesl inns : The deep impression the vision had made on Joseph, lie was thinking about il constantly. His preparation Tor His work was s*> important that an angel came to help prepare him. The angel bringing an imporlanl message. Joseph's heavenly message. Joseph's heavenly Father was pleased with the work he was doing or He would not have chosen hnn for so great a work. We, too, should prepare and be ready for His call, for any work He sees lit to give us. We can be ohedient to parents and those in authority as Joseph was. Help the children to see that they can remember the teachings of Jesus and try to follow in His footsteps. By so doing we are preparing for mission not only in ;his life, bu1 the life to come. Rest Exercise. We are preparing ourselves for the work of the Lord when we are ohedient to His laws and commandments. Joseph was obedient. Let the children suggesl what they do in their daily lives that test obedience. Dramatise their suggestions — obedience to mother when she calls obdience to lather when he asks for help from us — obedience to teacher when she asks us to fold our ha, ids. etc. . ' '. ■ ; . i : "Remember your prayers, little children. Both morning and evening each day. The Loi • i> e er ready to hear you ; II- love* ail His children to pray." MAHI HUI ATAWHAI [ZGRA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai. \'a Toke Watene i vvhakamaori. iiepetema 22, 1920 IE KARERE 30 1 AKORANGA MO OKETOPA. Te Wa te Taima i Rite ai. (Meridian of Time). Ko Ta Paora Main Mihana. 1. Tana mahi i roto i te Ilalii. a. Kotahi tau i Anatioka. Mahi 11: 25-27. I). Tononga ki !  te haereerenga te tuotu ■> Kaiperu i te rawhiti ki te hauauru. Te tutakitanga ki a Paraihu ki te poropiti tcka. Mahi u : 6-13. e. Te hokinga   Maka ki Eiiruharama, Mahi L3: L3 (1. Te tahuritanga atu Paora raua ko Panapa i nga Eiurai ki nga tauiw i. Mahi L3 : 16 e. Te peinga atu i Ikoniuma. Main II: 1-7. I Te whakaoranga   t» tangata kopa. .Mahi 14: 8 l: 1 n Te akinga Paora hi te kohatu i Raihitara. Mahi 1 I : ID. h. Te u hakatahuritanga ■ » Tiiuoti, Mahi hi : 1. i. Te hokinga ki Anatioka. Mahi l 1 2 .'). Ta Paora mihana tuarua. a, Te whiriwhiringa o 1 lira hei hoa inona, mo te 1 uranga Panapa Mahi l "• 36 » I l». Te w hiriw hiringa hoki Ti 1 1 Mahi Ifi 1-2 re Pakeha l European 1 1 uatahi i iriiria Mahi 16 11 1.. d. Te peinga ki wi n VI 16: 16-16 M' 2 VE KAkfcRE tiepetema 22, 19^0 c Te hopukanga, te whiunga, tue te tukunga Paora raua ko Bira. t. Te whakatunga te liahi i Koriniti. Mahi 1m : L-18. g. Te hokinga ano ki Anatioka. Mahi L8: L8-22, 4. Ta Paora mihana tuatoru a whakamutunga hoki ki Epeha. Mahi 19: 1-11. a. Nga mahinga Qierekara. .Mahi 1!»: Ll-21, 1). 'IV hokinga ano ki Hiruharama. Mahi 20: 22-38; 2J : U-4U. c I niua i te liaringa ki niua i te nohoanga whawa Qui onga llurai (Sanhedrin). Mahi 23: Ll-27 j 23 : 1-."). Ka whakaaii 1c Aiiki me whakaatu ano a Paora ki Roma. Mahi 23: i L-20; 27, 23-24. (1. I muri i 011a whakawakanga tuaha Qie tona h6re- herenga mo nga tan e 2 ka haria hereheretia alu ia ki Roma. c. Ka kaumhau ia ki Roma mo nga lau e 2. Mahi 28: 14-31, i muri ka tukua. f, Tana whakaaturanga nui i te mea ka mohio ia kua tata tona mutunga. II Timoti 4: 6-8. g. 1 muri i nga tau e wha pea ka I. aria hereheretia ano ia ki Roma, ki tc wahi i poutoa ai tona mahunga e Nero i te tan 65 A.I), i muri mai te whanantanua o te Karaiti. AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. Ko te Whakakotahitanga (C:-operation) i waenganui i te Kainga me te Kura. I. He aha i tika ai kia whai whakakotahitanga. 1. Ta te kiira he whakanui, he whakatupu hoki i tc akoranga, i whakawhiuhia ai te tamaiti tc kotiro ranei i roto i tc kainga. 2. Me putake rite tonn la 1c kura me tc kainga, ki tc whakaako i tc tamaiti a kotiro ranei, 3. Ko tc niohiotanga ki tc mahi a tetahi ki ta tetahi lici whakatupu i tc rangimarie c matenui ai. ki tc ako i tc tamaiti a kotiro ranei i roto i tc huarahi e neke raw a atn ai tc matauranga. Hepetema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 303 Ji. Me pehea te whakakotahi me te kura. 1. Me haere nga Diatua ki te torotoro i nga kura kia taunga ai ratou ki nga whakahaere me nga karaihe, e tutaki ai lioki ki nga kai-whakaako. 2. Me tono atu nga kai-whakaako ki to kainga, ara meheniea tera tetalii tikanga raruraru i waenganui o te tamaiti kura kotiro ranei me kai-whakaako. (Ka whakaaro nui ke te kai-whakaako ki te tamaiti kura kotiro ranei i niuri i tona taenga ki te kainga, a taenga ranei o nga niatua ki te kura. 3. Kaua nga niatua e korero wliakakinokino. whakahe, 1110 te kura, mo nga kai-whakaako rami i mua nga tamariki kura, kei riro ma tenei take «• whakauaua te whakakotahi. 4. Me wbakarite e aga biatua he tikanga awhina ki nga kai-whakaako me te kura, ma ratou lioki e whaka-u ki roto i te tamaiti, i te kotiro tenei whakaaro. 5. Ki te kore tetalii tamaiti e hari e koakoa i te kura. me liaere te matua ki te kai-whakaako i roto i te wairua whakahoa, me te taliuri ki te awhina i a ia kia mohio ki te tamaiti, ki nga ahuatanga lioki c taea ai te whakakore tenei raruraru. (5. Me mohio nga matua ki nga ture te kura me nga putake lioki i mahia ai ana una. .Ma konei ka maraiiia ai ta ratou wiiakamarama i nga ture ki te tamaiti a kotiro ranei. 7. Ma runga i te huihui 'alii me te hacre ki i»' huihuinga o te " I\o|)u nga Matua me nga Kai whakaako" e vvhakatupu ake te wairua   te whakakotahitanga, e in tatatata ai hoki te kainga mc te kura. KI TE ETITA. HE MATENGA. Ki Te Karerc, tena koutou i tena walii, ma tf Aiua koutou katoa e tiaki,   te Ingoa 304 TE KARERE Hepetema 23, 1920 taua pepi ko Tepara Christina Heti, e 0110 wiki te kaumatua. Hi' mil hoki te maniaetanga i pa mai ki te whaea rue te matua taua pepi, ara ki nga whanaunga katoa   taua 1 >i - 1 > i . Xn te Atua i homai, Nana i tango atu, whakahonoretia Tona ingoa. Heoi ra, ma to tatou Atua i tc Kami tatou katoa e tiaki, e whakakalia i nga vva katoa, na to koutou tnokai, POUAKA PAKI. HE MATENGA. i\i Te Karere, tena koe, panuitia atu c koe te matcnga ta tnatou tamaiti, "mokopuna, Ngakaahupohere P. Keena. I mate ia i tc 30 o nga ra Hurae nei tan L926. k  te kaumatua 6 taua tamaiti e Pima tan me tc hawhe tona kaumatua. Ko tona inatiia ko Karaka P. Keena koia te tumuaki te peka Weraroa, koia hoki te kai-riwhi tona matua Pairama Keena. Tokorua raua kua mate anake, ko te whaea me nga tuakana, tuahine, taua tamaiti kei te ora, me matou hoki me nga tupuna. He nui to matou pouri me te aroha mo tona wehenga atu i a matou. Engari e kore c taea te pevvhea i te mea koia tera te ahuatanga te ao katoa. A/a ko te taonga nui tera kei te ao katoa. ehara taua taonga i te mea no te tang: ta kotahi, no nga tangata katoa. \';i reira, e tatou e nga whana- unga tenei tamaiti. me a.iga atu tatou ngakau ki nga kupu roto i nga karaipiture. E ki ana te Kai Kauwhau i te 3 nga upoko te 1 nga rarangi, "Kua takoto te taima mo nga mea katoa. me te vva ano mo nga mcatanga katoa i raro i te i-aiiiii." Kei te 4 nga rarangi. "lie \va e tangi ai, he x -\a e kata ai, he \va e aue ai, he vva e kanikani ai." No reira no tatou euei taonga, no te hunga kei te ora ano. ara te tangi, te aue. te kata, te kanikani. Engari te lino kupu mana tatou ngakau e peehi ko te kupu te Kai Whakaora i ki atu pa ki nga akonga, "Tukua mai nga taiftariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau. kaua latou e araia atu. No nga penei hoki te pangati- patanga te pangi." Na reira. e hoa ma, kei te ora ta tatou tamaiti. mokopuna, kei te waahi kua rite mai i te Matua. engari te hanga atu i a tatou kia tae atu ai tatou ki reira. Kaati, hei konei mutu r.i. na to koutou teina i roto i te Rongopai, \A TE POTT!' PENEKUPA. l.epetema 22, 1920 iE KARKRL 305 Ko te Marae le Hui la.i K te H u 1 1  rata Paapiti, Tumuaki Waikato. is t) uga ra Hurae uei, l  Aotearoa me te Waipounamu, i i« Akuhata mi, i te 6.25 p.m ka tu t  mat an Miutara, n I Taurima i whakahaere lie Miutara poroporoaW ki .1 R II 306 It kakkkk Hepctema 22, 1926 Anderson, Timuaki no te Pariha te Mahiai Poroporoaki tnatahi na Hanitahuri Teira, me tana aroha, he tautau wati, hei aroha ki a ia ma nga tangata o te Mahanga. Ruka Rarere: lie nui te aroha ki tenei tangata mo ana oiahi pai. Whakahe Mateiiga: he nui ana korero aroha 1110 tenei tangata, me te tnkn kawhe (cuffs) hei aroha mana, ine nga peepi kua manaakitia. Ko etahi enei nga mea i tu ki te poroporoaki, ara ko Watene Kara, Henare Taurima, Rina Pakimana, Ka Mateiiga, Tihema Taurima. Waiata whakaniutu i a Elder Richard Marsh, "God Be With You Till We Med Again. ' ' Heoi, e te Hunga Tapu, lie nui te aroha mo tenei kaumatua kua wehe atu i a matou. Kotahi te tangata me tana tamaiti i iriiritia e tenei kaumatua i mua atu i tona wehenga atu i a matau, otira he liuhua nga tangata i puta ki vvaho o te Hahi, na tona kaha ka hoki mai ano aua tangata. Heoi kia ora koutou katoa. E te Hunga Tapu, kia kaha tatau ki te ripoata i o tatau aitua, kia mohio ai 011a uri ia wahi ia wahi. Xo reira kei te kaha nga Hunga Tapu te Mahia nei ki te whakarite i o ratou karangatanga i raro i te mana o Perea Reiipeae Timuaki te Peka o te Mahia nei. TE MATENGA PIRIPI. Panuitia atu ki nga uri o tenei tamaiti, ara kei roto o Turanga, kei roto hoki Wairarapa, i te 24 nga ra Akuhata nei, i te 3.30 p. in. ka mate a Piripi Matenga. 1 mate ia i I'unga i tona mate taumaha ara e kingea ana lie taipo piwa. Tino kaha te mate tenei tamaiti, ko 011a tau 15, e 0110 Qga wild e takoto ana ia i tona mate, ka hemo. He nui te aroha mona. Kua riro ia kei te po, kua ngaro ia i ona haereerenga. Koia te tuawha tona whamere kua riro kei te po, me tona papa, ara a Repa Matenga. He Hunga Tapu katoa tenei whamere. E toru o tona whamere kei te ora, me tona kui, ara a Matire Kara. Otira he liuhua nga aitua te Mahia nei, ara a Maata Kiira, Hape Tangiora, Henare Tikitini, kotahi o Turanga ko Nepia Bartlett, he papa tenei tangata ki a Piripi (ara uncle). E hoa ma, kei te kaha te whiu kei te haere inaianei, ka nui te aitua kei runga i te mata o te whenua. Heoi ra kia kaha e te Hunga Tapu, kia kaha ki te whaka- Hepetema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 307 rite i o koutou karangatanga, kia rite ai tera korero e ki ra, "Ki te aroha koutou ki a au, kia mau ki aku ture." Koia lit'i ana ture, 111 e whakarite koutou karangatanga. Kia kaha hold ki te inoi, tena, tena tatau, ki te tono i nga manaaki- tanga kua rite mai 1110 tatau. Kua puta hoki te korero a te Tiniuaki a te Mihana ara a President Jenkins kua tae tatau ki te ahiahitanga o te Hatarei. No reira kia kaha tatau. Tenei hold matau kei te inoi mo tatau katoa kia manaakitia. Heoi ra kia ova koutou katoa, ria to koutou teina, te tuakana o Piripi. NA WHAKAIIE MATENGA. KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. Elder Wayne T. Wiser Elder Alviti A. Davis ELEER WAYNE T WISER o Levkton, Utah: I tae mai a Erata Waiha i te 280 nga ra Pepuere, 1924, a whakr- riter ana ki te takiwa o Ha.ki Pei. 1 te 20 o nga ra Aperira, 192;, ka whakaritea koia hei timuaki mo tana takiwa. 1 te 2X nga ra o tiune, 1925, ka nukuhia a W aiha ki te takiwa Akarana, a i te 140 nga ra o Oketopa, [925, ka whakaritea hei timuaki mo rcira. Lukua honoretia atu i te 17 o nga ra Akuhata, 192 \ ELDER ALV1N A. DAVIS Weston, Idaho: I tae mai a Erata Rev\etj i te 240 nga ra Hanuere, 1924, a ka whaka- 308 TE KAR ERE Hepetema 22, 1926 ritea ki te takiwa o Waikato. Ka nukuhia atu ki te takiwa o Poneke i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1925, a i te I o nga ra o Oketopa, 1925, ka nukuhia ano ki te Kareti mo nga mahi rau- mati, whakahokia ano ki Poneke i te 15 o Pepuere, 1926, a i te 17 o nga ra o Akuhata, 192b, ka tukua honoretia atu. He Whakaaturanga mo te Whare o lharaira Ki Te ivarere: Tena ra koe e ic inanu iangi pai. Mau e panui atu enei korero tawhito rawa o o tatou tupuna, ara re whakaaturanga mo te Morehu o te Whare o lharaira,, te iwi Maori. Kaati. Tuatahi. — Kei a KewKikuha te 19 nga upoko me te 28 o nga raraugi e whakamarama ana mo te Tangihaehae. Tuaraa. Kei a Tiuterbnoixix, te 18 o nga upoko, te 10 me te 11 o nga rarangi, e vvhakamarama ana mo le main Tohunga me te mahi Makuoi. Tualoru. Kei a Eewitikuha, te 19 o nga upoko, te 28 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana" mo te mahi Moko. Tuawha. Kei a Kenehi ie 28 o nga upoko, te 11 o nga rarangi; me te 33 o nga upoko", te 4 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana mo te Tangi-a-ihu. Tuarima. Kei nga Waiata te 14 o nga upoko, te 40 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana mo te Kai Taiigata. Tuaono. Kei a Tiineronomi te 14 o nga upoko, te 1 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana mo te Tauaa ara Tapani i nga Makawe. Tuawhitu. Kei nga Tauanga te 20 o nga upoko, te 29 o nga rarangi e whakamarama ana 1.10 te Tangi Tupapaku. Kati. Na enei whakaaturanga ka tino mohio tatou ko te iwi Maori he tino morehu no te Whare o lharaira. Rite tonu nga ahuatanga o naianei ki o mua. No reira tena koutou katoa e te Morehu o te Whare o lharaira ara te iwi Maori e noho nei i tenei wahi o te niaara waina nui o to tatou Matua i te rangi. Kati, e h  WAHANCA 20 WENERES, OKETOPA 27, 1926. NAMAIO fllaori agricultural College Hastings. H. B. E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, Hahi o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. Tukua mai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings. Ko te utu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereni (5/-). KO TE TIKANGA TENEI. file matua utu mo tou pepa fca vPhhvhi ai. /. H. Tinikini, Tumuaki Mihana Mariona K. Ewatana, Etita. Tiata Witehrra, Etita Boa Awhina. Ko te Kai-Ripoata Te Tuati Meha Ko nga Kai Tuhi Mai (Special Writers). Wiremu A. Koura Rap ita Tanapu MAHI KURA HAPATI. Prelude. Adagio Itgido. Eru T. Kupa Arr. After Schumann. by Edw. P. Kimball. pp SACRAMENT GBM FOR NOVEMBER, 1926 "ilis precious blood tie freely spilt, His life lie freely gave ; A sinless sacrifice for guilt, A dying world to save. " Postlude. PPP lut. 310 TE KARERE Oketopa 27, iy26 CONCERT RECITATION FOR NOVEMBER, 1926. (James, 5th Chapter, 14th and 15th Verses). Is any sick among you? Let him call for the elders of the church ; and let them pray over him, annointing him with oil in the name of the Lord ; and the prayer of faith shall save the sick, and the Lord shall raise him up." KORERO A NuAKAl iYlO NOhi\U, 1926. Hemi 5: 14-15. "Ki te turorotia tetahi i roto i a koutou, me karanga e ia nga kaumatua te hahi ; a ma ratou e inoi ki runga ki a ia, me te whakawahi ano i a ia ki te hinu i runga i te ingoa o te Ariki : A e ora te turoro i te inoi whakapono, ma te Ariki a no ia e whakaara ake." MAORI THEOLOGICAL. Ratapu tuataiii, Noerna 7, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori, Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- turia nei e lhu hei mahi ma tatou. Whakaoranga i nga Turoro. "A kawea ana e ratou ki a ia nga tangata mate katoa e ngaua ana e te tini o nga mate, nga mamae, me te hunga e nohoia ana e te rewera, me te hunga haurangi, me nga para- rut iki ; a whakaorangia ake ratou e ia." E rua nga ahua mahi i mahia e lhu i runga i te whenua, a ko Ia anake te tangata i te tino rite mo aua mahi o era atu tangata katoa. Tuatahi ko la te Kai Whakaako nui r.ga kai ako katoa. Tuarua ko Ia te Kai Whakaora nga turoro. I mohiotia la puta noa atu i Huria mo enei mea e rua. No roto i enei mea e rua ka tupu ake te kino i nga kai-whakahaere tikanga nga Hurai i Hiruharama, me nga Karaipi me nga Parihi. Na roto i to ratou kino ki a Ia, me to ratou puhaehae- tanga, ka whakamatea Ia. Qkeiopa 27, 1920 r.E IvARlke 311 Ko tenei akoranga e pa ana ki nga whakaoranga i nga turoro, a me Ana tauira ki a tatou i roto i enei tu mahi. Kua akongia tatou e Ana tauira kia whai whakapono hei uiea e vvhakaoratia ai e la nga ahua mate katoa me nga mauitiinga te ngakau me te tinana. Kua homaitia e la Tona kaha ki nga tangata enei ra ma roto i te Tohungatanga. Kei a ratou te tikanga mo te whakaora i nga turoro ma runga i te inoi te whakapono. Te tikanga hoki kua whakatakotoria 1110 te whakawalii ki te hinu e nga kaumatua o te Hahi. Ma tatou hoki te tikanga ki te karanga i nga kaumatua kia haere mai ki te vvhakawahi i a tatou ahakoa he aha te mate, a me te whakapono ki taua tikanga. E pa ana tenei ki nga taitamariki me nga kaumatua. Me ako hoki nga tamariki nonohi ki te whakaiuahi i to ratou whakapono me te tono ano i nga kau- niatua ki te haere mai ki te whakawahi i a ratou. Ma tenei whakapono anake ka taea eta hi ahua mate ahakoa kahore e v> hakav. ahia, a meite kahore tenei whakapono, hore he painga te whakawahi ahakoa he aha te ahua te mate. I te mea he whakapono to tatou i roto i te Tohungatanga kahore he take o tatou e whakakahore ai i te matauranga kua oti nei te homai e te Atua ki te tangata hei v\ hakakahore me te whakaora hoki i nga mate. E tika ana tatou me kaua e mahi i nga mahi pohehe e ngoikore ai o tatou tinana, a kaua ano hoki tatou e whaka- kahore i ta te takuta i ko.rero ai ki a tatou i nga mate unit a penei i te ' ' Taipo-Piwa. ' ' Tet alii mea ano i meatia tatou kia mahi ki nga mea e pupuri ana i te Tohungatanga, he l-apu i nga homaitanga- whakaora-turoro, ma roto ratou tiaki i tatou ngakau me nga ringaringa kia aiaa, a me te oha alu i a tatou inoi me era at ti mahi. A me takatu hoki tatou kia pena ka karangatia ki te haere kia whakawahi nga turoro, ahakoa ko tehea taima te ra o te po ranei. Ratapu tuarua, Noema 14, 1920. AKORANGA 31. Ko te Rerenga Paora ki Roma. Ka miitu mi A. I Merita -Malta) e ono tekau tnaero ki te taha whaka-te- 312 TE karere Qketopa 27, 1926 tonga o Hihiri. 1. Te atawhai o nga tangata taua wahi. Mahi 28 : 1-2. 2. Ko te merekara o Paora i te talia te ahi. Mahi 28 : 3-6. Tirohia tahitia i a Ruka 13 : 1-5. Ko te whakapono te Hurai, ki te pa tetahi mate ki tetahi tangata ko tera te utu ona hara. Uiuia tenei. 3. Ko te powhiritanga a Pupiriu, he rangatira te motu. Mahi 28 : 7-10. 4. Ko te nieatanga etahi atu merekara. Mahi 28: 8-9. Na ko eriei iwi kaore i te Hahi o te Karaiti. B. Ko te tutukitanga o te haerenga o Paora. 1. Ka rere ano a Paora. Mahi 28 : 11-14. 2. Ko te powhiritanga Paora i Apiuwhorania (e wha tekau maero te matara atu i Roma). Mahi 28 : 15. 3. Te unga ki Roma. 61 A.I). 4. Ko te mahi a Paora i roto i nga Hurai Roma. Ko te maha nga Hurai i taua \va (61 A.D.) e 60,000. Mahi 28 : 17-29. 5. Ko te mahi a Paora i waenganui nga tauiwi Roma. Mahi 27 : 8-31. Ratapu tuatoru, Noema 21, 1926. me te Ratapu tuawha, Noema 28, 1926 (T runga i te mea i tae tureiti mai nga akoranga mo enei wiki, na matou enei kaupapa i whakarite hei korerotanga ma koutou i roto i enei Ratapu e rua). Nga Etita. Ratapu tuatoru, Noema 21, 1926 Kei te Akoranga me nga Kawenata, wahanga 89. Kei a Raniera, te I o nga upoko. Ratapu tuawha, Noema 28, 1926 Kei te Akoranga me nga Kawenata, wahanga 119. Kei te Whakaatu Tere ano hoki, wharangi 139, ara nga karaipiture mo te whakatekau: Rewitikuha 27:30-34; Taua- nga l8:2L 26; Kenehi T4:t8-20; Hiperu 7:1, 2. 5; Tiuteronomi 14:22-25, 22:28-29; Kenehi 28:22; Nehemia 13:10-12; Whaka- papa Tuarua 31:5, 6, 9, 10; Maraki 3:8, 10, II; Whakatauki 3:ro; Matiu 23:23. OketOpa 27, I926 TE KARERE 313 PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL CHARACTERS" First Sunday, November 7, 1926. FAST DAY TOPIC. The Example of Jesus : What it Bids us Do. HEALING THE SICK. "And they brought unto Him ail sick people that were taken with divers diseases and torments, and those which were possessed with devils, and those which were lunatick, and those that had palsy; and he healed them." Matt. 4:24. There are two outstanding characteristics oi' the earthly ministry: He was the greatest of all teachers; He was also the greatest of healers. In both of these activities He established great reputation throughout all Palestine. These activities combined to arouse the hatred of the Jewish rulers at Jerusalem and of the scribes and Pharisees. It was this hatred and fear of His success that lead ultimately to His arrest, trial and crucifixion. This lesson, however, concerns only Jesus as a healer, and v. hat His example in this respect bids us do. It bids the child to cultivate implicit faith in the power of God to heal both physical and mental ailments. This power, having been conferred upon men in this age, is manifest through Ihe higher Priesthood, which has authority to heal the sick through the prayer of faith. To this end the ordinance of an- nointing with oi! by the elders of the Church has been established. All members of the Church are admonished to invoke this ordinance, together with their own faith, as a menus of recovery from ;ill forms of illness. This much applies to both children and adults of all Sunday School ages. Young children should be taught to exercise ihis faith and to ask their parents to call in tli 7, 1926 duty to exercise wisdom and knowledge both in the prevention and the treatment of sickness and injuries through accident. Intelligence is also a God-given power, thankfulness for which should be manifest in its exercise toward the accomplishment of worthy ends. This also applies alike to children and to adults. In addition, those who hold the higher Priesthood have the obligation to seek the gift of healing and to so live as to be worthy of it ; also to be willing always, as Jesus was, to respond 10 calls to relieve the suffering from their afflictions. Second Sunday, November 14, 1926 Lesson 27. The Division of the Kingdom. Text : I Kings, chapter 13. Objective: To show thai rulers can only rule successfully through the practice of religious truths and principles. Supplementary References: [I Beacon Lights of History {Lord) 239. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: Solomon had been a great and wonderful ruler. His son Rehoboam succeeded him. The people visited him asking relief from taxation. He consul! ed his older counsellors who advised him to grant relief. His younger counsellors advised against it. He followed the latter advice: The Division of the Kingdom followed. Develop through a study of the history of nations how such results always follow Also take up the loss of the ten tribes which had its beginning in this separation. Questions for Teachers. L (Jive at least three examples of divisions in a nation that have been brought about by the same factors that caused the revolt in the kingdom of Rehoboam. 2. Give an example of what can be accomplished in a nation through the application of gospel principles. Third Sunday, November 21. I92t> Lesson 28. Elijah. Text: 1 Kings, chapters 7-22; 11 Kings, chapters 1-9. Objective: To show that true service never fails of reward. Supplementary References: 11 Beacon Lights of History Oketopa 2/, 1926 TK K.ARERE 315 (Lord) 239. "... ... . . Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: After the Division of the Kingdom we find Israel in need of divine guid- ance. The appearance of Elijah one of the most unique characters in Jewish history. Large of stature with features fierce and stern : His great work : Miracles ; Teaching under difficulties. Point out how Ahab's dynasty was overthrown through failure to heed the warnings of Elijah. Questions for Teachers. 1. In your opinion what response would be given a man of Elijah's type to-day who came bearing a message of repentance with the force he did in his day ? 2. Is there need for such a man in the world to-day? Give your reason for your answer whether "Yes" or "No." Fourth Sunday, November 28, 1926 Lesson 29. Elisha. Te::t: 1 Kings 19; II Kings 2-13. Objective: To show that (Jod always gives strength to a man engaged in His service. Suggestions on Preparataion and Presentation: Elisha a second prophet to Israel. A gentle and humble man. Compare with Elijah. The mantle of Elijah fell upon Elisha.. Explain fully and bring out the power of the Priesthood. After receiving the authority to act through Elijah point out the force of his work through his: Miracles; Teachings. In conclusion portray the growth from the lime of his call as he tilled his fields. Questions for Teachers. 1. (Jive three reasons why two such different men as Elijah and Elisha should follow in teaching a people righteousness. 2. Give an example of the same thing at it has occurred since the establishment of the Church in our day. INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT "THE BOOK OF MORMON" First Sunday, November 7, 1926 310 TE KARERE Gketopa 27, 1926 UNIFORM FAST DAY LESSON. Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 313 General Subject ; The example of Jesus : what it bids us do. Adaptation for the Intermediate Department. The example selected for this month is that of healing the sick.. The Uniform Fast Day Lesson is not to be discussed as are the other lessons of the month but is to be used to induce the class members to bear their testimonies. This lesson is especially well adapted to such treatment. The teacher might recall some of the healings accomplished by Jesus ; then lead members of the class to tell of incidents of which they have personal knowledge where healing and health restora- tions haA T e been accomplished through faith and the ordinance of armointing with oil and administra J ion by the Priesthood. A few days before this was written, a boy, ten years of age, living in the Highland Park Ward, ran a nail in his foot. The foot was bathed and properly dressed. The next day it was badly swollen and very painful. The father and mother had been Called out. The boy got the consecrated oil, called in brothers and sisters around him and after putting some oil on his foot, he asked them to join him in a prayer. The next morning his foot was much better. His prayer was answered. Second Sunday, November 14, 1926 Lesson 27. Two Mighty Prophets. Text: Ilelaman. chapters 10 to i(J. Objective: To teach that "Blessed are they who will repent and hearken unto the voice of the Lord their God; for they are they that shall be saved." (Helaman 12:23.) Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. Special Assignment: a. Nephi comforted of the Lord (Hel. 10.) b. The great famine (Hel. 11:1-10..) c. Nephi 's prayer and its answer (Hel. 11:11-18..) d. Return to wickedness. (Hel. 11:19-38.) e. Signs of Christ's birth and death foretold. (Hel. 15.) f. Effect of prophecies upon The people. (Hel. 16.) Okciop.. 27, 192o IE K.ARERE 317 2. Passages to be memorised by all the pupils: Hel. 12:7-23. o. The teacher should briefly present the main points in Hel. 13 Questions for Teachers. 1. Name some of the ways in which Nephi had proven himself wonhy of the confidence which the Lord placed in him. 2. Briefly review the condition of the Nephites as set forth in Hel. 13. 3. in what particulars did Samuel's prophecies regarding Christ differ from any others? 1. Contrast the conditions of the believers and unbelievers, set forth in llel. 15th and 16 chapters. Third Sunday, November 21, 1926 Lesson 28. The Night Without Darkness — Victory Over the ( Jadianton Band. Text: 111 Nephi, chapters 1 to 5. Objective: To teach that by faith and prayer and righteous- ness we may obtain victory over our enemies. Supplementary References: History of the Church, Vol. 2, pp. 102-105. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: L Special Assignment to pupils: a. Threatenings of the wicked. HI Nephi 1:1-9. b. Nephi 's prayer. Ill Nephi 10:14. e. The sign given and its effect. Ill Nephi 1 :15-26. d. Gadianton Band. Ill Nephi 1:27-30; chapter 2. e. Giddianhi's letter. Ill Nephi 3:1-10. t'. Lachoneus' faith and works. Ill Nephi 3:11-26, g. Victory over the robbers. Ill Nephi 4. h. Nephites repent. Ill Nephi 5:1-7. 2 Passages to be memorised by all the pupils: 111 Nephi ) :12-14; 1 :19-21 ; 4:31. 1. Discuss the words of the Saviour spoken to Nephi as a source of belie 1 " in pro-existence. 2. Name the outstanding things in Lachoneus thai place him among the great Book of Mormon characters. 3. What value did the answer to prayer which Nephi received add to the sn/n which follows.' 3i8 TH KARERE Gketopa 27, 1926 Fourth Sunday, November 28, 1926- Lesson 21). Signs of the Saviour's Death. Text: III Nephi 6-10. Objective: To teach that the words of the Lord spoken through His prophets are always fulfilled. (See III Nephi 10:14, 15.) Supplementary References: Matthew 27:50-53; Luke 23; 44, 45. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: 1. The teacher should briefly relate the story told in III Nephi, chapter 6, and 7:1-14, to bring vividly before the class the power that Satan has to lead us astray. 2. Special assignment: a. Nephi 's great faith and wo;ks. ill Nephi 7:15-26. b. A great storm. Ill Nephi 8:1-18. . c Darkness upon the land. Ill Nephi 8:19-25. d. The voice from heaven. Ill Nephi, chapters 9 and 10. 3. Passages to be memorised by the pupils: III Nephi, 9:13-22. 1. Make a contrast between the powers of light and darkness as given in III Nephi, chapter 7. 2. Describe briefly tint great storm and darkness. 3. Discuss the principal cause assigned by the Saviour for the great destruction. KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT First Sunday, November 7, 1926. PAST DAY LESSON. General Subject ; The example of Jesus: Avhat it bids us do. Special Topic : Healing the Sick. Text : M-tt. 4 2! Time: Just after the choosing of the four disciples. Place : In Galilee. Objective : If we recognise and make use of the divine healing power that has been given us, we can be healed according to our faith. Story : How Thor was Healed. ( Adapted by Ina J. Johnson) Okelopa 2], 1920 TE KARERE 319 I. Thor's life. 1. He lived in Jerusalem. a. He was a homeless orphan. b. He and his companions lived behind two high walls of some buildings. c. He earned his living by running after chariots. As they passed by he would hold out his hands and beg for alms (money). d. Nearly every chariot driver would throw money to the boys. 2. Thor hears about a great King who is coming. a. Thor watches and waits every day for this Great King. b. He is told that he is only a poor beggar boy; that the King will not come near him. c. Thor's faith is strong. He keeps saying he knows thai he shall see Him. 11. A Cruel Day. 1. Thor runs after a chariot calling for alms. 2. The cruel driver raises his whip and cut Thor across the eyes with the stinging lash. 3. Thor fell to the earth never to see again. a. He lay there until his companions came and helped him home, between the walls. b. From now on he must stay at home. He could not earn his living any more. c. He thought more and more of the coming of the King. He would say, "When the King comes I shall see. ' ' d. He was laughed at but he kept on saying it. They would tell him he was blind and could not see. He would say. "But He will help me to see." His faith was strong. ill. The King Arrives. 1. Thor hears great shouting and singing. a. liis heart leaps for joy. lie knows the King has conic. Now he shall sec. b. He feels his way out Prom the v. alls to the road. c. Mis companion comes for him, and takes him to where the King is healing people. 32P te kAKKRK Oketopa 27, 1926 d. Thor sings praises and Hosanna to the King and keeps saying, "I shall sec the King" over and over again. IV. In the King's Presence. 1. Thor hears voices ; couid feel the great crowds, but could not see. 2. Gentle hands are laid on his head, a gentle voice spoke, ''Through your faith you shall see." 3. Thor opened his eyes and beheld Jesus, he King. Tin r bows in thanksgiving and gratitude. V. Jesus administers to Sick and Afflicted. 1. Thor follows Him, sees Him heal the lane raise the dead, cure people wi J h palsy, and open the eyes of the blind. 2. Thor's little heart overflows with joy and gratitude, lie. wants to be like Jesus. Faith is the subtle chain that binds us to the Infinite. Faith is the true prophet of the soul and ever beholds a spiritual life, spiritual revelations, labours and joys. While prayer is the key t o open the door. "Whatsoever ye ask, ask in faith nothing wavering, and ye shall receive." A pplication : How we can be helped: 1. By recognising the Divine Healing Power we have on earth to-day. 2. By having faith and knowing it will be granted if it is best for us. 3. Stimulate children to relate incidents of healing through faith and the Power of the Priesthood. Thus strengthening both their testimonies and faith. -i. i head children to see how blessed we are by having this Power in our midst. Suggestive Songs: "Jesus Once Was a Little Child," D.S. Songs; "Jesus Our Loving Friend," page 59, Kindergarten and Primary Songs. Gem : We love the name of Jesus He hears us when we pray, He gives us many blessings And helps us day by day. — Annie Mai in. Oketopa 27, 1926 TE KARERE 321 We may cheer the sick by taking a basket of flowers or fruit to a neighbour who is ill. Dramatise the gathering of the fruit and flowers and the carrying of them to the sick. We may also sing a cheerful song for the sick friend. Second Sunday, November 14, 1926. Topic : The Precious Record. Text : "History of the Church," Vol. 1, pages 15, 16, 18, 71. References: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten," Lesson 64. Time: Just after the Angel's visit to Joseph. Place : At the Hill Cumorah. Song and Gem: Same as last Sunday. Objective: An earnest effort to prepare one's self for the work of the Lord will be rewarded. Suggestions : Everything will come in its own due time if we wil lonly be patient. Joseph being led to the very spot where the records were hid, proves to us that if we would only be more willing to be led by the Spirit of God we would be greatly blessed. By Joseph's faithfulness and obedience in not taking the records until the proper time leads us to see that we must be faithful although we do not get the desired results at once, we must wait until our Father sees fit to give them.. Think what the results of Joseph's patience, labour, and faithfulness brought to us, in fact, a message was given to the whole world. Show the books to the children, tell them what they are. Third Sunday, November 21, 1926. Topic: Jesus' ('nil to the fisherman. Time: When .) '24 Juvenile lesson for October. Objective: Those who are obedienl to the Master's call become more helpful to their fellowmen. 3 22 TH KAK KRE Oketopa 2/, i^6 Suggestions : Peter and James were humble, steady in their work. They were faithful workers or Jesus never would have chosen them. They were obedient to their parents as boys. Helpful and useful, the kind of men they were when Jesus chose them proves the kiind of children they were when little. If we want to serve our Father when we are old, we must begin when small. Obedience to parents, learning to be helpful and usful when small w T ill prepare us for any work the Lord might see fit to give us when we are older. The Lord always selects the faithful member. Rest Exercise : Same as for last Sunday. Song. ' ' Obedience, ' ' Kindergarten and Primary Songs, Thomassen, page 16. Gem : " Even 1 a little child May help someone to-day. I can make my parents glad If quickly I obey. '* Pourth Sunday, November 28, 1926 T(;p : e: Authority of Christ again restored to the earth. T«me: In the bitter day. Place : In Nauvoo.. Te-:t : History of the Church, vol 1, pages 40-42. General Reference : Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, lesson 66; 1924 Juvenile lesson for October.. Objective: In order to official c in the ordinances of the Gospel a man must be called by those in authority. Suggestions: People couid not see the need of baptism as Joseph Smith taught it. But it was given to Joseph as the correct form. Then, too, it was the same manner in which Christ was baptised. As Christ set the example, we therefore, know -hat it is the correct mode of baptism. Again we have the Sacrament. Jesus gave it to His disciples just before His departure and told them to meet often and do il in remembrance of Him. It was also given Joseph Smith. He was told how to administer the sacrament — what to say, and what they would use (bread and water) ; also how and when they should partake of it. Oketopa. 27, 1926 TE .KARERE .323 The power- o'i healing- the sick and afflicted was given to Joseph . also, ..." .. ;..S«> ..tOrday we have (he same power 011 earth to help us as Jesus used when He was on the earth. How grateful we should hag rand to, show, our ..gratitude we should do the will of our Heavenly Father and . keep His commandments. Help the children to see that if they do these things when they are little, they will when they are larger. Rest Exercise: Lead the children to suggest what Mother Nature is doing to prepare for winter — the flowers are going to sleep— the leaves are falling — birds flying to the South, etc. Dramatise the. suggestions offered. Song: "We Thank Thee, God, for a Prophet," page 102, D.S.S. Song Booh. MAHI HUi ATAWHAI. UORA S. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai. AKORANGA MO NCEMA. Na Toke Wateiie i whakama'ori. Te Wa t) te Taima i Rite ai. (Meridian of Time). Ko nga Taha e Rua e te Karaiti. 1. I roto i te wa o Toria malii iiiimta i te ao nei i korero te Kai Whakaora 111011a ano ko te "Tama te Tangata" ma roto i Tona whaea, ko Tona matua nei no te Whare Rawiri, a ko te matua ilm ko te Atua. 2. E rua nga taha te mihaha lhu. e rua nga putake: Tuatalii he Atua ki te whawhai kia taea te mate me te hoko i nga tangata, Tuartia kia taunga ai In ki nga mate tangata. Ko 1c almatanga ki nga taha e rua   te Karaiti kei te marama i te whakaatu a te Poropiti a A |>i na ii i roto i te Pukapuka a Moromoiia. Aloliia L5 : 1*6. 3. A Meri me Hohepa tokorua raua no te kawei tahi nga momo kingi. Ko ta Alatiu whakaatu e whaka-u ana i te momo kingitaiiga Hohepa. Ki ta Ruka koki e pera ana ano mo Alni te hek e ia i te moenia oa i : ■ 8 nga haora i te po te Mane, 18 o nga ra o oketop . ki Akarana. Ko tona tinana i haria mai na runga tima, a n > 1 ;. 1 i te I ait •, ka u mai ki Turanga. Kua tae a Ngati Kahungunu ki runga i tona aitua Poroporoaki, ha re ra e koro e! Haerj ra i roto i t e kakahn nga tipnna kua wciic atu ki te po. II iere, \\ aiho 332 TE KARERE Oketopa 27, j 9^6 ko te aroha me te mamae o te ngakau, me au mahi papai, hei'hoa i muri nei. Kua ngaro koe i nga marae maha o tou Iwi Maori. Heoi ano na To Ao Wirihana Ko te tiima tuarua tenet te M.A.C. whiitn-paoro, ara te Third Grade. KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. Ko Erata EZRA H. ANDERSON (Anihana) o Bingham, Utah. 1 tae mai a ia i te 2 o nga ra o Hune 1923 a ka whaka- ritea ki te takiwa o Waikato. 1 te [30 nga ra o Mei 1924, ka whakaritea ko : a hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa. I te 15 o nga ra o Hurae ka nukuhia atu a Anihana ki te takiwa o Mania, hei tumuaki mo reira. Tukua honoretia atu i te 28 o nga ra o Hepetema 1920. Ko Erata ARNEL J. TALBOT (Tarapata^ o Lewiston, Utah. I tae mai a Tarapata i te 23 o nga ra o Pepuere 1924 a i whakaritea ki te takiwa o Hauraki. I te 23 o nga ra o Aku- hata 1925 ka whakaritea hei tumuaki mo taua takiwa. I mahi ia hei tumuaki mo reira tae noa mai ki ce wa o tona hokinga atu ki tona kainga. Tukua honoretia atu i te 28 o nga ra o Hepetema '926. Ka panuitia o raua whakaahua ki Te Karere o Noema. Okelopa 27, 1926 TE KARERE __ 333 Te Urlmi me te Tumlne. Loia nei nga mea whakamiharo i taea ai e Hohepa Mete te whaka- maon te Pukapuka a Moromona. I te whakaatu raai a te Anahera a Moron ai ki a Hohepa Mete i peiiei tana ki: 1 ' Kei reira ano hoki etahi kohatu e rua, i te mowhiti hiriwa — a ko enei kohatu i whakamana ki roto i tetahi arai uma, i karangatia nei ko te Urimi me te Tumine." Tuhituhinga a Hohepa Mete 2: 35. I te wa i vvhakamaori ai ia i te Pukapuka a Moromona, titiro ai ia ina roto i nga mowhiti nei ki nga whakairo i runga i nga papa koura, ka kite hoki ia i te kupu e rite ana mo ia ahua whakairo, koia ki te korero atu i tana kupu ki tona kai-tuhi ki a Oriwa Kautere. Ko te mea whakamiharo o tenei mahi whakamaori o raua, ka mau tonu te kite Hohepa Mete i taua kupu, kia oti ra ano te tuhi, kia tika hoki, katahi ano taua kupu ka ngaro, ka puta mai hoki ko nga kupu o muri iho. Ko tenei Urimi rne te Tumime he mea hoatu ki te teina Iarere i runga i te maunga, i a ia i korero ai ki te Ariki he kanohi he kanohi. ( Akoranga me nga Kawenata 17: 1.) He Urimi ano he Tumine i a Aperahama. Ina hoki tana korero: "Na, i a au i Aperahema te Urimi me te Tumine i homai ai ki a au e te Ariki, e te Atua, i te whenua Uru o nga Kariri. " Aperahama 3: 1. - He pera ano i a Arona i tona turanga tohunga. "Me whakanoho ano hoki e koe nga Irimi rne nga Tumine ki te kouma whakarite whakawa a hei te ngakau Arona aua mea, ina haere ki te aroaro o Iaowa." Ekoruhe 28: 30. I te wa i whakaritea ai a Hohua hei kai whakahaere mo te whanau a Iharaiia i muri mai i a Mohi: "A ka tu ia ki te aroaro Ereatara tohunga, ko tent ano he kai tono whakaaro mana, i ta te Urimi e whaka- rite ui i te aroaro o Ihowa. ' ' Tauanga 27: 21. L te matenga o liamuera Poropiti kua kore katoa i a Haora uga v\ aka Atua me nga rapa maori o te whenua, "i huihui mai hoki nga Pirihitini noho ana ki Tunema i huihuia ano e Haora a Iharaira katoa ki Kiripoa. A, te kitenga o Haora i te taua a nga Pirihitini, ka wehi, pawera rawa tona ngakau. A, te uinga a Haora ki a Ihowa, hore rawa he kupu a .Ihowa i whakahokia ki a ia e nga moe, e nga Urimi, e nga poropiti." I Hamuera 2H: 3-6. I ui a Rawiri ki te Ariki ma roto i te Urimi me te Tumine. (I Hamuera 30: 7-8.) I nga ra o Hairuha kingi Pahia i tahuri ia ki te whakahoki i nga Hurai ki Hiruharama, i riro nei i nga whakaraunga ki Pupurona, otira i te kohinga i a ratott, ka kitea i roto   nga tama a nga tohunga, kua 334 TE KARERE Okelopa 2/, 1926 ngaro te pukapuka whakapapa tupuna, 110 reira poke ana ratou, mutu ake to ratou tohungatanga.-.v^'Katahi to kaw.ana ka mea ki a ratou, kia kaua ratou e kai i nga mea tapu rawa, kia ara ake ra ano tetahi tohunga kei a ia nga Urimi me nga Turnine.-" Etera 2; 62-63. E ki ana te Pukapuka a Moromona: '- Na, te tangata kei a ia nei enei mea, e karangatia ana ia he matakite.'' Mohi. 28: 16-. .'-.-'- Ka kite tatou koia nei tetahi nga ahua whakakite mad a te Atua i Una whakaaro puku ki Ana pononga ki nga p^ropiti, ki. nga matakite, ma roto mai i te Urimi me te Tumime: penei me larere, me Aperahama, me Arona, me Ereatara, me Kawiri, me Hohepe Mete. Ko enei Urimi, Tumime, he tauira iti no nga mea nunui o te Atua. Te Hakarameta he tauira whakamaharatanga mo te matenga o te Karaiti mo nga hara o te ao." Ko nga ra te wiki mai i te Mane ki te Ratapu, he tauira mai no nga mano tau i hanga ai e te Atua te ao. Ko ta tatou taima he mea whika mai i te huringa porotaka o te whenua, te raunatanga i te ra; ko ta te Atua he mea whika ke i nga mea nunui i roto i te Kikuraiigi ara i Korapa. Ko Korapa e rite ana ki te tauira a te Ariki, ki Ona taima ki Ona wa, i to reira takahurihuri ; ara kotahi takahuritanga kotahi. ra ki te Ariki. i runga i Tana ritenga • tat.au, a kotahi mano tau e rite ana ki te taima i whakaritea mo te whenua e tu nei tatou i runga. Ko te ra kotahi ki a Korapa he mano tau ki a tatou. ' ' Mehemea t'era etahi mea e rua, a kei runga atu ano tetahi i era, a tera ano he mea 7iui kei runga atu i era no reira ko Korapa te mea nui rawa o era atu -Kokaupima kua kit-ea na- e koe, no te mea koia ra te mea tata mai ki a au.-" Aperahama 3: 13-16. "' Na'.eriei wnakVaiuranga tatou ka mohio, ko nga mea nunui te whenua he tauira iti no nga mea kei te aroaro te Atua. '" ' "Ko te wahi hoki e achia ana e te Atua he Urimi he Tumime tino nui rawa. Ko tenei ao. ina tae ki tona ahua e v.iiakatnpua, e mate kore ai, ka meinga and he kafaihe tona rite, ka meinga hei Urimi hei Tumime ki te hunga e noho ana i runga, 111c reira hoki c Avhakaatu ki te hunga e noho ana i reira nga mea katoa o te kingitanga i rare iho i a .ia, ara o nga kingitanga katoa kei aro iho i a ratou; a hei reira -tenei ao riro ai i a te Karaiti." Akoranga me nga Kawenata 130: 8-9. NA ERU T. KUPA. "Haere ki te popokorua, e te tangata mangere, mataki- takina iho ona ara, kia nui ai ou whakaaro." Horomona, "Tama tu, tama ora; tama noho, tama mate kai." Whakatauki Maori - "Waihoki ' ko te whakapOno, ki te kahore ana mahi, he •mea mate, koia anake hoki." Hemi. Okjtopa j;\ 192J TE KARKKE 335 3 S ^ h $ Oketopa 27, 1920 TE K ARK RE Ki Te Karere, tena koe e te manu hari atu i nga whaka- aro o nga marae o te Ika o Maui. Ko nga ingoa enei e whai ake nei o nga kai-kauwhau o Waikato me nga wahi i kara- ngatia ai ratou mo nga marama e rua, mo Noema me Tine- ma. Hoani Ormsby \ Matakowhai Tetahi Kaumatua j Tamati Honetana 1 Tahuna Wiki tuarua Raite Te Hira Hamiora Pohutuhutu 1 Tauhei Wiki tuatoru Totana Arona Te Awe Ponga ! Taupiri Wiki tuatoru Ngaha Rotana Hongi Rawhiti I Kawhia Kotahi wiki Tetahi Kaumatua Henare Maiho 1 Pukekohe J Puketapu Wiki tuarua Hemi Paki Hokio Tarawhiti 1 Ngarua- j wahia Wiki tuarua Karena Takoro Tu George Stockman \ Okahukura Wiki tuarua Richard Lovett J Winiata Kapinga 1 Aria Wiki tuatoru Te Whetu Warahi Mipi Tangihaere 1 Piopio Wiki tuawha Wanahi Tangihaere Here Tangihaere \ Matiere Wiki tuatahi Tupu Waaka Te Whare Hetaraka }• Weraroa Wiki tuatahi Te Whatu Apiti 1 Waitatuna L Tom Reti Wiki tuarua Tena ra koutou e oku tuakana aroha, e nga kai-kauwhau i nga tikanga o tenei Rongopai o tatou. I nga marama kua pahure ake nei, i a au e haere ana, kua kite ahau, kua kore etahi o nga kai-kauwhau e kaha ki te whakarite i o ratou ka- rangatanga. E hoa ma, ehara tenei i te ahuatanga pai mo kou- tou ara mo Waikato. Kua oti ra te korero, "Me pehea hoki e rongo ai ki te kahore he kai-kauwhau?" No reira e kite ana tatou he mahi nui whakaharahara ta tatou ara te kauwhau- tanga 6 te Rongopai ki nga iwi e noho ana i roto i te pouri- tanga. Kati, "E moe ana nga niata hii tuna, e ara ana nga mata hii taua." No reira, kia kaha, kia toa, kia manawanui i nga wa e takoto inai nei. Ma te Atua koutou e awhina, Na to koutou teina na Reheri 1>. Paapiti TE KARERE Oketopa 2/, tv,26 KO NCA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA Ko enei etahi o nga pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei ho- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Aiickt.i ' :ig. "All glory be to God on high, And to the earth be peace; Good will, henceforth, from heaven to men, Begin and never cease." 8. Duet or Quartette (selected): No. 28, D.S.S. — "A Stranger Star O'er Bethlehem"; or No. 81, S. of X. — "Far, Far Away, on Judea 's Plains. " i>. Speech by member of Maori Theological (Mass (10 minutes): "The Mission of Jesua Christ in the World." Outline: 1. The Effects of the Fall (Transgression) of Adam and Eve. i 1 . The Atonemenl of Christ. (a) Overcomes physical death. (b) Overcomes spiritual death. 10. Song by the Kindergarten Pupils: "Luther's Cradle Hymn." (No- 248, s. of 'A., and No. 21 I, D.8.S.) 11. An Acrostic, ".lesus Christ," by Intermediate Pupils. (Each Pupil bears a large letter; it the class is small, each pupil could take two \o TH KA RERL Noema 24, i^»2( letters.) 1. J is for JUSTICE Pupil recites Jeremiah 23: 5-6. 2. E » EQUALITY „ Mark 1G: 15-16. 3. S „ SALVATION „ Acts 4: 10-12. 4. u » UNITY „ Galatians 3: 26-28. 5. s » SERVICE „ Matthew 22: 37-40. 6. c „ CHARITY „ Matthew 5: 43-44. 7. H „ HUMILITY „ Matthew 23: 11-12. S. R >y ) , RIGHTEOUSNESS „ Matthew 5: 19-20. 9. I „ , IMMORTALITY „ P. of G.P. Moses 1:39 10. S » > SINCERITY >y Matthew 15: 7-9. 11. T „ > TRUTH „ John 8: 31-32. All Students then recite in unison the 1st and 2nd Articles of Faith. 12. Song by Choir or Congregation: No. 8 S. of Z. — "An Angel from on High. ' ' 13. Speech (10 minutes) by member of Pakeha Theological Class: — "The Teachings of Joseph Smith and Their Effect on Mankind." Outline: 1. Spiritually; references, D. and C. 6: 13; 18: 22; sec. 20; sec. 7(5. 2. Morally; D. and C. 42: 22-20; 03: 10-18; 88: 07-09- 121. 3. Intellectually; 55: 4; 88: 118: 90: 15; 93: 30; 131: 0. 4. Physically; 88: 124; sec. 89. 5. Serially; 20: 2; 42: 12; 51: 4-5; 60: 13; sec. 132 (marriage): iiei'erciioes given to help speaker in preparing speech.) 14. Recitation by members of Intermediate Class- — 1 « PRAISE TO THE BOY. ' ' (By Bertha A. Kleinman.) Praise to the Boy who communed with Jehovah, Millions shall honor his memory to be; To me he is nearer and dearer in childhood, When he was a boy, young and trusting, like me. I love to remember him happy and playful, Joining the games that were honest and square, Leading and loyal to every companion, Everyone's playmate because he was fair. I love to remember him kind and obedient, Honoring parents as every boy should, Thoughtful of others, especially his mother, Blessing his household with service and good. Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE 341 To me, best of all, is his mother } s own story, Of love and devotion no heart could withstand, A hero in pain and a scout in affliction, When a victim he lay to the scourge of the land. His sister restored, it was Joseph who languished, His boyish form tortured again and again, Aud watching and helping, 'twas Hyrum who tended (Companions in childhood, twin martyrs as men). No potion to ease through the grim operation, No ether to deaden in slumber J s relief; They proffered him wine, but he kindly refused them, Submitting to all in his matchless belief. Ho conquered: he lived to commune with Jehovah; To honor his parents in joy and distress; All praise to the hero — his childhood has taught me Tiiat I. too, have parents to honour and bless. lo. Reading by member of Pakeha Theological Glass: — "A Tribute, by Josiah Ouincy, Mayor of the City of Boston, U.S.A., 1845-1849." May 15th, 1844:— "It is by no means improbable that some future text-book for the use of generations yet unborn, will contain a question something like this: What historical Ameri- can of the nineteenth century has exerted the most powerful influence upon the destinies of his countrymen? And it is by no means impossible that the answer to that interrogatory may be thus written : Joseph Smith, the Mormon Prophet. And the reply, absurd as it doubtless seems to most men now living, may be an obvious commonplace to their descendants. History deals in surprises and paradoxes quite as startling as this. The man who established a religion in this age of free debate, who was, and is to-day, accepted by hundreds of thousands as a direct emissary from the Most High — such a rare human being is not to be disposed of by pelting his memory with unsavory epithets. . . . Joseph Smith, claiming to be an inspired teacher, faced adversity such as few men have been called upon to meet, enjoyed a brief season of prosperity such as few men have ever attained, and finally, forty-three days after I saw him, went cheerfully to a martyr's death. When he surrendered his person t  Governor Ford, in order to prevent the shedding of "blood, the Prophet had a present iment of what was before him. "I am going like a lamb to the slaughter," he is reported to have said, "but I am as ealm as a summer's morning. I have u conscience void of offence, and shall die innocent.'' 16. Concluding remarks by Superintendent. 342 TE KARERE Noeina 24, 19^6 17. Congregational Song: Xo. 102, "We Thank Thee, O God, for a Prophet." 18. Benediction by member of Intermediate Class. Karakia Kirihimete, 26 o Tihema, 1926 Na te Tumuaki o nga Kura Hapati o te Mihana o Niu Tireni na Wiremu C. Kaa tenei karakia Kirihimete i whaka- rite hei mahinga ma tatou. Ma te) tumuaki o ia kura e tirotiro ko ewhea ranei o enei nama (items) e taea ana e tona Kura Hapati te mahi. I te mea hoki ko etahi o nga kura nunui e ahei ana te mahi i te katoa, ko etahi kia ono kia waru ranei nga nama ka pau, no te itiiti hoki o nga tangata. E rua nga tino take nunui e whakaritea ana i roto i tenei karakia. Tuatahi he whakanui i te Ra Whanau o te Karaiti, tuarua he whakahonore i te ra whanau a to tatou Poropiti a Hohepa Mete. Kia kaha tatou katoa ki te whakarite i to tena to tena wahi. Kaore he mahi karaihe i whakaritea mo tenei ra, no reira ma ia tangata, wahine, tamariki, e whaka- pau tona kaha kia tino pai ai to tatou karakia Kirihimete. Te taenga atu o nga Karere ma nga kaiwhakaako (apiha) e tuku atu ma tena ma tena o nga mema e whakarite tona wahi i roto i te karakia. A ma nga mema e mahi o ratou wahi kia tino rite i mua atu o te Ratapu Tuatoru. KARAKIA 10:25 a.m. ma te kai-whakatangi-okena e ata whaka- tangitangi te okena kia mutu ai te turituri. 10:30 a.m. ka timata te karakia, ma te hekeretari e panui nga meneti ara te "abstract." 1. Himene No. 101 Pakeha. 2. Whakatuwheratanga ki te inoi, ma tetahi o te Maori Theological. 3. Himene Xo. 129 Pakeha. 4. Ko te Hakarameta. 5. Korero a Ngakau, ma tetahi o nga tamariki rarahi e whakahaere. 1 a I Niwhai 11:13, 18, 20, 21. "A ka kite ahau i te pa o Nahareta; ka kitea hoki e ahau i roto i te pa o Nahareta he puhi, ataahua rawa, Ma tonu ia. Na ka ki mai (te anahera) ki a au, Nana, ko te puhi e kite na koe, ko te whaea ia o te Tama a te Atua, ki to te kikokiko ritenga. A ka titiro atu ahau, ka kite ano i te puhi, e okooko ana i tetahi tamaiti. A ka mea mai te anahera ki a au, Na, te Noema 24, [926 TK KARERE 343 Reme a te Atua, ae ra, te Tama a te Atua Ora Tonu!" 6. Paraketihi Himene, No. 4 Pakeha. 7. Korero Ngutu-kau, ma nga tamariki pakupaku, "Kiri- himete." 8. Waiata, ma nga tangata tokorua, iokowha ranei. 9. Kauwhau ma tetahi o te Maori Theological (kia 10 meneti te roa). Putake: Ko te Mihana o te Karaiti i tenei Ao." 1. Ko nga whiunga mo te hara o Arama raua ko Iwi. 2. Ko te whakamarietanga a te Karaiti, ona ahua- tanga (a) Taea ana e la te mate tinana. (b) Taea ana ano hoki te mate wairua. 10. Waiata ma nga tamariki pakupaku. 11. Tu-a-rarangi ma nga tamariki rarahi, me nga reta, "J-E-S-U-S C-H-K-l-S-T," me te korero a tena a tena i tana rarangi. 12. Himene ma te koaea ma te katoa ranei, No. 8 Pakeha. 13. Kauwhau (kia 10 meneti te roa) ma tetahi o te Pakeha Theological. Putake: "Nga Whakaakoranga a Hohepa Mete me nga Hua i Puta mai." 14. Korero Ngutu-kau ma nga tamariki rarahi. "Whakamoemititia te Tamaiti." 15. He korero pukapuka ma tetahi o te Pakeha Theolo- gical. "He Whakahonoretanga." 16. He kupu whakamutunga ma te Tumuaki kin a Hapati. 17. Himene, 102 Pakeha, 17 Maori. 18. Inoi whakamutunga. Hui Pariha o Manaia (Waiokura) He powhiri atu tenei ki te iwi Maori me nga Hunga Ta- pu o nga motu nei. me nga hoa aroha ano hoki, kia haere mai ki te Hui Pariha o Taranaki ka tu nei ki Manaia (Waio- kura) a te 8 me te 9 o nga ra o Hanuere 1927. Ki nga iwi, ki nga hapu, ki nga reo, ki nga huihuinga tangata e noho mai na koutou i nga kainga 00 koutou tipuna, kuia, tena koutou, kia ora, ka huri, kia tae tinana mai koutou ki ta matou Hui Pariha. Mauri a mai nga kupu nunui, kia kai ta hi a tatou taringa i nga nica wairua. Haere mai. Ran M. Kina, I imnia k i Takiwa Turaki Manuirirangi, fumuaki Peka 544 TIi KARERE Noema 24, iy26 CONCERT RECITATION FOR DECEMBER, 1926. (Mark 10th Chapter, 14lh and 15th Verses.) "... Jesus . . . said unto them, Suffer little children to come unto me, and forbid them not ; for of such is the kingdom 01 God. Verily I say unto you, Whosoever shall not receive the kingdom of God as a little child, he shall not enter therein." KORHRO A NGAKAU MO TIHEMA, 1926. - Kei a Maka 1 o: 1 4.- 1 5. "A, te kitenga o Ihu, ka riri, ka mea ki a ratou, Tukua nga tamariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau, kaua hoki ratou e araia atu: no nga penei hoki te rangatiratanga o te Atua." MAORI THEOLOGICAL. Ratapu tuatahi, Tihema 5, 1926. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. Putake: Ko nga whakahauhau a te tauira i whakatako- toi-ia nei e Ihu hei mahi ma tatou. Ko Ihu me nga Tamariki Nonohi "Na ka kawea ki a ia etahi tamariki nonohi, kia pa ai ia ki a ratou, otira ka riria e nga akonga te hunga nana i kawe. A, te kitenga o Ihu, ka riri, ka mea ki a ratou, Tukua nga tamariki nonohi kia haere mai ki ahau, kaua hoki ratou e araia atu: no nga penei hoki te rangatiratanga o te Atua. He pono taku e mea nei ki a koutou, Ki te kahore e rite te tango a tetahi i te rangatiratanga o te Atua ki ta te tamaiti nohi- nohi, e kore ia e tomo ki roto. Na okookona ana ratou e ia, whakapakia iho ona ringa ki a ratou, manaakitia ana ratou." Maka 10:13-16. I whakaaria e Ihu te matauranga nui i roto i tana mahi, me te aroha nui mo te katoa tae atu ki nga tamariki nonohi> kahore nei e mohio ki te hara me te riper.eta. Na tona aroha ki nga tamariki nonohi ka whakaaria e la te kaha o Tona aroha me te matauranga. 1 kite Ia i te tika o nga tamariki nonohi, a me te nui atu o nga mea e taea e la te ako ki nga tamariki i nga kaumatua. He aha te tikanga nui o tenei tau- ira a Ihu e mea ana i a tatou kia mahi? E tika ana me aroha 1920 Tl£ KARF.RK 345 tatou ki a Ihu, te take e aroha ana ano hoki la ki a tatou. Me ako tatou i a tatou tamanki tera a Ihu e aroha ana ki a ratou, a me te hiahia kia tika ratou. Me tarai tatou ki te pei i nga tohetohenga me nga puhaehaetanga me nga whakamana- mana o o tatou ngakau kia rite ai tatou ki nga tamariki no- nohi. We mahi tatou i nga mahi pai he mea e tiaki tika ai tatou a hei mea hoki e aru tika ai a tatou tamariki i a tatou tauira pera ano me ta Ihu hiahiatanga kia aru tatou i a la. Ko nga Pukapuka a Paora Na Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rapata Tanapu i whakarite. He kupu whakamarama ki nga kai-w hakaako me nga mema o tenei karaihe: Kei nga tuhituhinga a Paora o tatou akoranga hou. Timata mai i Teharonika ka haere o tatou rehana a kia pau ra ano nga tuhituhinga a Paora. Ko etahi o nga pukapuka ka pau i roto i te Ratapu kotahi, ko etahi kia wha kia rima pea nga Ratapu ka pau. Ka whakamutua tenei wahanga o o tatou akoranga ki a Timoti. Ka penei te haere o o tatou rehana: 1. I Teharonika 8. Korohe 2. 2 Teharonika 9. Epeha 3. 1 Koriniti lu. Pirimona 4. 2 Koriniti II. Taituha 5. Karatia 12. Hiperu 6. Roma 13- • Timoti 7. Piripai 14. 2 Timoti Ratapu tuarua, Tihema 12, 1926. Akoranga 32 Ko te Hani i Teharonika Te whakaatu: Kei Nga Mahi 17:1-3, kei a I Teharonika hoki. A. Ko te ahua o te Hahi, ara o te Hunga Tapu. 1. Ko te aroha, te whakapono, te manawanui hoki i roto i nga whakamatautauranga. 1 Teharonika 1:3-6; 3-5-7- 2. Ko te whakatakoto i nga tauira pai ki te hunga wa- ho ma runga i ratou mahi. 1 I eharonika i:/- c ); 4- 1() > Matiu 5:16. 3. Ko te vvhakamanawanui i a ratou ano ki nga tiikino- tanga, he whakaaro hoki ki a te Karaiti. I Teharonika 2:14-15; Nga Mahi E7:5-9- B. Te rrahi a Paora n e ona hoa i Teharonika. 34° i E KARERK na 24, 1920 1. O niton kauwhautanga me nga tukinotanga i puta mai. 1 Teharonika 2:2-16; Mahi f 6:22-23. 2. Ko nga tauira i waihotia e ratou. (a) Ko te ngakau mahaki. 1 Teharonika 2:3-8. (b) Ko te ngakau whakawhetai. 1 Teharonika 2:13, 19, 20; 3:9-10. (c) Ko to ratou kaha ki te mahi, kaore ratou i pai kia taimaha tetahi atu tangata i to ratod mahi. I Teha- ronika 2:9; 2 Teharonika 3:8-9. C. Kia aroha tetahi ki tetahi. I. Ta Paora whakatupatoranga. 1 Teharonika 3:12-13- Whakaritea ki te Akoranga me nga Kawenata 88:123- 125. Katapu tuatoru, Tihema 19, 1926. Akoranga 33 I Waenganiii i ng:i Teharonika A. I tohutohungia te Hunga Tapu kia rite o ratou meatanga katoa ki o te Karaitiana tika. 1. Ko te tinana kia ma. I Teharonika 4:3-5; Hakopa 2:28 (Pukapuka a Moromona); Akoranga me nga Ka- wenata 42:22-26. 2. Kaua e tinihanga. i Teharonika 4:6, 12. 3. Kia aroha. 1 Teharonika 4:9; 5:14; 1 Koriniti 13:1-7. 4. Ko te haere tika (order), te kolahiianga o nga whaka- aro, me te kaha tonn ki te mahi. I Teharonika 4:11; Akoranga me nga Kawenata 42:42; 88:124. 5. Kia nui te whakaaro ki nga tangata kei a ratou nei te mana o te Atua. 1 Teharonika 5:12-13. (6. Whakaritea nga whakahauhau kei a I Teharonika 5:15-25 ki te tekau ma lorn o nga Tikanga o te Wha- kapono. B. Ko te aranga mai te hunga mate me te haerenga tuarua- tanga mai o te Karaiti. 1. Ko to tatou Atua kola ano te Atua o te hunga ora, me to te hunga mate hoki. Mahi 10: j. 2 ; Ruka 2  ok of ls;iiah. Objective: To show that God's purpose is to save His people and lie always gives them repeated warnings of His punishments before execut ing them. Supplementary References: II Beacon Lights of History I Lord) 287. This is a wonderful chapter and should be read by all teachers. Suggestions on Preparation and, Presentation: Discuss the following points : Isaiah a prophel of Judah as Elijah and Elisha had been 1  Israel. Judah had turned from worshiping God lo ungodliness, tsiah born 760 B.C. teaches repentance. Had wife and two sons; lived to the age of 84 and according to tradition suffered martyrdom. A man of good breeding, greal dignity, experience and wisdom. His message was to his nation at a time when drunkness was a national vice and immorality rampant. He was a hopeful man and his condemnations of theii tlways concluded with promises of forgiveness if the people would repent. 1. Compare the people of Israel just before their fall with ihf people of Judah at the time of Isaiah. 2. Name three attributes of character that made Isaiah a : prophet of repentance. Noema 24, 1926 TE karere 349 Third Sunday, December 19, 1926 Lesson 27. Solomon, as a Man Leaving off Serving God. Text: 1 Kings 7: 11. — Book of Ecclesiastes. Objective: To show that as .Solomon left off serving God ho lost his power and his self-respect. He completed Ins temple and dedicated it; His prayer, 1 Kings, 8; His biess.ng on his people; both acts approved by the Lord; his downfall, 1 Kings 11. Following this, he wrote Ecclesiastes. Contrast his attitude and spirit as therein expressed with his attitude as expressed in his Proverbs. Note: Through an error, the lesson, "Solomon, as a Man Leaving Oil' .Serving God, ,; was omitted from the schedule published. To be in order it should be numbered '11, the other lessons following in regular sequence: — Lesson 28, '•'The Division of the Kingdom"; Lesson 29, "Elijah"; Lesson oO, ' ' Elisha ' ' ; Lesson 31, "Isaiah, a Prophet of Kepentanee. ' ' Questions for Teachers. 1. Point out two lessons to be had from Solomon's life. 2. Can you analyze the kind of life a man leads by his outward action/ If so, explain how. Fourth Sunday, December 26, 1926. Christmas Program, see page 338. INTERMEDIATE DEPARTMENT THE HOOK OF MORMON" I irst Sunday, December 5, 1920 FAST DAY LESSON. Same as Pakeha Theological Class. See page 317 Second Sunday, December 12, 1926. Lesson 30. Uhrisl Minister** unto the Nephites, Texl .11! Ncphi 1 Ith to L4tb chapters. Objective: T  teach the reality of the resurrection of Jesus Christ. I Note particular!} Ill Nephi 1 1 .'' I I Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation: l. Genera] assignraenl of all the texl to lie read by  . Power given to baptise. MI Nephi 11:18-41.. c. The Holy Ghost promised. Ill Nephi L2:l, _.. (1. The Beatitudes. Ill Nephi 12:3-12. The salt, the light, and the Law. HI Nephi L3-20. I Thy brother and thee. Ill Nephi 12:21-26; 38-48. g. Purity commanded. Ill Nephi 12:27-37, h Prayer, alms, fasting, and treasures. Ill Nephi 13:1-24. i. Instructions to Twelve. Ill Nephi 13:25-34 j. Instruction on many things. Ill Nephi, chapter 14. Note: The nine pans given above for special assignment should be eareiully assigned to those who would be able to memorise most of them. Thus each part could easily be given ir. four minutes or less. Questions for Teachers. 1 Briefly state why yen think the Xephite knew "of u orety" thai Jesus was the Christ. '.!. Whai added evidence is given in this lesson that baptism is ;> necessary ordinance J .'). Mention some teaching made clearer to our under- standing by reading [Tl Nephi 12th !o 14th chapters. Third Sunday, December 19. 19'Ju. Lesson 31. Jesus Continues His Minis Lrations. Trxt: III. Nephi, 15th to 18th chapters. Objective: To teach that the Savior imparts many blessings to those w lio have fail h in Him. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation; 1. special assignments t  pupils: (a) The Law of Moses. 111. Nephi 15: i-10. Other sheep. 15: 1 1-24; 16: 1-5. Blessings on the Gentiles. 16: 6-20. (.1) The sick healed. 17: L-10. H') Blessing the children. 17: 1 1-25. (t) The Sacrament, 18: 1-13. a I 'raver. 1S : U-23. b - Parting instructions. 18: l'. Passages to Mark and Memorize: III. Nephi. 15: I): 18: 15-19. Encourage the pupils t-> whom special assignments are made to orize their parts. Noeina 24, lyiG TE KARKRE 351 Questions for Teachers. .1. Review briefly the teachings of the Savior in this lesson in regard to the lost sheep of the house of Israel, the Gentiles and the Sac rain cut. '1. Compare the story told in Matthew 19: 13-15 with that in III. Xephi 7: 11-25. Fourth Sunday, December 29, 1926 Christmas Program, see page 338. KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT I irst Sunday, December 5, 1926. Uniform Fast Day Lesson. Topic: The Blessing of Little Children. Time: Just after Christ foretold His death. Hace : On the coasts of Judea. General Reference: Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, Lesson 4o ; Jesus the Christ, pages 475-476. Objective: All who are honest and pure in heart shall i( urn to the presence of their Father. i. Jesus was preaching on the coast of Judea. ! Mothers bring their children to be blessed. a. The disciples want to scud them away. }). Jesus rebukes the disciples and asks them to bring the children to Him. ( 1 ) He told them the kingdom of God was composed of children. (2) Those who could no1 receive the kingdom of God as a Little child should not outer in. 2. The children are brouphl to Jesus. ;i. JeHUS lakes t liom and places His hands on iheir heads h. They go away rejnieiiw ! I. Blessings received to day 1 Blessed and named when babies. 2. Blessed when ill. 3. Blessed when sent on missions, 4. Every one should live to enjoy the blessings given him 5. Blessinirs come Prom God. te KARERh Noema 24, 1926 Rest Exercise: Teach and dramatise the song, "Clouds of Grey, " Patty Hill's Song Book.. 1 Have every child participate in the dramatisation.) Suggestive Song: "Nature's Good-night" Patty Hill. Gem : '"When I run aboul all day When I kneel at night to pray, God sees. Need I ever know a fear ! Might and day my Father's near — God sees." — May Mapes Dodge. Second Sunday, December 12, 1926 Topic: A missionary call and experience. Text: "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten"; also "My First Mission,"' George (±. Cannon. Time: When Elder Cannon was on a mission. Place: in the mission field of Hawaii. Objective: Sacrifice through love for the Gospel brings spiritual blessings. jestions : Tell the children of the experiences Elder Cannon had, and how he sought the Lord for help on every occasion. How and why he was blessed. We never need to be afraid if we obey the teachings of our Heavenly Father and do what we know is right. "Seek ye first the kingdom of Heaven and all else will be added." Oh. if ye could only realise the importance and full meaning of that statement There would be less dishonesty and more righteousness in the world to-day. There is nothing on 1 his earth that can give us the joy and happiness like the Spirit ot our Heavenly Father. Why. not, then, seek for that which gives us the greatest joy and happiness on this earth and fits us for the life to come? Any missionary experience where faith, faithfulness, and I rayerfulness has saved, or helped, may be used to illustrate the thought desired to he put over. Rest Kxereise: Sing and dramatise "Clouds of Grey." Review previous songs learned during the month or teach Noema 24, 1920 TK karere 353 and sing iast verse of "Jesus Wants Me for a Sunbeam,' ' page 211, D.S.S. Songs. Gem : "Kemember your prayers, little children, Both morning and evening each day, The Lord is e'er ready to hear you He loves all His children to pray. Third Sunday, December 19, 1926 Topic: Why I should use all my time profitably. Text : Titus 3; James 1 and 2 chapters; Hebrew: 5. Objective: To teach that if we desire eternal life we must work tor it. Suggestions: Tell the story of ''How Bessie Became a Wonderful Woman," and apply to the life of the Kindergarten children.. 1. Bessie as a child in the home. 1. tier parents were very poor. a. Bessie helped in the home when only four and five years old. 1 1 ) Washed, wiped and put away dishes. (2) Dusted. (3) Cared for the baby. b. Bessie at play. 1 1 ) Took good care of her doll. (2) Kepi her playhouse clean ami tidy. (3) Took care of her toys and put them away when through playing. e. Obedient to parents. When mother or lather called she put her doll down and went cheerfully to help. [I. When Bessie grew up. 1. Bessie had Learned to work and to do her work well by doiiiLi things the right way when a child. 2. Everybody wanted Bessie t  Christmas Program, see page 338. o MAUI HUI ATAWHAI. KORA s. TINIKINI, Tumuaki Hui Atawhai. He Whakaaturanga ki nga Hui Atawhai Na Toke Watene i whakamaori. I te mea ka tae tureiti mai te Pukapuka Hui Atawhai ara magazine mo etahi marama ka whakaaro au me whakarere kotahi marama ano ki muri te magazine. He tureiti raw a te taenga mai i tenei marama kia whakamaoritia mo Te Ka- rere. No reira e hiahia ana an ki nga teina me nga tuakana e whakahaere arra i te Pukapuka Hui Atawhai, kia tango i tenei akoranga i roto nei i Te Karere, mo runga i te lnoi ) kia whakahaere i tenei, a kia ata waihotia te mea i rot) i te pukapuka (magazine) mo Hanuere. Ko te take o tenei kia kotahi katoa ai tatou e whakahaere tahi ana i roto i te akoranga kotahi ia marama. AKORANGA MO TIHEMA KO TE INOI A. He aha te inoi? Ko te inoi te tino hiahia te ngakau I whakapuakina, i whakapuakina koretia ranei He tohn ra no te ahi huna K wiri.ra i roto i te uma. Ko te inoi te ahuatanga ngawari atu o nga whai kupu E taea ana e te n'gutu tamariki te whakamatau. Te inoi te rongo nui e tae Ki te Kingi i runga ra. He mea hoki te inoi e ahei ai te tangata ki te korerorero Noema 24, [926 TE KARERE 355 tahi me te Atua. B. Te wa hei inoitanga. 1. I te po i te ata o nga ra katoa. (a) He tono atu mo nga manaakitanga e hiahiatia ana. (b) He tuku whakawhetai atu mo nga manaaki- tanga kua liro mai. 2. I te wa o te raruraru, o te rawakoretanga ranei. (a) "Ki te hapa tetahi o koutou i te matauranga me inoi ia ki te Atua e homai nui nei ki te katoa, kahore hoki ana tawai mai, a ka hoatu ki a ia. Otira me inoi wha- kapono ia, kaua e ruarua. le tangata ruarua hoki, tona rite kei te ngaru o te moana e puhia ana e te hau, e akina ana." Hemi 1:5-6. (b) "Ki te turorotia letahi i roto i a koutou, me karanga e ia nga kaumatua o te hahi. a ma ratou e inoi ki runga ki a ia, me te whakawahi ano i a ia ki te hinu i runga i te ingoa o te Ariki. A e ora te turoro i te inoi whakapono, ma te Ariki ano ia e whakaaia ake, a ki te mea kua mahi hara ia, ka miuua tona hara." Hemi 5:14-15. (c) He tokomaha nga Hunga Tapu kua whiwhi ki nga whaaturanga whakamiharo i te Ariki, he whakautu ki nga inoi, me nga whakawahinga ki nga turoro. 3. 1 mua te paanga ki te kai. (a) Ko te whakawhetai ki te Atua mo taua mea, me te tono atu ki a la kia whakapaingia hei painga ki tatou tinana. 4. I te timatanga me te whakamutunga nga kara- kiatanga. (a) Mo Tona Wairua, v arahi ai i nga mea katoa e k ore rot i a ana e mahia ana. me te whakarite i nga hine- ngaro mo te hopu i te pono. (hi Hei mea hoki e tiakina ai tatou ina hoki atu tatou ki o tatou kainga i te mutunga nga karakia. ('. Mr pehea te alma o te inoi? 1. "Me inoi whakapono ia." Hemi 1:6. 2. Kua homai te Inoi a te Ariki hei tauira 1 roto i te ngawaritanga me te pono. Kaua e malia nga kupu ki mua i te Atua 111,1 inoi, he mea kia rangona r nga tangata. Matin 6:5-14, 3. Kia iitc te inoi ki ta te Karaiti i a i roto 1 te kail Q Kehemane. "Kaua e waiho i taku i pai a 1 , engari i tau." Matin 26:39. 356 i e karere Noema 24. [9^6 Korerotia nga take e whai ake nei. Te inoi a tiohepa Mete me tana kitenga tuatahi. Me heme a kei te tika ta Matin i te 6:8. He aha te take te inoi? Nga painga e puta ake ana ma roto i te whakarite i nga inoi a te whanan (family). Te rereketanga i waenganui i te inoi whakatuwhera, a whakamutunga hoki. Homai etahi ahuatanga i puta he whakautu ki te inoi. AKORANGA MA NGA KAI-WHAKAAKO TOROTORO. NGA KORERO MO TE KAINGA. Nga Mahi ma nga Matua Hunga Tafu 1. Ko te ako i a ratou tamariki i roto i te huarahi e haere ai ratou. Ako. me nga Kawe. 68:25. 2. Ko te whakaako-a-tanira, a kaua ma roto i te huhua korero. (a) "Kia mahara ki te Ra Hapati kia whakatapua. " Ako. me nga Kawe. 68:29. (b) Ko te haere ki nga karakiatanga. (c) Ko te utu whakatekau me te whakaako i nga tamariki ki taua tikanga. (d) Ko te pupuri i te Kupu te Matanranga. (e) Ko te ako i a ratou ki te inoi i ma roto i te inoi a te whanan (family) me te tono atu i a ratou kia whai mahi tahi i roto. He Tika Ranei nga Hahi Katoa ? E tika ana ranei nga hahi katoa. ara no te Atua katoa ranei ratou? Laku whakautu puta noa ki nga pito e wha o te ao. kahore i te tika te katoa, ara kotahi ano te mea tika i roto i nga haahi katoa i runga i te mata o te whenua, ko te Hahi o Jhu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu nga Ra o Mini Nei. Koia te hahi e kiia nei e te ao he Moromona. E koa ana ahau mokn i whakamohiotia e te Wairua o te Atna i te tan 1900 koia nei te hahi tika Kei roto i tenei hahi he apotoro, he poropiti, he kai- whakaako, he merekara, he whakaora turoro, he hoa mahi, he kai-whakahaere tikanga. Tirohia I Koiiniti 12:28, "Kua whakanohoia ano e te Atua etahi i roto i te hahi; nga apoto- Noema 24. lojj TE KARERE lj k[ nn.a; ti.arua ko nga poicpiti; tuatoru ko nga kaiwhaka- akj, muij iho ko nga meiekara; me i reira ko nga mana wha- kao A a ko r.ga hoa mahi, ko nga kai-whakahaeie tikanga, ko nga *eo ke." Kei ioto i te Hahi o te iwi Moromona enei apiha o te hahi peia i te wa i r.^a ai otcio i rung a i te w henua, i te taa jj A.D. ki te tan too A.D. Ke : ioto i ienei hahi te mana o Meiekihereke me te mana te 1 cliunjiatanga o Aror.a. Ko er.ei mana nunui e kore e riro nca i te tangata, engan ka riio i te tangata e wkakaritea e te Ati a kia riro i a ia. lirohia hiperu 5:4, '*E koie ano hoki tetahi e tan^c i tei ei honor e ki a ia ano, engari te ta- ngata e kaian^atia e te Atia, e peratia ai a me Aiona." He mea ka/ar.ga a Aiuna ma roto i a Mohi. 1 te is'2o ka inbi ake a Hohepa Mete ki te Atua ko tehea te Laahi tika lei urunga atu mona. Te whakautu ki a ia kaua ei.ru atu ki tetahi o ratou no te mea ko a ratou whaka- akoranga he w hakahaunga ia te tangata. Ko te ahua o te kaiak'a kei a iatou ko tor.a kaha ia whakakahoretia iho. I tenei wa o te k >re kaha o nga karakia, me te taenga ki nga wa o nga kingitanga kotahi tekau i tae ai ki o ratou ra e tu ai. ka Luiihia atu ki a Hohei a Mete te whakahaere i te Ro- ngopai o Ihu Karaiti me te hanga ake i te Kingitanga o te Karaiti. I irohia Raniera 2:44, "N'a i nga ia o enei kingi, ka whakaturla e te Atua o te rangi he kingitanga e kore e 1 ; a,u Na e kcie le ki r gitanga e waiho mo tetahi atu iwi; engari ko tera hei wahi, hei whakamoti i enei kingitanga katoa, ko ia ano ka tu tonu a ake ake." I hoatu e te Atua he v\ hi kakaunj. a kia w 1 akatuiia te Hahi lhu Kaiaiti, kia hanga ake te Kingitanga i korerotia nei e Raniera, ki a Hohepa Mete i te 1830. 1 te wa 14 ona tau i tutuki ta Hakaraia poropiti i mea ai (2:4). "Xa ka ki mai teva ki a ia. Ke.e ..tu, ka korero atu ki te tainaiti nei, mea atu. Ka nohoia a Hiruharama ka rite ki nga pa taiepa- kore, i te tini o te tangata, o nu r a kararehe 1 ioto." Ka homai ki a Hohepa Mete te mana mo te kauvshau i te Rongopai pono. Kei nga Whakakitenga 14:6, "A i kite ano ahau i tetahi . 01 anahera e rere ana i *aenganui   te rangi, kei a ia te rongopai mau tonu hei kauwhau mana ki te hunga e noho ana i te whenu;i. ki nga iwi katoa. ki nga hapu. ki nga reo, ki nga huihuinga tangata." Kei liea te hahi i rite ki tenei te rite ki te hahi 1 nga ra >» nga apol >ro? Kei l ea te hahi kua ara ake he poropiti i muri mai i ii".. 1 apol no hei whakatutuki i te kupu .1 Paora i a fE KARERE Noema 24. 1^20 ma 12:6, "Na ka rere ke nei nga mea i homai ki a tatou, he mea e rile ana ki te aroha noa i homai ki a tatou, ki te mea he mahi poropiti, kia rite ki nga tikanga te whakapono," penei me te Hahi Moromona e haere ana i te akoranga te Paipera? Kei hea atu o te ao he iwi i tukinotia. i peia i o ratou pa nui, a i patupatua mo to ratou whakapono ki to ratou Atua, penei i nga Moromona? Kei hea te iwi i peneitia e te Atua i roto i nga ra o muri nei, i arahina ki te waahi hei okiokinga mo ratou, me te hanga i to ratou pa tino ataahua i te ao katoa, penei i te arahinga mai te Hunga Tapu e te Atua i Winita Koata i te 1847, i homai nei e la (e te Atua) ki a Pirikamu Iaanga, te kai-rrataki i tenei haerenga, mo nga maero 1000? Kei hea te iwi e hanga temepara ki runga ki te tihi o nga maunga penei i te Hunga Tapu kua hanga i tetahi ki taua pa hou a te Pa Tote kei Amerika penei i te whaka- aturanga a Mika 4:1-2. "Na tenei ake kei nga ra whaki.mutu- nga ka whakapumautia te maunga i to Ihowa whare ki te till i o nga maunga, ka whakanekehia ake ano ki runga i nga pukepuke, a ka rere nga iwi ki rei±a. Ka haere hoki nga iwi maha, ka mea, haere mai, tatou ka haeie ki runga ki te mau- nga o Ihowa. ki te whare te Atua o Hakopa, a mana tatou e whakaako ki ana ara, ka haere hoki tatou i ana huarahi; no te mea ka puta mai te ture i Hiona. me te kupu a Ihowa i Hiruharama." Koia tonu tenei ko te ako a te Moromona ko te ako i nga whakahaunga kua korerotia e te poropiti. Kei hea atu te iwi kua hanga i te temepara pera i te mea kua ki ake ra i tae nga tau i hanga ai ki te 40 tau ka oti, hei jriiri i nga tupuna kua matemate i nuia atu o te taenga mai o te Rongopai hei whakarite i ta Paora (1 Koriniti 15.291. "Pe- nei ka aha te hunga e iriiria ana hei whakakapi mo te hunga mate, ki te kore rawa te hunga mate e ara? he aha hoki ratou ka iriiria ai hei whakakapi mo te hunga mate?" Kei hea te iwi penei i nga hunga Moromona kua hanga tapenakara, pera i nga ra i a Mohi e arahi ana i a Iharaira? Kua oti nei i a ratou te hanga tetahi, koia tetahi nga tape- nakara nui kei te ao katoa, kua hanga e te iwi o te Atua hei koropikotanga atu ki a la. Ko te roa o te whare e 250 putu, ko te whanui 15c putu, e 80 putu te teitei, e 44 nga pou ko- liatu hei pupuri ake i te aata o te tuanui, e 5 nga tau i hanga ai ka oti. Ko te okena kei roto, koia tetahi o nga okena nui i te ao katoa. ko te whanui e 60 putu, ko te hohonu e 33 putu, e 48 putu te teitei. e 8000 nga paipa, e 270 nga stops. Ko te uira (electricity) hei whakatangi. Ko te hau hei pupuhi i nga Noema 24, 1926 TE KARERE 359 paipa he mea huri e nga mihini (engines) e wha, e 32 hoiho te kaha o te puhipuhi hau. 1 1 tau te whakahoutanga o te okena e kore e he mo nga tau maha kei te haere mai. Ko te maha o nga kai-waiata kei te taha o te okena o ratou noho- anga e 400 e waiata ana no te kore utu. Ko te hunga e uru ana ki loto i te tapenakara 10,000 (tekaii mano). Kua oti enei mea i te iwi e mahi pono ana ki to ratou Atua. Kua rite te kupu a te Poropiti Ehekiere (37:26-27), "Ka whakaritea ano e ahau he kawenata mo te rongo mau ki a ratou; hei kawenata mau tonu tena ki a ratou, ka whaka- nohoia ano ratou e ahau, ka whakanuia, ka whakaturia ano e ahau toku wahi tapu ki waenganui i a ratou a ake ake. Na ki a ratou toku tapenakara: a ko ahau he Atua mo ratou, ko ratou ano hei iwi maku." Kei hea atu te iwi penei i nga kai-kauwhau o te Hunga Tapu? Kua whakarerea atu o ratou whare papai me nga maara, me nga whaea, tuahine, wahine, tamariki, me a ratou mahi e puta ai nga moni tinitini ki a ratou. Ko te take ko ratou he pononga pono na te Karaiti. Matiu 19:29, "A ki te mea kua mahue i tetahi he whare, he teina, he tuahine ranei, he papa, he whaea, he wahine, he tamariki, he maara, he whakaaro hoki nona ki toku ingoa, ka tataki rau nga mea e riro i a ia, a e whiwhi ano ia ki te ora tonu." Ko enei kai- kauwhau, 8 mano maero te tawhiti mai i o ratou kainga kua mahuetia atu ki muri. Ko ratou nga kaumatua Moromona no Uta, ara no Amerika. E rua mano ratou kei te ao katoa e kauwhau ana i te Rongopai i runga i te utu kore. Pera i a Paora Apotoro (I Koriniti 9:18). "Na, he aha koia te utu rnoku? ara ka meinga e ahau kia kore e utua te rongopai o te Karaiti, ina kauwhautia e ahau; kei he i ahau nga tikanga o te rongopai kua tukua ki ahau." ! le pera ano t;i te Ariki kupu * 1 akaari mo nga kai-kau- whau (Matiu 10:7-8), "Me kauwhau haere hoki, me ki. Kua tata te rangatiratanga o te rangi. Whakaorangia nga turo- ro, whakamakia nga repera, wl akaarahia nga tupapaku, peia nga rewera; ka riro noa nei i .1 koutou, me hoatu noa e koutou." E hoa ma, ko te mahi kauwhau i te Rongopai te mea e kii;i atu nei me kauwhau noa atu, kaua e utu, a 1 riro noa atu hoki i a ratou te mana nui mo te ra mai i runga 1 te utu kore. Eng. ri kua rite i te Atua he utu tino nui ki nga kai-kauwhau, ko te whiwhi ki te kororia me te haringa nui i roto i Tona Kingitanga mo nga tau kotahi mano. rE karere Noema 24, iqjs K  te tino putake nui i taea ai enei mahi kei roto i nga Hunga Tapu te Aroha, te i umanako, te VVhakapono. Ko enei ahua e toru hore kau i te hunga hore ano i whanau hou. Ma te whakapono anake ki te Rongopai Ihu Karaiti, me te whakarite i nga tikanga, katahi ano ka taea. E te Hunga Tapu, e nga tuakana, e nga tuahioe, tena koutou. Tenei ahau to koutou pononga i roto i tenei Rongo- pai o to tatou Ariki, i te tuhi nei ki Te Karere hei mea e tino neke ake ai a tatou mahi pono i roto i tatou karangatanga i runga i te mea kua kite nui tatou i te tino tika tenei take ara to tatou whakapono. Koia te mea tino kaha, tino nui, i roto i te ao katoa, lie mahi na to tatou Matua i te rangi. Me whakamarama atu e ahau mo tenei wahi o to tatou whakapono ara o nga tikanga 1 te rarangi 10, "E whakapono a na matou ki te huihuinga katoatanga Iharaira, ki te wha- kahokinga mai ano hoki o nga hapu kotahi tekau, ki te hanganga o Hiona ki tunga ki tenei tuawhenua (ki Amerika) ki te kingitanga tangatatanga o te Karaiti ki te whenua, ki te rironga hoki i a ia tona kororia pararaiha." E te Hunga Tapu, e rua nga wahi whakamiharo kei roto i tenei wahi o to tatou whakapono. He mea tino nui rawa tera e kite nga iwi katoa te ao. Ko enei mea e rua kei roto tonu i enei wa, no reira, e te Hunga Tapu, kia noho reri i nga wa katoa. Tua- tahi, ko to tatou kohinga. Ki te tae mai te kupu a te Tumu- aki Tuatahi o te Hahi kia kohikohia atu kia haere tena iwi, tena iwi o te Hunga Tapu i nga wahi o te ao, me ratou hepara ara me nga kaumatua, kaua e ki me pehea e tae ai te haere. E hoa ma, he tino pakeke ke atu te tae atu i konei i a an nei ki Kaikohe i to tatou tae ki Hiona a te wa e poto ai te kohikohi aua hapu kua kiia ake ra, ko reira hanga ai te pa nui e korerotia ra e Etere (1 j:«), "No reira ka hanga te toenga o te whare o Hakopa ki runga ki tenei whenua; a ka waiho ia hei whenua tupu mo ratou; ka hanga hoki e ratou he pa tapu ki te Ariki ka pera n.e te Hiiuharama onamata; a ka- hore ratou e whakapoauautia ano, kia tae mai ra ano te nm- tunga. e pah em o ai te whenua." A te wa e hanga ai taua pa ka heke iho i te rangi te pa i kitea ra e Hoani Whakakitenga (21:2), ara te pa o Enoka i tangohia atu ra e te Atua ki te rangi i nga ra i a Enoka. Ka whakahokia mai taua pa, ka hanga tahitia kia kotahi raua ko te pa kua tuhia ake ra. A- koranga me nga Kawenata 84:100, "Kua whakaputa mai te Ariki i Hiona i runga. Kua whakaputa mai te Ariki i Hiona i raro." Noema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 361 64:41, "No te mea, nana ka mea atu nei ahau ki a koutou, ka tupu kaha te whenua o Hiona, a ka tau te kororia o te Ariki ki runga ki a ia." 64:43, "A ka puta mai te ra e tuwiri ana nga iwi katoa o te ao, mona te take, a ka wehi mo aua mea nanakia kua whakapuakina e te Ariki." I mohio a Aperahama ki tenei pa, koia te putake o tona noho manene. Hiperu 1 1 : 10, "I tatari hoki ia ki te pa whai turanga, ko te Atua nei te kaihanga, te kaimahi." Koia nei to tatou tumanako e ki mai ra 2 Pita 3:13, "Heoi kei te tumanako tatou ki nga rangi hou, ki te whenua hou, ki tana i whakaari mai ai, kei reira te tika e noho ana." Ka hanga i mua tata o te taenga mai o te Ariki. Kia oti ka whakatapua te whenua ka whakahoutia. Whakakitenga 21:1, "L kite ano ahau i te rangi hou, i te whenua hou: kua pahemo hoki te rangi tuatahi, me te whenua tuatahi; a ka- hore atu he moana." E te Hunga Tapu koia nei te whakamarama ki te ao katoa o te pono kotahi ano hahi o te Atua: ko te Hahi Mo- romona. Kei a ratou te matauranga ki nga mahi a te Atua, me to ratou i rongo hei mahi i Ana mahi nunui. Kei nga hahi katoa oti tenei matauranga Kore rawa atu, ko to ratou matauranga no te tangata. E te Hunga Tapu tcna koutou, na to koutou teina, tu- ngane i roto i te mahi pai a te Atua, Mangonui NGAPUH1 RENATA Ko nga Mahi Whakatangitangi o te Kareti Kei te tupu tonu te mahi whakatangitangi i te Kareti (M.A.C.). Kua hokona mai etahi pu whakatangitangi hou i Amerika, ara he saxophone, he koronete, he baritone, me etahi atu. Ka nui hoki te hihiko O nga tamariki kura ki te ako i roto i nga ropu whakatangitangi, ropu waiata, 1 whaka- turia nei hei ako i a ratou ki te waiata me te purei. Na to ratou kai-whakaako na Erata Tipene 1 whakatu he concert me te kanikani ki te hooro i Hehitingi i te 22 nga ra He- petema i hori ake nei. Ka nui te whakamihi nga tangata i tae. Ka nui hoki nga moni i riro mai i a ratou hei whaka- hou i ratou pu (instruments). Te wliak.il.au a te rumuaki Mihana, kia kaha ia tamaiti ia tamaiti tae atu hoki ki ratou matua ki te whakawhaiti hereni, hei utu mo ratou kura 1 tenei tau e tu mai nei. No te 362 TE KARERE ma 24. ll,20 mea kahore e pai kia whakctaumaha ano nga tamaiiki i te Kareti, i to ratou ko:e mor.i. Ko te M.A C. Band, nga kai-whakahaere ko Hori Henihana ran a ko Huriana Tipene Ko te Saxophone Band, kai-whakahaere ko Tipene Noema 24, 1920 TE KARERE 363 Ko te Kari o Erene Ki Te Karere, tena koe. Tenei ano etahi kupu hei pa- nuitanga mau ki nga wahi e tae ai koe. Kaati, i runga i te whakaaturanga a te Pakeha mo te Kari o Erene i Ahia (ara Asia), no reira ka hiahia ahau ki te whakaatu i te whakaaro o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri Nei. E ki ana ratou kna oti te whakaatu ki to ratou Poropiti ki a Hohepa Mete te whenua i tu ai taua kari. Otira me waiho marire tena no te mea ka taea e te ao te mea he teka te whakaaturanga ki a Hohepa Mete, engari me whakatepe mc.i e ahau i te timatanga. Ka hanga e te Atua te whenua me nga mea katoa, nga kaiarehe me era atu. Katahi hoki ka hanga te tangata hei rangatira mo aua mea. Ka hanga te Kari Erene. Ka oti enei mea katoa ka meinga nga mea kia hua kia tini, kia kapi te ao. Ka timata te tupu o nga kararehe o nga tangata i runga i te wahi kei reira ra te kari. Tae noa mai ki a Noa kahore ano he whakaaturanga kua haere nga tangata i tua atu i te wahi kei reira te kari. Engari no tenei wa tonu ka whakahaua e te Atua kia hanga he kaipuke e Noa no te mea ka whakangaromia te ao me nga mea katoa ki te waipuke. Ka oti te kaipuke ka utair.a takirua o ia ahua o nga mea o te whenua me nga tangata tokowaru ki runga. Ka mutu ka tukua iho te ua tino kaha a maanu ana te kaipuke a puhia ana hoki e te hau. Na kua mohio tatou kua maanu i runga i te whenua i te kari nei, ara ka mahue iho te whenua te Kari Erene, a u ana ki tetahi atu whenua. Ko te whenua i u ai te kaipuke e kiia ana ko Ioropi (Europe) ina hoki koia anake tera ko te whenua i ki i te tangata, a i reira ka marara haere ki nga tini motu o te ao nei. Na kua mohio tatou ehara i Ahia te whenua i reira te Kari Erene no te mea ko Ahia kei roto te rohe luropi. A mehemea hoki i reira te kaipuke e maanu ana e kore e ahei kia tau iho ano ki taua wahi no te hum c ki ana i maanu a i puhia hoki e te hau. No reira ka whakaponohia e tc Hunga Tapu te whaka- aturanga a to ratou poropiti e: i An erika te Kari o Erene. Kati nei ano te whakamarama, kia ora te Etita, ma te Atua koe e tautoko. Heoi aim na to teiiia. Paepae VV, Whehira 364 TE KARKRK Noema 24, 1920 -; ; - He Ripoata Whakawhitinga Moana Ki Te Karere, tena koe. Mahau e panui nga korero o ta maua haere me a maua tamariki e toru, ko Ra- hera, ko Arihi, ko Manahi Nitama. Ki te Iwi Maori: E nga morehu tena koutou e noho mai nei i rung a i nga moutere o te moana, ara i ru- nga i Aotearoa me te Waipounamu. Tenei ahau kei te whenua o te kupu whakaari e tuhi atu ana i taku rete. Na te aroha me nga whakaaro me Nireaha Paewai nga mahara, i tuhi atu ai enei ko- rero hei korero ma koutou. Tetahi, kua kite ahau i te man te aroha nga kauma- tua kua hokihoki mai i Niu Tireni. Kei a ratou koutou whakaahua me a koutou taputapu aroha. No te rua tekau ma iwa o Hurae i wehe mai ai maua me a maua tamariki i Tahoraiti i te peka Tamaki. 1 te torn o nga ra o Akuhata ka wehe mai matou i Niu Tireni i runga i te Aorangi. E torn nga ra ka tae matou ki YYhiti (Fiji). E ono nga haora e haereere ana i te taone Suva ka hoki ma- tou ki runga tima. 1 te ono i te ahiahi ka mahue i a matou a Whiti. I te pai te moana tae noa matou ki Hawaiki, e whitu nga ra e haere ana ka tae matou. Ka u matou ki te whenua, ka tae mai te tama a Wiremu Karaka Ngatiporoua me tona kotiro Hawaiki me nga matua o te kotiro. Ka mutu te ruru ka mauria matou ki to ratou kainga. Te hahi o te iwi nei ko te pekanga o te hahi Moromona, te ingoa ko te "Re- organized Church" or "Josephite." Te taenga ki te kainga he "luao" e takoto mai ana, ara ki te Maori he hakari. Ka mutu te kai ka tae mai nga kaa e toru. Ka riro matou ki te matakitaki whenua a pau noa tena ra. I te po ka rere ano to matou tima a "Aorangi." E whitu nga ra e rere ana ma- tou i runga tima ka u matou ki te whenua o Amerika ki te taone o Vancouver. I te ata ka tukutuku matou ka tutaki ahau ki nga kaumatua te Hahi. Ka mahue tooku hoa me nga tamariki ki tetahi nga kaumatua, ka haere maua ko te tumuaki ko Elder Whiting te ingoa, ki nga kai-tirotiro o Amerika i mua i te urunga a te tangata ki Amerika. Katahi Noema 24, 1926 Ti£ KARI.RE 365 ka ki mai te kai-tirotiro kahore tooku hoa me a maua tama- riki e whakaaetia kia haere tahi me al.au ki Amerika. Ka- tahi ka piira ahau ki te kawanatanga o Amerika, katahi ka whakahokia mai, me tuku tooku hoa me a maua tamariki kia whai i ahau ki te whenua o Amerika. E ma wiki e noho ana i a Vancouver katahi ano matou ka puta. No te 5 o nga ra o Hepetema ka tae ki te Pa Tote, e toru nga ra e rua nga po e haere ana i runga tereina. Ka tuku- tuku maua me nga tamariki i te teihana, i reira a Matiu Kau- ri, a Nitama, Hokarana, Pene Katata, a Leo B. Sharp, a Birkenshaw, a Patrick, a Jorgenson, me etahi atu, me a ratou wahine, e vvhanga ana ki a matou. Ka miuu te rum me te mini ka mauria matou ki te kainga o Leo B. Sharp. Ka noho matou i reira, e rua nga wiki ki te Pa Tote, te mahi he haeieere ki te matakitaki, ko nga kaumatua o Niu Tireni ki te mau haere i runga i o ratou moto kaa. Te moto kaa tua- tahi no Leo B. Sharp; tuaiua no te Tumuaki o te Hahi, he Packard, ko Alex Anderson te kai-arahi, nana matou i mau ki Saltair. Tuatoru, ko te kaa o Matiu Kauri, he Ford. I mauria matou e ia, me tarna wahine me ta raua pepi, ki E- migration Canyon. Kpia nei te waahi i eke mai ai a Pirika- mu laanga me tana ropu tuatahi ki te Pa Tote, i karanga i i ia, "This is the place." Tuawha ko te kaa o Erata Mor- rison, nana matou ko tooku whanau i nan ki Provo. 1 mauria matou ma American Fork Canyon and Provo Canyon. 1 kite ahau i a VViremu Pakimana, me Manaro Horopuruku, me Mac Roundy, me Lester Taylor, me Pecker, me te wahine a Jesse Knight me taana tama i Lenei waahi. 1 te Taite ka tae matou, i te po a te Hataiei ka w hakahokitia matou ki te Pa Tote e te papa o Roundy i runga i te Chrysler, 1 te ata o te Ratapu ka mauria matou e Erata Hebei C, Jex ki Rokana (Logan). 1 reira ka kite matou i a Erata Teo More re me Erata Moser. 1 te po ka haere matou ki Lewiston ki te kainga   goods department, candies department and many othei thing kua wareware ahau. I \..\rw matou 366 te karkrk Noema 24. 19 jo ki Ogden Canyon i reira tona wahine e takoto ana i te mate. Kua wliati tetahi nga iwi tona peke. I taka iho i rung a pikitanga (stairs), engari kei te 1 >a i haere tona peke, taihoa ka pai. Ka ahiahi ka hoki matou me Erata Heber C. Jex me taana wahine ki te Pa Tote E rua o matou po ki te whare o Jex ka hoki niaua me a maua tamariki ki te whare Sharp. E rua nga po o tenei wiki i mauria ai maua me nga tamariki ki te purei. Te po tuatahi na Jex, he drama, te po tuarua he vaudeville, na Erata Bird i man matou. 1 kai hoki matou ki toona whare i te po te Paraire. 1 te Hatarei ka maua a maua pouaka e te rore Sharp & Co. ki te teihana, ma te t ere in a e mau ki Rokana. i hoko maua i nga mea e rite ana mo te kitini i te toa a Sharp \- Co. 1 homai e taua toa mo te wholesale price a maua taputapu mo to maua whare, S43 te iwa nga pauna) te utu. I tina maua ko Erata Alex Ander- son ki te Hotel Utah, he hiahia noona kin kite ahau i tera waahi i te cafeteria. I reira maua, ka kite ahau i a Ruw K. Haari me tana wahine. 1 hongi rawa maua. Ka kite hoki ahau i a 1 imuaki Romeni me taana wahine. 1 te po ka tu he hakari ki Liberty Park, he titi he waata kirihi he taewa nga kai. No Niu 'I ireni rtga titi, na maua i mau mai ma nga kaumatua. Te take i mauria nun ai, na Matiu Kauri i tuhi ki a Takana, ka ki, "Kahoie pea a Amerika i te whenua te kupu whakaari, erigari a Niu Tireni, he titi hoki kei kora." I te ata ka mauria matou e Leo B. Sharp ki Rokana i runga i tona kaa, e eo maero te tawl.iti atu i te Pa Pote ki reira. Ko te waahi hoki tenei hei kuratanga mooku. Ko te taone tenei o Erata Moser, Erata Morere, me Erata Ewatana. E te Hun^a Tapu, kei ko noa atu i enei korero nga ma- naakitanga a nga kaumatua ki a maua me a maua tama iki. A kei puhaehae koutou, ka ki he whakahi nooku i panui ai ahau enei manaakitanga ki a koutou. Kahoie. Engaii he tohu tenei i te aroha nui o tenei iwi ki a koutou mo a koutou i manaaki i a ratou me a ratou tamariki i a ratou i Niu Tire- ni. Kahore aku nei painga ki a ratou, no enei ra tonu nei ahau i uru ai ki te Hahi, no reira he aha te take kia manaaki ratou i a matou? Maaku e kii ki a koutou, he aroha ki te iwi Maori. No reira kia mau ki a koutou tohu pai. E te Morehu o Lharaira, He kupu whakamarama hei whakamutu i taaku reta ki a koutou. ! te hui i tu ki Tiki- tiki ki te takiwa ki Ngati Porou, ka rongo ahau ki a Paraire Tomoana, koi a tetahi ropu, te ingoa ko te "Maori Purpose Control Fund Board," he ropu tautoko i nga tamariki hiahia Noema 24, 1920 TE KARERE W ki te kura. Katahi au ka whakaaro, pai atu ko ratou hei matua mooku i ahau i te kura. Kua kore ahau e titiro ki a koutou ki te Moromona, te take kei te ki etahi o koutou he tangata wawata, he tangata moemoea ahau. Heoi ia, ko taaku inoi kia kauaka ahau e moemoea e wawata, engari kia kohatutia tenei haere, kia puta he painga ki a koe ki te Maori. Ko taaku inoi tenei ki a koutou i ter.ei ra haere ake nei, tukua a koutou tamariki matau ki nga kura nunui, ki te kimi i te matauranga. "Ko te matauianga hoki te kororia o te Atua." Heoi na ta koutou taina, tamaiti, Nireaha Paiwai KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. Elder Ann I J. Talbot Elder Ezra II. Anderson Tirohia te 332 o nga wharangi Te Karere moOketopa, "Te tangata e haere atu ana,  v it u Book of Mormon, Cloth 2b i \j-t> f | ' , Half Leather -90 I , Leather 10-0 & 15 o Pearl of Great Price, Cloth.. 2-0 Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth *-o " " , & Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAO.?l BOOKS AND TRACTS Maori Read) Reference, Cloth 20 , Leather 3-0 Ko Te Kawenata Hon, Cloth 1-9 " Me Nga riimene, Leather 3 i» I n-o '• Pukipuka a Moromona . Cloth 5-0 , Leather 13-11 Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata & Peara Utu Nui, Cloth 5-j ", Leather 15 u Combination of A, B, & C Tracts, Leather, Spec. Offer 1 o SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BDOK3 The Restoration of the Gospel 40 What Jesus Taught .1 o Kindergarten Plan Book. KesUr & Morris 3 b Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten, X'orto.i ... 4-0 SONG BOOKS Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-.; i , Leather .00 Deseret Song Books, Cloth ... 30 i " , Leather b Kindergarten & Primary Song Book ^-o DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE W02KS Articles of Faith, Limp Leather, Med. Size, Tabling* ' S j Vitality ot Worm on ism 4-0 Scientific Aspects of Mormonism, Nelson o-o Restoration of the Gospel, II iJtsoe 4 Joseph Smith's Teachings >o Life of Christ for the Young. Weed 4 o Jesus the Christ, Cloth, Talmage 8-9 ntials in Church History. Smith 6-9 Bible Ready Reference 2-0 Prophecies of Joseph Smith & Their Fulfillment, Moiris 0-0 KO J. H. riNIKINl TE KAI TA ME TE KA1 PAM 1 HOKI M. \.r KORONGATA HASTINGS. M. R. : j^n>n> Wt "Wdhanaa 20 Cihema 22. 1926 llama 12 I tfaua c matafcu: ta te mea be ikai^ fcauwbau tenet abau kt a koutou mo te bari nm, meahe puta mat hi te iwi katoa. Ttonatanet boki i wbanau at be 1kai*wbakaora mo houtou t te pa o "Kawiri, ara a te Ikarattt, te Hnki. Ruba 2:10-11   « "CS KflRSRS" + + WHAKAEMINCA O NGA KORERO + + + + + + Kl TE ETITA Wharangi. He Ripoata na Nireaha Paewai 396 KO NGA RONCO KORERO Ko nga Hokinga Atu ki Hiona Ko nga Manita o te M.AC. 394 392 KO NCA TUHINGA MAI I roto i nga "Momona" 387 MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 393 MAHI KURA HAPATI Concert Recitation 3/0 Intermediate Department Korero a Ngakau Kindergarten Department Maori Theological Pakeha Theological Postlude Prelude Sacrament Gem 376 370 379 370 374 369 369 369 NATE ETITA He Mihi Kirihimete 395 Ko Ilohcpa Mete, Poropiti ari>rj> WAHANGA XX "Ki te Iwi Maori, te Morehu o te Whare o Iharaira.' MlHANA O NlU TlRENI HAHI O 1HU KARAIT1 O TE HUNGA TAPU O NGA RA O ML'RI NEI H1PA J. KARANATA, TUMUAKI o IF HAHI HOANI H. T1NIK1M, TUMUAKJ MlHANA M. K. EWATANA, E HI A J. R. TlPENE, I ETITA HOA AWH1NA T.W. WlTEHIRA f MAORI AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE Hastings. New Zealand 1926 (ftw WAHANCA 20 WENEREI, TIHEMA 22, 1926. NAMAI2 Maori Agricultural College Hastings. H. B. E tukua atu ana ia marama e te Mihana o Niu Tireni, Hani o Ihu Karaiti o te Hunga Tapu o nga Ra o Muri i\ei. Tukua jnai o koutou reta ki te Etita o Te Karere, M.A.C., Hastings. Ivu le ulu mo TE KARERE i te tau e rima hereui (5/-). KO TE TIKANUA TENEI. Ilie matua uiu mo icu pcpa ka vPhiwhi ai. J. H. Tmikim, TumuuKt Mihana Mariana K. Ewatana, hum. 'l.um h Hi In/ a, httta Hon A whin a. Ko te Kui-Ripoata Te Tuati Melia Ku nga Kai Tuhi Alai (Special Writers). Wiremu A. kuura fctapta ianHpu tru T. kupa i\lAHI KURA HAPATI. Prelude. Adapted from Handel, by Edw. P. Kimball. :Mr /r ^ilp^pliii mf w e^^ m *=#4=$= *= gg^^ SACRAMKNT (iHM FOR JANUARY, 1927 '/Purify our hearts, our Saviour, Let us «4(> not far asl ray, Thai we may be counted worth} Of Thy Spirit. «la\ by (lav." Postlude. i£gipi3iiipiiiip§r: i p =j^a \'-'" ■ \- -■*■ \ n 370 ikkarerk rihcma 22, iy26 CONCERT RECITATION FOR JANUARY, 1927. (Doctrine and Covenants, Section 59, Seventh Verse) " Thou shalt thank the Lord thy God in all things." KORERO A NGaKaU MO HANUERE, 1927. Akoranga me nga Kawenata 59:7. "I roto i nga mea katoa me whakawhetai atu koe ki te Ariki, ki tou Atua." -o MAORI THEOLOGICAL. Katapu tuata.ii, iianuere 2, 1927. HE AKORANGA MO TE RA NOHO-PUKU. Na Tiata W. Witehira i whakamaori. Putake: Ko nga wliakahauhau a tc tauira i whakatako- toria aei c Iliu hei oiahi ma tatou. hote Ngakau Whakawhetai I roto i te ioo o nga Waiata ka kite tatou i tetahi whaka- puakanga pai o te whakawhetai. "Kia hari te hamama ki a Ihowa, e nga whenua katoa: mahia ta Ihowa i runga i te koa, waiata ha ere ki tona aroaro. "Kia matau ki a Ihowa, koia te Atua: nana tatou i ha- nga, ehara hoki i a tatou; ko tana iwi tatou, ko ana hipi e hepara ai. "Tomokia ona tatau i runga i te whakawhetai, ona marae i runga i te whakamoemiti: whakawhetai ki a i;\ whakapai- ngia tona ingoa. He pai hoki a Ihowa, pumau tonu tana mahi tohu: a kei nga whakatupuranga katoa tona pono." Ka kite tatou he maha nga wahi i roto i nga karaipiture e korero ana i a Ihu e tuku whakawhetai ana. I te wa o to ratou kainga i te Kapenga, i te whangainga o nga mano, me era atu wa i tuku whakawhetai ai a Ihu mo nga mea i riro mai i a la. I whakawhetai la ki Tona Matua mo te pono kua oti raka te whakaari, a mo nga akonga papai hoki kua kitea raka e la hei awhina i a la. E korero ana nga kai-tuhi katoa o te Kawenata Hou tera e tika ana tatou me whai whakawhetai o tatou ngakau mo nga mea a te Atua e homai ana ki a tatou. Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 37 1 E rite ana tenei tikanga ma nga tangata katoa e hiahia ana ki te whakahari i te Atua, tae atu hoki ki nga mea hore kau he hahi. Koia tenei ko tetahi o nga tikanga tuatahi o te koropiko pono, a he tohu hoki i waenganui o nga tangata o te tino rangatira. Ahakoa ko wai koe, a keihea ranei koe e noho ana, e tika ana koe me whakawhetai koe ki nga mea na ratou nei koe i awhina, ki o matua, ki o hoa, ki o tupuna kua mate raka i nga tau maha kua huri, a ki te Atua ano hoki. Tukua ma nga mema o te karaihe e whaki o ratou hine- ngaro, te whakawhetai o o ratou nei ngakau mo nga mea kua riro mai i a ratou. Ko nga Pukapuka a Paora Nu Wiremu C. Kaa raua ko Rupata Tanapu i whakarite. Raiapu tuarua, Hanuere 9, 1927. Akoranga o4 1 Waenganui i nga Teharonika. He roanga atu. Te VVhakaatu: Kei a 2 Teharonika, I, 2, 3 o nga upoko. A. Ta te Atua whakawakanga. 1. Ko te whakangaromanga o te hunga kino. 2 Teharo- nika 17-9; Maraki 3:1; 4:1. 2. Ko te whiunga mutunga kore. 2 Teharonika 1:9; Ako- ranga me nga Kawenata 19:3-12. B. Ko te Takanga Atu me te kingitanga o te Anatikaraiti. 1. Hei te Ra Nui o te Aiiki. 2. Ka puta mai tuatahi ko te Takanga Atu. 2 Teharoni- ka 2:3; 1 Timoti 4:1. 3. Ko te tangata o te hara. 2 Teharonika 2:3-4. 4. Hei te mahi te Anatikaraiti a taua wa. 2 Teharonika 27; 1 Eioani 2:18; 4:3. 5. Ka taea a Hatana «.• te ha   te Atua. 2 Teharonika 2:8; Whakakitenga 20:2, 10; 2 Niwhai 9:16. C. Ta Paora whakatupatoranga ki te Hunga Tapu. 1. Kia mawehe ke 1 nga tangata mahi he, 2 Teharonika 3:0-7; Whakakitenga 18:4-5; Ak . me nga Kawe. 133:5. 2. Ka riria te mangere. 2 Teharonika 3:1 C- 1 2; Ako. me nga Kawe. 88:124) (10:13; 4J:42. 17} Tt KARBRE Tihema 22, 1926 Ratapu tuatoru, Hanuere 16, 1927. Akoranga 35 Te llahi Koriniti, Whenua Makeronia Hei Tirohanga: Nga Mahi iS:i-i8; 1 Koriniti; 2 Koriniti. A. Te whakariteritenga te Hahi o te Hunga o Koriniti. 1. Nga whakahuringa o nga Hurai. Mahi 18:2, 8, 17. 2. Ko te kauwhautanga o Paora i nga mahi a te Karaiti ki nga Hurai. Nga Mahi 18:4-6. 3. Te whakatetenga o nga Hurai. Mahi 18:12-17. 4. Nga whakahuringa o nga Tauiwi, te iriiriringa. Mahi 18:8; I Koriniti 1:14-16. 5. To ratou tiakanga e Kario, he kawana no Roma. Nga Mahi 18:12-16. Tirohia i Nga Mahi 18:3 e whakaatu ana i reira i te kaha Paora ki nga mahi mi ha n a. Tirohia ano 2 Koriniti 1 1:7-9 B. Ko te pukapuka a Paora ki nga Hunga Tapu. 1. He whakatupato kia kaua e noho wehewehe i roto i te Hahi. I Koriniti 1:10-13. 2. Te kauwhauranga o te ripeka. I Koriniti 1:17-24. 3. Ko te matauranga o te hunga mohio e ngaro. I Ko- riniti 1:25-3 !• Whakaritea ki te Pukapuka a Moromo- na, Arami 10:13-18; Ako. me nga Kawe. 100:5-8. Kia mau tenei: Ko te pukapuka tuatahi a Paora ki te Hunga o Koriniti, i tuhituhia atu e ia i Epeha i te paunga o te toru tau i noho ai ia i reira, i te tau 57, 58 ranei o to tatou Ariki A.I). Ratapu tuawha, Hanuere ?3, 1927. Akoranga 3ti Ka Tohutohu te Apotoro i te Hahi Hei Tirohanga: I Koriniti 2, 3, 4 o nga upoko. A. A Ihu Karaiti me Tona ripekatanga. 1. I puakina i roto i te ngoikoretanga. I Koriniti 2:1-4. 2. Te matauranga o te Atua. I Koriniti 2:5-16. 3. He kohungahunga i roto i a te Karaiti. I Koriniti 3:1-2; Nga Hiperu 5:12-14. 4. Na te Atua i tupu ai. 1 Koriniti 3:3-8. B. Te hanganga a te Atua. I. Te kaupapa, ko Ihu Karaiti. Epeha 2:20; Mahi 4:12; Tihema 22, 1920 TE karere 373 Ako. 11. e nga Kawe. 20:29-51. 2. Me hanga nga tangata ki rung a i tenei kaupapa pono. 1 Koriniii 3:9- 5- 3. Kia ma nga tinana. I Koriniti 3:16-17; Ako. me nga Kawe. 88:1.24. C. Nga mate o nga Apotoro. 1. Purutia te whakatauranga he. I Koriniti 4:3-5; Matiu 7:1-5. 2. Ko o ratou mamaetanga mo te Rongopai. I Koriniti 4:9- 1 [. j. Ka tukua a Timoti hei whakahaere. l Koriniti 4:17. Ratipu tuarima, llanuere 30, 1927. Akoranga M Ko te Akoranga a Paora mo te Ma te Ngakau Hei Tirohanga: 1 Koriniti, 5 me te 6 o nga upoko. A. Ko nga ahuatanga i roto i nga hunga o Koriniti. j. Koriniti he pa nui hokohako taonga no Roma. 2. Ko te koropikotanga o nga tangata ki tenei atua wa- hine ki a Aporite (Aphrodite); e whakaaetia ana e t° ratou whakapono nga mahi kikinoi nga karakiatanga. 3. lie poke te ahua o te hunga o Koriniti. 4. Ko te kauwhautanga a Paora ki nga mahi kikino, ara ki te puremu, ki te moe tahae. P>. Ko nga whakahauhaunga a nga Apotoro. 1. Ko te Puremu me tona ahua. I Koriniti 5:1. 2. Ko te whakaritenga i te whakawhiu mo te hunga takahi i nga hire. 1 Koriniti 5:2-5. 3. I raro i te ture a Mohi, he mate tona whakawhiunga. Tirohia Rewitikuha 18:29; 20:11. 4. Kia kaua te Hunga I'apu e piri ki te hunga mahi ki- no. I Koriniti 5:9-13; Ako. me nga Kawe. 42:20-28, C. Ka tukua te whakawakanga ki te Hunga TapU i. Ko nga ahua tutu, ngangau, ma te Hunga Tapu e titiro. 1 Koriniti 6: 1 8; .Ako. me nga Kawe. [34:10, 2. Ko nga Kooti O te i ika i roto i te llahi. Matin [8:1$- 17; Mahi 15:2-22; Ako. me nga Kawe. 107 .-68 -83; 42 85. 3. Ko nga mea kahore he whenua. 1 Koriniti 6:9 10- Whakakitenga 2l;8. 4. Ko te tika te ma mo te tinana. 1 Koriniti 6:13-20, me \74 il KARERH lihema 24, 1920 lie Panui: Tuhaina i nga tirohanga hei ako ma tenei ma tenei nga mema, he korero- tanga hoki me waiho te wa o te karaihe hei uiuinga. PAKEHA THEOLOGICAL "GREAT BIBLICAL 1.!a! e unto the ith glad 1 - ; 1 me b  w'.di thanksgiving, and into His courts with praise; be i His name. the Li rd is good; His I His 1 11. h ei dui cth i u all general ii Le Lord's Supp« i . in feeding t he - .'r us gave thanks and blessed what 11 v men had provided. He also gave thanks on various occasioi i for ttie truth Uod hud revealed and I r the disciples that had given Him. His habit of gratitude or thankfulness to God and fur al wed by Him is reflected in all the Ne* TestamenJ cd in the Doctrine and Co> enants. The oblig . ii .11 - both religious and in ral, both divine and human. lamental element in worship and also in good manners oi 1 us of nil _ - .•" d «-.■!.•' i 1 i ns may \\ ell culth ate toward all bencfaeti rs towar I immedii it- asso- mote human benefactors, i ward humanity and hearing i a\ well relate to any phi ■ of this important, glei ted, quality of chai icter- gratitude. Second Sunday, January i), 1927. Lesson 32. Jeremiah. Text : Book of Jeremiah. • God 's inten ention, men and n:it ions esti ucl ion. Supplcm •• i Referent s: Q. "Beacon Lights of History" (Lord), Tihema 22, 1926 te karere $75 327. Jeremiah called to be a prophet about 627 B.C., when a young man. His ministry extended over a period of 50 years*. A very sorrowful and gloomy man, a prophet of judgments to come. He saw the people, th&ir leaders and the priests and prophets fall away from the worship of God. lie saw Jerusalem fail, but remained. He was later carried into Egypt, and tradition says was slain there by fellow exiles. Questions for Teachers. 1. Compare Isaiah and Jeremiah and the work they did for Judah. 2. What in the life of Jeremiah will help you to something better and a desire to render greater service? I bird Sunday, January 16, 1927. Lesson ll;. Daniel. Texl : Book of Daniel. Objective: To show that a great faith in God will prepare one to L.eet every difficulty in life. Daniel a prophet and leader to his people in captivity. Discuss the most remarkable blessings that came to him as a result of his faith. Discuss his fearlessness in reading God's condemnation at the Croat Feast in Babylon, if time permits and you can thoroughly prepare' the sub- ject, discuss the dream of the great image. (See Restoration of the ( uspei, Chapter 4.) Questions for Teachers. 1. How may one build a faith for himself such as Daniel exempli- fied .' 2. What three attributes besides his faith will most affect the lives of the young people in the church! lourth Sunday, Jam ary 23, 1927 LESSON 54. DANIEL (Continued) Text! Book of Daniel; "Old Testament studies" (Tanner.) Objective: To show thai a great faith in God will prepare one to n i  . Continual warfares Mormon -1; 5: 1-7. Pinal struggle between Nephitea and Lamauites. Mor moji G. 2. Passages fur all the pupils to memorize: I V. Nephi 1: 2; 1: 15-17; Mormon -i: 5. Make q special point of memorizing in these lessons. Questions for Teachers. 1. Mention as many as you can of the blessings that the Nephitea enjoyed during the 200 years following Christ's visit. 2. What qualities are outstanding in Mormon to make him equal with other great Bo k of Mormon characters 1 Fourth Sunday, January 23, 1927. I.l.ssn.N 34. MORON] FINISHES THE NEPHITE ttECOBD. Text: Mormon, chapters 8 and !>, Mm ni 1-10. Objective: To teach that we should cullivate the power of God "for he worketli by power according to the t'ailli of the children of men, the same to-day, to-morrow, ami forever." Moroni 10:7. Suggestions on Preparation and Presentation : 1. Sp f Mormon had Mormon finished the record himself. _. Iteviow Moroni's teachings in regard to faith, hop.-, charity, infant . Fifth Sunday, Jaiiuay ki), ! l J27. Review Questions. 1. What was the sign given to the Nephitea of the Saviour's death! Ik What Lamanite prophet testified of these things shortly before they happened! '.'-. What did the Saviour say to Nephi when he was praying mightily for the sign to be given so that his people might not be destroyed Tihema 22, 1920 T£ KARKRE _ 379 because of their faith? 4. What was the sign given on this land of the Saviour's death? 5. What caused the great darkness? 6. What cry was heard among the people who were spared? 7. Whose voice was heard speaking? 6. When the darkness cleared away, where did the people gather? 9. Wl-ose voice did they hear at this time? 10. From whence did Jesus come? il. What did the multitude do when they saw Him? 12. Hew did they know it was actually the Saviour who had been crucified? l;;. To whom did Jesus give power to baptise? 14. How many times was the Sacrament administered during His visit / 15. What wonderful blessings did the children receive? lti. How long did the people remain righteous after the visit of the Saviour? 17. What were the causes of their growing wicked again? IS. Who was the last great leader of the Nephites? L9. Who was the last prophet to have charge of the records 1 20, How was the brother of J a red blessed of the Lord? KINDERGARTEN DEPARTMENT First Sunday, January 2, 19Z7. Uniform Fast Day Lesson. (JenuruJ Topic: "The hixaiuple  . 1 1. 1 ihs mother wondered if he liked the ball. (c) He does; it was just what he wanted. (d) Hut he didn't thank Siller |V|eis; B OM WO uld >he know he liked n .' .'I. 'rummy ran to thank Si>ter Peters, 3So te karere Tihema 24, 19^0 Peters, Bitting 00 the doorstep, Looks iad t.> Tommy. (b) Hi' slips up and tells her how thankful he is. (c) sister Peters' faec tightens up a* she draws Tommy close t  her. nl) She said Bhe didnM think In- cared. 4. A little bird >ings. (a) Tommy and Sister Peters watch and listen. (I.) Sister Peters asks if Tommy knows what the bird is doing, (c) Tommy replies, giving thanks to the Father. (fl) They name the things it has to lie thankful for. (e) Tommy found that little birds never forget to say thanks — a lesson for all of us. 1 I. How to Give Thanks. 1. Tommy found ways of giving thanks (ai By singing praises, hymns, etc. ( 1) ) By doing kind dec d... (c) By saying ''Thank you.'' 1 d) By being cheerful. -. Tommy wants to know who taught as to be thankful. .'!. Sister Peters tells him Jesus set the example and told us to thank our Heavenly Father. (a) .Jesus thanked His Father for food, clothes, home, friends helpers, etc [it) J n SUa sang B . Vol I. pp. ■ "Sunday Morning In the Kindergarten," Le 18, Time: At tin- time the Mormons were persecuted, 382 i>. KAKERE I lhema -2. 1926 Place: On the Lrail to Salt Lake Valley. Objective: We should not only show our gratitude in words, i>u t also by our deeds. Suggestions to Teachers: While telling the itory emphasise the thought that no matter what happens or what people do to us, we Bhould not hold feelings toward them nor say mean things aboul them. We all more or less get into the habit of finding fault. Lei us break ourselves «it' the habit, and remember that we are not responsible for their actions. hould pity them and pray for them. We should pray for strength .»• might .101 full into the same rut they are in, but ask for help, that we might Btretch forth our hand and help them OUt. This is one way of showing gratitude toward our Heavenly Father. By being kind to others and by helping others show greater gratitude than uttering mere words. Memory Gem: '* For health and food, for love and friend*, For everything His goodness sends We thank the Heavenly Father." — Mary J. Garland. Best Exercise: Let the children prcte:id they are going to move to a new place, where sage brush grows. Let them suggest how they can help make a new home. Let them dramatize the things they suggest. fourth Sunday, January 23, 1927. Topic: ''The Crickets and the (hills. " Theme: During the Early Pioneer Days. Place: salt Lake Valley. Text: "History of I'iah" (Whitney), Vol. 1, pp. I'.ll-'MV "; "Sunday Morning in the Kindergarten,'' Lesson ()!>. Objective: We would show our gratitude by deeds as well as words for the many blessings received. Suggestions to Teachers: Help children to see that no matter what trouble or danger they are confronted with, they can receive help from their Heavenly Father if they but seek Him in Faith, nothing wavering. We must not doubt when we seek for help. We must know it will be given. Also lean the children to show reverence by caring for the bird> that were given to us to he'p jir toct our crops from enemies. When Our Father in Heaven sees us caring for His creations He is pleased, and will bless us. Memory Gem: Same as last Sunday. Songs to be selected from list suggested in First Sunday's lesson. Rest Exercise: Let the children pretend they are feeding the Sea Gulls. Let them run here and there to throw food to the birds who do' so much. Lei them care for them in other ways, like making bird houses. Tihema 22. 1920 TE K.ARI£RE 383 Fifth Sunday, January 30, 1927. Topic: The Birth of Jesus. 1 :,.-. : rod's reign. Pla {'■•;,. : Lead the children to see the wonderful love Heavenly i- u . and of the waj He had of showing it by sending His Onh i down to earth to show us how to lov  te whawhai nui, i hinga ai .1 pana atu ana mi a Kutiwha me tana ope, le wahi tuatom i l ,0  na tan i whakakitea te whakaaro nui o Ihu i roto 1 te Hakari o te Ka ent?a, hei kamahar; tang 1 nei mo te whakaputanga mai [haraira i 10- n> i te whakaponongatanga a n-i Ihipiana. Ko Tana merekara Luatahi i mea ia i te hakari marena - tanga i tetahi pa, ko la nei tetahi o nu;i manuhiri. A he manuhiri whakahonore 1 roto i te whaie Haimona repera. I konei tana whakawahinga a Meri i a la ki te hinu roto i tetahi pouaka kohatu, ko te utu e lite ana ki te utu mo te kotahi tan e mahi ana. Maka 14:.}; Ruka 7:]/. .?. A I/ni ic tangaia kaingit. Ko te kairma taro i te koraha, e rima mano nga tangata i whangaia ki n^ r a taro e rima me nga ika e rua. 1 whaka. akona c thu i ko:^ei: He ttkoranga i runga i tc iilanga tc rAe (order). Ko te whakanohoanga e 30 i roto i te ropu. // m m, ■■."" he paj u katoa Ko nga whare e 1 >ngo nci koutou hei nohoanga wahine, k >re i a ko- tahi e kitea i tenei Eiiona hou. Kua koie te t tai i rau e v> ; a teka-u ma t >ru nga tane, e toru nga Wahine, me nga tamariki e rua. Ko ratou he mea pei mai i a nga hunga kohuru i Nawu, lie taone tera na ratou (na nga ".M.niona"/ i w akatu ki te takiwa o Irinoi. Heoi, ko to ratou hekenga mai ki Le wahi e noho nei ratou i rung a i a ratou kaata okiha, ko etahi na runga mai i te hoiho, Tino whakamomori ratou kia tae ki Hiona, he ahakoa te tekau ma torn ran o nga maero hei haerenga mo ratou, i nga koraha, i nga wahi poup >u, kore raw a ratou i noho mai. Tino kino te wera o nga koraha i haere ai ratou, a ko nga wheua pawharo i hora haere ana i aua koraha, ma tonu i te n^aunga a te ra. Ko etahi o ratou i tuhituhi ki nga mahunga pawharo hei whakaatu ki nga mea to mini o ratou ki te ara e tika ai te haere ki Hiona, penei nga korero, "i haere matou ma tenei ara, ka nui te ora. Hune 2')." Heoi ko te haerenga mai i muri i a ratou o etahi mano tangata, ko nga mea rawa kore kaore nei i whiwhi ki te okiha, ki te hoiho ra- nei, i hari mai i a ratou taonga i runga i nga kaata to ki te ri- ngaringa. He nui hoki nga mea o ratou i mate i te haerenga mai ki te whenua o te kupu whakaau, heoi ko nga kaiolj (kuri mohoao) o nga mania i mohio ki to ratou tokomahata. nga (nga mea i mate nei) me nga ahuatanga i pa ki a ratou i muri mai. Kua hauhakena ke noatia atu e nga Paeonia a ratou taewa, a kua oti ke te whakatakoto o te mapi o te tacjne, i mua o te taenga mai o te hunga too kaata. I tana w a tae noa mai ki naianei kaore ano nga tangata i mohio ki te wha- katakoto taone pera i a Pirikamu Iaanga. I timata mai i te tau Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 389 1847 nga mahi nunui a Pirikamu Iaanga a tae atu ana ki te tau 1880. Oti pu i a ia he taone ki te koraha, a whakanohoia ana ki tetahi iwi matau, rangatira hoki. Ka tupu haere nei hoki ona taone ki te wahanga ki Uta, pera ano me lngarangi te nui. Ka mahi ia, ka ahu i te whenua, ka whakatupu hua rakau, ka keri i nga waro, i era atu mea o te whenua. Ka tupu nui nei hoki ia me tona iwi, me te mana hoki o to ratou hahi. Engari no muri mai, i te wa o te whakanuinga o Kuini Wikitoria, mo te rima tekau tau ona e kuini ana, ka timata te kino a nga tangata o waho o te hahi ki te moe punarua a te iwi "Momona." Na, ka puta te whawhai tino nui, i te mea hoki kua tino whakapumautia te tikanga moe punarua roto i te iwi nei, e rua ano nga whakatupuranga i kawe i tenei tikanga, he ahakoa kihai i mahia nuitia e nga tane katoa o te hahi, i noho pea ki te wha nga tane "Momona" i roto i te kotahi rau (4 per cent), i moe punarua. Ko te moe punarua, kia mahara koutou, ehara i te wahi nui rawa o nga tikanga o te whakapono o te iwi "Momona." I te pahitanga o te ture whakanoa i te moe punarua a te "Mo- mona," ka meatia ko nga wahine tuatahi anake hei moe to- nu, ko etahi katoa atu kaore e maharatia he wahine pono i runga i te aronga o te ture. I- te kaha o te whakaaro o nga tane ki a ratou wahine, ka wehea i a ratou i runga i nga mahi a te kooti whakawa, katahi ka piiratia ki te Hupirimi Kooti me i kore e taea te whakakore o te ture nana nei i wehe a ratou wahine. Heoi ka whakaaetia e te Hupirimi Kooti kia whakahaerea taua kehi, no te whakahaeretanga ka hinga nga 'Momona. " Kore rawa nga tane i pai ki te whakarere i a ratou wahine, ka mea he pai ke to ratou haere ki te whare herehere i te wehea o a ratou wahine, i a ratou tamariki i whanau tika i roto i to ratou hahi. 1 te tatanga pau o te ono tau nga tau nga "Momona" e tukinotia ana ka murua nga whenua katoa te Hahi. Heoi ka mate nei hoki. Ko nga wahine me nga tamariki a nga tane, i mua atu o te ture whakanoa i te moe punarua, ka whakaaetia e te ture, me he me a ka whakamutua iawatia e nga "Momona" i muri mai te moe punarua. 1 te timatatanga te 1890 ka whakamutua rawatia te moe punarua e te iwi "Momona," a haere nei, kua tino tatu te whakaaro o te Kawanatan.ua Amerika kua iiuilu tera mahi. Ki te kitea ana nga mea e moe punarua ana e te hahi ka tapahia ki waho o te hahi, he tino mea kino raw. 1 lenei kj a ratou inaianei, B kaha ana an ki te ki e IcOTC yaw a  a kua tu a ratou tamariki hei kai-whakahaere, liei ma'.iu.iga au ho- ki mo nga tamariki taua kareti. Koia tenei ko to koutou hiahia ki a koutou tamariki i tu- kuna mai ai e koutou ki te kura kia whiwhi i te matauranga, i te whakaaro-nui, no reira hei matakitaki ma koutou i te pai, i te ataahua o nga mahi o te kura. Ko enei tamariki kua mohio ki te whakahaere tikanga no te mea kei a ratou te mana whakahaere; ina hoki atu ratou ki o ratou kainga e kaha ana ratou ki te whakahaere tikanga i waenganui i o ratou iwi katoa E te Hunga Tapu, e nga hoa aroha, koia tenei ko te huarahi e whiwhi ai a koutou tamariki ki te matauranga me te whakaaro nui, no te mea ko te kororia o te Atua ko te matauranga. Na to koutou teina i te Rongopai. Pita Kere KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA. Ko ELDER A. WRIGHT GRANT Spokane, Washing- ton. 1 tae mai a Erata Karanata ki Akarana i te 8 o nga ra Tihema, 1924, a whakaritea ana ki te takiwa o Akarana. 1 te I o nga ra o Maehe 1925 ka tu koia hei Hekeretari Kai- awhina te Mihana. Ka nukuhia i te 21 o Oketopa [925 ki te takiwa o Poneke, a i te 4 o nga ra o Aperira 1929 ka nuku- hia ano ki te takiwa o Waikato mo te taha Pakeha o reira. Tukua honoretia atu i te 25 o Oketopa, 1926. Ko ELDER LESTER S. THOMSON Rexburg, Idaho. 1 tae mai a Tamihana te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1 92 4, a ka whakaritea ki te Takiwa o Hauraki mo te taha Pakeha. A i te 28 o nga ra o Aperira, 1924, ka nukuhia ki Akarana. Ka nukuhia ano ki te takiwa o te Tai Rawhiti i te 3 o Hepetema 1924 a i te 26 o nga ra o Hurae 1925 ka whakaritea koia te tu- muaki mo reira. I tukua honoretia atu ia i te 23 o nga ra o Noema 1926. Tiheina 22, 1926 TE KARI.RE 395 Elder Lester S. Thomson Elder A. Wright Grant NA TE ETITA. E te Hunga Tapu, tena koutou. Tenei te tuku atu nei i te 'Karere" whakamutunga mo te tan 102,). Kua whakaritea hoki e matou he maramataka mo te Tan lion, kia kore ai koutou e wareware ki to koutou manu i nga marama e takoto ake nei. Heoi, kia ora koutou katoa i roto i te Kirihimete me te Tau lion Kotahi ano te kui)ii a Te Karere ki a koutou i tenei wa, Whakaritea nga ture a te Atua, me o koutou kara- ngatanga i roto i te Kingitanga. Ma tenei huarahi anake e whivvhi ai koutou ki te ora, ki te hari. ki te koa. Kaua hoki c penei, "He pakeke, he uaua, nga ara te Tika," engari kia niahara ki te kupu a te Karaiti (Matin l !:.>(•). '"Me ngawari ho- ki taku ioka, he mama taku pikaunga." \o reira kia peia atu nga hiahia taikaha o te kikokiko, kia ngakau tapatahi tatou katoa i roto i nga mahi a te Ariki. Whakaritea te Kupu o te Matuaranga kia poke kore ai u tatou Temepara, whaka- ritea te Whakatekau me nga takoha kia whai hea ai koutou i roto i te kingitanga me nga manaakitanga a te Atua, kia pu- rangatia he taonga ma tatou ki te rangi. Meri Kirihimete me te Hap] Xuia ki a koutou kato.i. ma te Atua tatOU kato.i e ma- naaki i roto i te lau I lou. X.i o koutou inn. 1 iti r.iw .1, \.i nga Etita 39° TE karkki. fihema 22, iy26 He Ripoata na Nireaha Paewai Ki nga etita Te Karere, e hoa ma tena korua e noho mai nei me tooku iwi e aroha nuitia nei e ahau i te po i te ao, mai i te Waipounamu tae noa mai ki te Aotearoa. E te Iwi Maori, tena ra koutou. Ka nui te tangi atu te ngakau i te nui o te mokemoke, i te kore Maori. Heoi. Kei te kura ahau inaianei o te U.A.C. Ka nui te pai o tooku noho i reira, tooku kaha ki te ako, a, kei te mau etalii o nga whakaakoranga, kei te kore eta hi e mau. Ko te nuinga pea kei te mau. Ka nui te pai o nga kai-whakaako ki ahau, te tiaki, te tautoko, me te awhina i a ahau, me to ratou pi- rang] ki te korero ki a ahau me te patai mo te whenua o a in Tireni. E rua nga kaumatua i hoki mai i \iu Tireni i te mi/iana ko Hori Henihana raua ko Erata i^redrickso.n kei konei e kura ana. E te iwi kua tae niaua ko to >ku hoa me a maua tamariki ki te Hui Tau i tu i te 2, 3. 4, 5, nga ra Oket >oa, 1925. 1 te tahi o nga ra i te po, ka tu te huihuinga o nga kaumatu 1 o Niu Tireni. I reira ka kite ahau i nga kaumatua kua hoki- hoki mai i Niu Tireni. Ko Harihana, Hoijpuruku, Romeni, Matin Kauri, Pene Katata, Leo B. Sharp, SJ. ote^e, A lire J, Parry, Austin, Morrison, Garff, Miller. Patrick, ^\ e t )ver, Xitama, me etahi atu kaumatua kua warewaie ahau ki nga ingoa. Nuku pea i te waru tekau nga kai niatua. i reira hoki nga wahine. 1 te 2 o nga ra he Ratapu, a i te ata i te tekau ka tu te karakia nui. I reira te Tunuiakitanga le Hahi. i reira nga Apotoro Tekau ma Rua, te Petariaka, nga 1 inuaki nga Whitu Tekau, me te Hunga Tapu, 12,000 pea, kii tonu le Tapenakara, te Assembly rial 1, me nga tatau. me nga ma- rae (lawns) i te tangata. 1 ahau e whakarongo ana ki te Poropiti e kor ro ana ka hoki atu nga whakaaro ki te kainga, me tooku wawata kia rongo hoki koutou i tenei tangata e korero ana, e whakaro- ngo ana te Iu,030 tangata i tana wa ano. 1 tenei ata i korero a I imuaki Niperi raua ko Timnaki Ivins. 1 te ahiahi i korero ana a Apotoro Rihara, a Apotoro Reel Smoot, a Apotoro Raimana, a Apotoro Melvin J. Ball- arJ. Ka mutu i enei tangata ki te kore .0. I ahau e whaka- rongo ana ki enei tangata e koiero ana ko oku hoa noho ko Tihema 22, 1920 TE KARERE 397 Wiremu Katene raua ko Hugh Geddes. 1 moe a Hiu raua ko toona hoa wahine me ta raua tama a Mohi me tona wahine i to maua whare i te po o te Paraire kua pahure ake nei. I tenei ra ka tutaki ahau ki to tatou apotoro, a Apotoro Rawiri Makei me toona hoa wahine. I pohiri ia ki a maua kia haere ki tona whare ki te kai, kia patai ano ia ki a maua mo te ahua. I runga i te mea kua tae mai te waka hei whakahoki i a maua ki Rokena 90 maero te tawhiti kahoro i taea te haere ki tona tono i tenei wa. Otira i toku kitenga tuatahi- tanga i a ia ka korero ahau mo te ahuatanga o te Maori me te take o tooku haere, he awhina i te Maori. Ka tae tooku korero mo te pai o te Poari o te Kawenatanga ki te tautoko i ahau i runga i ooku whakaaro. Ka tae hoki ooku korero mo te Hui ki Tikitiki, mo te Kura Moromona, mo tooku kupu ki a Ngata me te iwi i te hui, tukua te Kura Moromona kia haere ana i te taha o te Kura o Te Aute. Kahore e pai ko tetahi e ora, a ko tetahi e mate, me ora tahi. Heoi kahore ahau i kite i te mutunga, i hoki ahau i te po o te Ratapu ki te kura. Kaati, he take ke tenei, e pa ana ki te whutu-paoro o Amerika. I te pureitanga o to matou kura U.A.C. ki Colo- rado, na te timuaki o te kura ahau i mau i runga i toona mo- tokaa. I purei ki te Ogden, te taone a Timuaki Angiha T. Raiti, a i kite hoki ahau i a ia. Kahore ahau i pai ki tenei purei, he patu tangata te mahi. Tekau ma tahi nga tangata ki te taha kotahi. 1 te mutunga o te purei, tekau ma rua pea nga tangata i matemate nga tinana. I waimarie i wiini ai i a matou. Mehemea he Maori te iwi e purei nei, kua mate- mate nga Pakeha. Te take, mehemea kahore te pooro i te tangata e ahei ana tetahi atu ki te tuki i tana tangata, ka- hore ra te pooro i a ia. No reira ahau i ki ai kahore e pai ma te Maori he purei i tenei ahua purei, he toa hoki te Maori ki te tuki i te tangata. Ko enei ano oku korero ki te iwi nei. Kati nei enei korero hei korerotanga ma matOU ma nga tai- tama: iki. He wa pooti tenei mo nga mema par em ate Amerika, a i konei a Matin Kauri e kauh.au ana mo te taha ki a Senator (Apostle) Reed Smoot, Republican. I konei hoki a Erata Hoani Tatana. Kua maeriwe ke matou ka tae mai. Na i ki mai i Niu Tireni a ia e kauhau ana. Nana hoki a Takana raua ko Takare i marena, me eta' 1 atu. Ka )G nga tail ina- ianei i tona taenga ki kona. (Tana te roanga) 39« l E KARERE 1920 Erata Hon Henihano Erema Pitihana "Nik" Paewtii (Tumuaki te U.A.CJ Ko te Whakaeminga o nga Korero KI TE EXIT A Ko nga Mahi Hui Tau He Mihi Aroha ki Te Puea Heran ;i 3-6 Ko te Marae te Hui Tau 3^5 Powhiri 66 Ripoata [98 Ko n^a Powhiri Hui Pariha Haki Pei 244, 266 Hauraki 244 Ngapuhi 3} Pei Whairangi 244 Tai Rawhiti 33, 266 Taranaki 343 Waikato 32 Ko nga Ripoata Hui Atawhai 268, W> Ko n^a Ripoata Hui Pariha Haki Pei 63. 328 Hauraki 61, 269 Tai Rawhiti 92 Waikato 27 , 99 Ko nga Ripoata Kauwhau Haere Ani Paki 30 [riparete Pomare J 27 Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE 399 Paepae W. Witehira 274 Tu Geo. Stakman 59 Ko nga Ripoata K.ura Hapati Mo te Ra nga Whaea 203, 204, 205 Ko nga Ripoata Matenga, Tanumanga Hoani Tiu Ratima 30 Kahukore Karaka Pairama 267, 304 Katene Poutu Penekupa 64 Koro Waerea 206 Metapere Matai 161 Nga Peepi a Hemi Pohutuhutu me Tatana Arona 330 Otene Tuehu Pom are 329 Piki Waerea 233 Piripi Matenga 306 Richard Watene 327, 330 Ta Timi Kara 315 Te Paea Cunningham 274 Tepara Christina Reti 304 Tepora Ruru 162 Ko nga Whakamihitanga Ki a Ngapuhi Renata 174 Ki a Te Puea Herangi 320 Ko nga Ripoata Mo te Ahuatanga nga Takiwa He Kotiro Aroha He Manaakitnga ' 201 He Marenatanga 162 Ko nga Ripoata no Hiona "Ma nga Hua ka Mohiotia ai" 206 Nireaha Paewai 364, 396 Ko nga Ripoata Poroporoaki Ma hi a 305 KO NGA HOKINGA ATU KI HIONA 140, 203, 268, 307, 1S2, 307, 394 KO NGA TUHINGA MAI E Mahi ana Tatou 1110 te Aha? 209 1 le Kupu Whakaatu 100 He Kauwhau Pai 90 He Morehu no te Whare Iharaira 18, 54, to8 He T i ka ranei nga Hani Katoa? 356 He Whakaahua Pai 200, 235, 207 I It- Whakaaturanga mo te W hare [haraira I rotO i nga "Momona" 387 Ko nga Mahi a te Kura I lapati hei Painga ma Tatou jo;. 236 Ko nga Pukapuka   369 Significance of Partaking the Sacrament 53, 88 MAHI HUI ATAWHAI 34, 66, 103, 132, 158, 194, 229, 261, 300, 323, 354, 383 NA TE ETITA Bound Volumes 66 E Ono nga Take mo te Whakatekau 174 He Mihi 174 He Mihi Kirihimete 395 Ripoata Hui Tau 172 KO TE MUTUNGA TE KARERE Tihema 22 1926 IHAIA 9:6 "Kua whanau nei hoki he tamaiti ma tatou, kua homai he tama ki a tatou." I te ahiahi o te Ratapu, i te 5 o nga ra o Tihema, 1926, ka puta mai he tama hou ki a Tumuaki Hoani H. iinikini raua ko tona hoa wahine. Ka nui te ora o te peepi nei, me tona mama hoki. Kahore ano Ida kitea he ingoa mona i te_ nei tuhinga. Ka nui te hari me te koa i puta mai ki o raua nei ngakau, i te mea hoki kua oti ke te whakapuaki e nga takuta o Amerika e, kua kore te wahine nei e kaha ki te whakawhanau tamariki. Ma tenei ka mohio tatou tera he matauranga e nui atu ana i to nga takuta, i to nga tangata matauranga. Kia ora koe e Sister Tinikini korua ko to peepi, kia ora hoki koe e te Tumuaki. Ma te Atua koutou ko a korua ta- mariki e manaaki e tiaki i roto i te Tail Hou. Mere Kirihi- mete me te Hapi Nuia ki a koutou katoa na nga Etita o Te Karere. Hui Pariha ki Waipawa E te Hunga Tapu, tena koutou. Kua tae atu te rongo te pai o nga hui o te.takiwa o Heretaunga nei mai i te Wai- pounamu tae noa atu ki te pito te Hiku. Na, i te mea kua whakaritea kia tu te Hui Pariha ki Waipawa a te IS me te 16 nga ra o Hanuere 1927, maku e whakahau atu ki te Hunga Tapu e noho tata ana kia haere mai ki te whakarite i tenei take. Kaua e riro ma Poneke, ma Ngapuhi ranei e whakaki t > tatou whare. Han*.' mai ki te whakarongo ki to tatou tu- muaki e whakamarama ana i te m, pi. Haere mai ki te ako i te tauira e mohio ai tatou ki te haere tika ki te (Drang . rb- nutanga, no te mea "E roa a ram, g tata a runga," 1 te mea hoki kua oti te whakamarama e te tumuaki kua tino tat 1 te wa inaianei te haerenga kororia mai to tato 1 Ariki. Haere mai, haere mai, haere mai. Haere mai e te Hu- nga Tapu, haere mai hoki koutou e nga hoa aroha. He i B. I leke, rumua ki rakiwa ( I e lu. id Meha, l umua k 1 Peka ) Tihema 22. 1920 1 E K ARK RE MO TE HUI TAU E te Hunga Tapu, Tena koutou, me o tatou whanaun^a, hoa-tata, me Qga hoa aroha. Kia tan nga manaakitanga a te Atua ki a koutou— kia u, kia matau, kia ngohengohe ki te Rongopai. Heoi nga mihi. I tu te hui a te komiti Hui Tau i te Hui Pariha i hori ake nei o te takiwa o Heretaunga (H.B.) i tu ki Korongata. I taua hui i te marama e mate ana nga awhina Hui. Ka motini te Tumuaki Mihana (Pres. J. Howard Jenkins) kia whakahaua te Hekeretari, kia tuhi inoi ki nga Takiwa o te Mihana kia tiri (tou makamaka) riwai (taewa, parareka) nga mema o aua Takiwa e whaiwhakaaro ana ki te awhina i te Hui Tau. Ko nga hua o aua tiringa riwai hei awhina i nga kohi Hui Tau e tera tutuki mo te Hui Tau ka tu ki Waikato, i te tau e heke iho nei. Heoi, nga whakamarama. Tenei ahau te inoi etu nei ki a koutou (ki nga Takiwa, Peka, mema, ara. ki te Hunga Tapu katoa o Aotearoa) i ru- nga i taua whiriwhiringa whakataunga kua huaina ake nei, kia wehe i tetahi, i etahi rarangi ranei o a koutou tiringa ri- wai, mo tenei take whaiwhakaaro. (Ko nga hua o aua rara- ngi me tuku ki te makete, ko nga moni e tuku mai.) E whakahau atu ana ano hoki kia kaha ki te whakarite i tenei take. Ki te whakaaro, ma enei tu whakahaere e ora ai nga Hui Tau, ara te Hui Tau ki Waikato e heke iho nei. WILSON PAEWAI. Wawahanga o te Kohi Tau, Hui Tau X200 Bay of Islands 15 Tamaki 20 East Coast Te Hauke 17 10 (Gisborne, etc) 10 10 Taranaki 10 Going, P. 2 Wairarapa 10 Hauraki 12 10 Waipounamu 600 Korongata 10 10 Wairoa 10 Moawhango 5 Whangarei 15 Manawatu 5 Waikato 20 Mahia 5 Waipawa 500 Nuhaka 15 Porirua 6 £200 Tihema 22, 1926 TE KARERE A t€ 1 nga ra Pepuere, 1927 Ka timata ano te mahi kura a te MAORI AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE Tukua mai o hereni inaianei, kia tino whaiti ai a te timatanga o te kura. KO TE TIKANGA, utua katoatia i mua i to urunga KO NGA EKEPENIHA Mo te kai, ruma, hopi, kanara, etc. £16 Mo te takuta, rongoa, etc. 10 Mo te Kakahu Kura (Uniform) 2 2 Mo te rakau, neira etc. (ma nga mea anake e ako nei ki te mahi kamura) I Mo nga pukapuka, pene rakau, mangu- mangu, etc. e tata ana ki te 2 Me etahi atu pauna hei hoko kakahu mo te Ratapu, hei utu hoki i te pikitia, kanikani, rare, etc. TE KARERK i 'ihcmii 22, 1926 KO NGA PUKAPUKA HEI HOKONCA Ro enei etahi rma pukapuka e takoto ana kei te tari o te Mihana hei bo- konga ki nga mea e hiahia ana ki te hoko. Nga mea e hiahia ana ki etahi o enei pukapuka me tuku atu ki te Secretary, Box 72, Auckland. STANDARD CHURCH WORKS Teachers Bibles, with Ready Refereru e, Leather 25-0 New Testament & Kead\ Reference-, Leather n-0 Book of Mormon, Cloth ... 2-6 & 7-6 . Half Leather go , Leather IO-0 & 15 Pearl of Great Price, Cloth. 2-0 Doctrine & Covenants, Cloth 5-0 ,& Pearl of Great Price, Leather 9-0 MAORI BOOKS AND TRACTS Mauri Ready Reference, Cloth 2 o .Leather ... 3*6 Ko Te Kawenata Hou, Cloth 1-9 " " " " Me Nga Himene, Leather 3 in 1 11-6 " Pukapuka a Moroni ona, ("loth ... 5-0 , Leather 15-0 Akoranga Me Nga Kawenata $ Peaia UtU Nui, Cloth $-0 ', Leather 1$ Combination of A,B, & C Traits. Leather, Spec. Offer I SUNDAY SCHOOL TEXT BOOKS The Restoration of th 4-0 What Jesus Taught 5-0 Kindergarten' Plan Book, Kesler & Morris 36 Sunday- Morning In the Kindergarten, Morton 4-6 SONC BOOKS Songs of Zion, Cloth 2-3 Leather ..66 Deseret Song Books. Cloth ... 3-0 " , Leather ... 00 Kindergarten & Primary Song Book 3-0 DOCTRINAL AND REFERENCE WORKS Articles of Faith, Limp Leather. Med. Size, Talmige 8-3 Vitality of Mormonism " 4-0 Scientific Aspects ol Mormonism, Nelson o-o Restoration of the Gospel, If idtsoe 4 o losenh Sn ; »!i's Teachings ;-6 he Young, Weed 4 6 tlmnge H-q b-Q 2-0 Smith & Their Fulfillment. Morris 0-0 KO J. H. TINIKINJ TE KAJ TA ME TE KAI PANUI HOKI M. A. C. KORONGATA. HASTINGS. H. B.